JP2019081068A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a novel game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.SOLUTION: A jackpot game among a plurality of jackpot games different in degree of advantage is executed on the basis of a win result of a win/loss determination made on the basis of reception of game balls in start pockets 2101 and 2102. Maximum profit expectation display performance which can give a player an expectation for a maximum profit jackpot game having the highest degree of advantage to be executed is performed even being in a stage where what jackpot game to be executed has not been determined yet. One of a plurality of lottery modes different in probability of determining that the jackpot game to be executed is the maximum profit jackpot game is determined and the jackpot game to be executed is determined on the basis of the determined lottery mode. A display performance is executed at a stage where what jackpot game to be executed has not been determined yet and at a stage where what jackpot game to be executed is determined.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 186

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine").

  Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening, and when the result of the lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out.

  A gaming machine of this type is provided with a frame-shaped light emitting decorative member which is disposed in a door frame so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window and which is three-dimensionally formed into a predetermined shape and which can emit light. While decorating the outer periphery of the game area which faces from a game window with a shape, by emitting light, a decoration effect is heightened and a player is made to be able to be enjoyed (for example, refer to patent documents 1).

JP, 2009-195354, A

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the appeal to the player is low, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player in the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of these circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a new suitable gaming machine that has high appeal and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  In order to achieve the above object, the invention of the means 1 comprises a game board having a game area into which game media are inserted by the operation of a player, a main frame which detachably supports the game board, and a main frame A door frame having a game window in which at least the game area of the game board supported by the main body frame is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the front and closed, and below the game window A plate light emitting decoration means having a plate portion formed and bulging forward and storing the gaming medium, and a light emitting decoration portion capable of emitting light, and provided close to the plate light emitting decoration means, the game A first light emitting decoration means which decorates a predetermined area of the outer periphery of the window and which is capable of emitting light toward the player side and a different area from the predetermined area of the outer periphery of the gaming window is decorated, the first light emitting decoration Bulging in front of the means and has a light-emitting bulging portion A second light emitting decoration means, and integrally formed by the three-dimensional shape of the decoration provided to the light emitting decorative portion of the dish light emitting decoration means and the decoration by the three dimensional shape of the decoration provided to the second light emitting decoration means; A decoration is performed, and a light emission effect in which the light emission decoration portion of the dish light emission decoration means and the bulging portion of the second light emission decoration means cooperate to perform light emission is performed, with respect to the front surface of the main body frame The bulging portion is positioned on the open side of the door frame supported so as to be openable and closable, and the light emitting bulging portion is not only lightable toward the inside of the gaming machine which is the game window side in front view It is possible to emit light by a specific light emitting unit that is capable of emitting announcing light to be notified to employees of the game hall while being configured to be able to emit light even toward the outside of the gaming machine, and the specific light emitting unit It is also characterized as being used as a light emitting portion that emits light. The gaming machine.

  According to this invention, it is possible to provide a new gaming machine.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame which comprises a pachinko machine, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the removal | desorption structure of the upper shaft support bracket of a main body frame, and the upper support bracket of an outer frame. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper-support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and looked at it after. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was looked after. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit by photography. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and observed the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen after. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of the ball rental unit of the plate unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which the press operation part in the operation unit was pushed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus and was looked after. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit and was looked after. It is a front view shown in the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit. It is a front view of an antistatic mechanism. It is a perspective view at the time of seeing the door frame which shows the state provided with the antistatic mechanism from the back. It is a principal part rear view of the door frame which shows the state provided with the antistatic mechanism. It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball | bowl feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and viewed from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front, (D) These are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects and shows a door frame in the approximate center of the up-down direction. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was looked after. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the award ball unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was looked after. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and it saw after it. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the delivery path, the delivery motor, and the delivery rotary body in a winning ball apparatus. It is sectional drawing which shows the rolling passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl outlet opening-and-closing unit in a main body frame, and the fal cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of a substrate unit in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was looked after. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board | substrate box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of a firing power supply substrate box, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and was seen from the back side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device and a sliding rod for a main frame It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was looked after. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a sliding door for glass doors and a sliding door for body frames in a lock device. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a fraud control member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen after. (A) is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the game panel of embodiment different from the example, such as FIG. 104, and was seen from the front. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board after the display of FIG. 107; FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 107 cut in the vertical direction. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the front component of embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 grade | etc., And was seen from the front. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board when FIG. 110 is viewed later. It is a fragmentary sectional view showing the crime prevention structure in the axial support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main part frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally upper right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the lower left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonal back. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at an attacker unit from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the back bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the attacking unit partially and was looked after. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at center goods from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a center character later. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center part by each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center thing by each main structure, and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at the receiving unit of center goods from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the receiving unit of center goods after. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the receiving unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the receiving unit and was looked after. It is a front enlarged view which shows the motion of the receiving unit in center goods, and is a figure which shows the aspect by which a game ball is induced | guided | derived to left side route. It is a front enlarged view which shows the motion of the receiving unit in center goods, and is a figure which shows the aspect by which a game ball is induced | guided | derived to the right side route. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive of a receiving unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive of the movable decoration of a receiving unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the flow of the game ball in the receiving unit in center goods. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit into every main component, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into main component members, and was seen after. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back front decoration unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back front decoration unit in the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back front decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back front decoration unit and was looked after. It is the perspective view which looked at the back up production unit in the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back up production unit in the back unit back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back-up production | presentation unit for every main unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back-up production | presentation unit for every main unit, and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at the back up center unit in a back up production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back up center unit in a back up production unit back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper center unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back upper center unit from the military officer stone hand. It is an explanatory view showing desorption of the 2nd rise-and-fall decoration object in a back upper center unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper side unit in a back up performance unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper side unit in a back up performance unit, and it saw after it. It is a front view explaining a motion of a back up center unit in a back up production unit. FIG. 160 is a front view illustrating the movement of the back upper center unit continued from FIG. 159; FIG. 160 is a front view illustrating the movement of the back upper center unit continued from FIG. 160; It is a front view explaining movement of a back upper side unit in a back up production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the under-back production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the under-back production unit in a back unit back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the under-back effect unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the under-back effect unit for every main member, and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front unit in a back lower performance unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a back lower front unit in a back lower performance unit back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower front unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back bottom front unit and was seen after. It is a front view which shows a lower back rendering unit in a normal state. It is a front view shown in the state which raised the back and front slider of the back and front unit in a back and forth production unit to the middle. It is a front view which shows the state which raised the back bottom front slider of a back bottom front unit to a raising end. It is a front view shown in the state which raised the decoration in a back down and a back in a back down rendering unit to the appearance position. It is a front view which shows the state which rotated the pointer member of the back decoration in the state of FIG. 174. FIG. FIG. 17 is a front view showing the back lower front slider of the back lower front unit ascended to the rising end and the back lower back middle decoration ascended to the appearance position. It is a front view shown in the state where it is rotated to the appearance position and the back bottom back side decoration body in the back bottom effect unit. FIG. 180 is a front view showing the back, back, back, and back decorative body raised to the appearance position in the state of FIG. 177; FIG. 178 is a front view showing the back and front slider in the state of FIG. 178 ascending to the rising end. FIG. 180 is a front view showing the back and front slider in the state of FIG. 177 ascending to the rising end. It is a front view of a back lower right production unit. It is a front view of the jackpot mode determination effect device which constitutes the back lower right effect unit. It is a top view of a jackpot mode determination presentation device. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a BB sectional view in FIG. 182, and is a diagram showing a flow of gaming balls. It is a front view of the game board which shows a motion of a back-up effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows a motion of a lower back rendering unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. It is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a periphery side relay terminal board, an abnormal sound signal interruption board, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of an abnormal sound signal blocking board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply disconnection occurrence. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening prize winning process. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot game preparation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot game mode determination processing. It is an example of a table used for jackpot game mode determination processing at the time of jackpot flag ON. It is an example of a table used for jackpot game mode determination processing when a game ball passes the right gate at the time of jackpot winning of a normal type. It is an example of a table used for jackpot game mode determination processing when a game ball passes the left gate at the time of jackpot winning of a normal type. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot game processing. It is a table for determining the display effect pattern displayed on a mini liquid crystal display based on the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 which is processing of the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the display effect pattern displayed on a mini-liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the display effect displayed on the display area of a mini liquid crystal display.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened to the main frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Furthermore, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame constituting a pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, a main frame, and a game board constituting a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the outer frame 2 installed on the island facility (not shown) of the game hall and the outer frame 2 are pivotably supported openably at the front side. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3 and a game area 1100 which is fixedly attached to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is struck, and the front of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 It has the door frame 5 pivotally supported openably and closably with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to close from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a space below the game window 101 for storing game balls. A tray-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 are provided.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in the drawings, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are formed in vertically long rectangular shapes respectively extending in the vertical direction in front view. The dimensions of the vertical width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 with respect to the outer frame 2 are formed to be slightly short. The decorative cover 23 is attached to the front of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are arranged such that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  In front view, the pachinko machine 1 is such that the game area 1100 where the game ball is struck through the substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and it projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper dishes 301 and lower dishes 302 are arranged up and down. In the front lower right corner of the door frame 5, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed, and the player handles the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper tray 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the gaming balls in the upper plate 301 are driven into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with a hitting strength according to the rotation angle, and it is possible to play a game.

  Although details will be described later, although the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player can view the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, the player can not touch the game ball or the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 114) in the game area 1100, various winning openings, prizes or the like. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, there are provided various control boards and a cover body 1250 which is closed so as to cover the rear of the game board 4.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Furthermore, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support bracket of the main body frame and the upper support bracket of the outer frame. FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the lateral direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12 and 13 are provided. They are assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, There is provided an engagement notch 15 which penetrates and is recessed to the left and right direction center side. A mounting step 10a recessed from the other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is supposed to be.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light-weight metal molds (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is substantially flat, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. A protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extruding direction) is provided to enhance strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 112). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility of the game hall, etc. While being able to make it easy to hold the pachinko machine 1 as a finger hold, the design of the appearance can be enhanced. In addition, there are also drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The connection member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 to be in the left-right direction. To the side frame plates 12 and 13 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 in the vertical direction to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and opposite to the vertical piece 18 It has a plate-like engagement piece 19 which can be inserted into and engaged with the engagement cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 extending in the direction. In this example, the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left-right asymmetrical The vertical pieces 18 are formed separately in the front and back direction. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively formed in symmetrical shapes. It is done.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 abut on the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are inserted into and engaged with the portion 15 by screwing predetermined screws into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the upper inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw The upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is supposed to be. Furthermore, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the lower inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is disposed to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support fitting 20 and fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower side frame 12 of the left side. Fixed on the front surface of the reinforcing bracket 22 and the reinforcing bracket 22 disposed so as to support the lower surface of the lower supporting bracket 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be able to open and close.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projection piece 20b projecting forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a than the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion Support rod hole 20c notched to be bent from the right end near the front end in the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame hanging downward from the left end of the fixed piece 20a and the support protruding piece 20b A plate-like hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) in contact with the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hanging along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (figure 14 and a stop drop 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the drop wall 20e and sloped inward at the inlet end of the support well 20c. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 67) of an upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook 20c of the upper support fitting 20. Further, the upper support fitting 20 is configured such that the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 can be connected by the fixed piece 20a and the depending fixed piece 20d.

  The upper support fitting 20 has the strength of the support protrusion 20b enhanced by the depending wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 disposed on the back of the cover can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, and the appearance of the lock can be improved. In addition, the support hook 20c formed in the support projection 20b is bent in a V shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed (right side) toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted on and fixed to the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projection 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from near the front end of the support projection 21c. And the support protrusion 21d. A main body frame support formed on a main body frame support bracket 644 (see FIG. 70 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support fitting 21. After inserting the support projection 21 d of the support fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame support bracket 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support hook hole 20 c Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner.

  Further, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, two closing plates 24 and 25 arranged at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction are attached and fixed inside the side frame plate 13 on the right side. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25 a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. See 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 97) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The main body frame 3 can be opened relative to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcement fitting 22. The guide plate 26 guides the main body frame 3 smoothly when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protrusion 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the rivet 28 supports the support protrusion 20b. It is pivotally supported rotatably. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a in the right direction from the stopper portion 27a protruding forward from the position supported by the rivet 28 and the position supported by the rivet 28 The operating portion 27b which protrudes, the elastic piece 27c which protrudes from the opposite side to the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the front end of the stopper portion 27a And an arc-shaped end surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as moving away from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (B) and FIG. 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner surface of 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is an inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c. The head space portion of the body frame 3 is not closed, and a space in which the pivot pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed at the head space portion of the support hook 20c. .

  In the support mechanism of the pivot support pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example, the pivot support pin 633 is inserted into the end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and the stopper portion 27a In the state where the front end side is opposed to the stop drooping portion 20f of the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f and the state is in contact) In the usual pivotally supported state, the support pin 633 positioned in the end space portion of the inclined hole of the support hole 20c formed by bending and the end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a The centers are shifted in the diagonal direction and opposed to each other. And, in this normal support state, the support pin 633 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in a state of being in contact with the front end portion of the support hook hole 20 c. Since the load on the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, when the operation portion 27b is turned to turn the lock member 27, the lock member 27 can be smoothly turned. It has become. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the tip end surface 27d is taken as the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support weir 20c and abuts on the circular arc tip surface 27d, the operative force F is supported A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the end surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped end surface 27d, and one side of an inclined hole of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact part with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment to turn the tip in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) in which the tip end separates from the support projecting piece 20b does not work, and the pivot pin 633 is the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole Maintain the state of being held between To. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 and elasticity formed integrally by synthetic resin It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if the end of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) that is released from the support projecting piece 20b by applying an unreasonable force, one side of the end of the stopper portion 27a Since it does not rotate in the direction in which it abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f and disengages further, the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b.

  In addition, even if the shape of the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 as well. Since the tip end side of the stopper portion 27a just contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the applicant of the present invention has a point that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise for supporting the main frame 3 to the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close, lower support brackets in main frame support holes (not shown) formed in the main frame support bracket 644 (see FIG. 67) of the main frame 3 It is necessary that 21 support protrusions 21d be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook 20c. Then, when the pivotal support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedging hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (C), the pivotal support pin 633 does not abut the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support weir 20c. The tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the pivoting pin 633 so that the pivoting pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (D), this state is held even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Then, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projection 20b to turn the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support wedge hole 20c. It can be removed from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main frame 3 is lifted by lifting the main frame support hole formed in the main frame support bracket 644 and the support projection 21 d of the lower support bracket 21 to thereby release the main frame 3 into the outer frame 2. Can be removed from the

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extrusion type material of aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility arranged in a row, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island Although such work is carried out by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be made easy to strike, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily installed in the existing island facility. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) as an extrusion-shaped material, it becomes possible to form a thinner wall while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame, When viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 67 etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inner side of the side frame boards 12 and 13, the lateral width can be widened. Can be attached to the main unit frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and fixed in a state in which the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased. It is possible to make it a square shaped framework. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of the frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall not shown, adjacent devices (for example, It can be attached closely with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. Furthermore, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly elongated circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the right side decoration unit 200 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the dish unit 300 A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for performing a game ball driving operation, and a rear side of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. And ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the fal cover unit 540, and mounted so as to close the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. And a glass unit 590.

1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 28 shows a state of wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view expanding and showing.

  As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 of this example is a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which is penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially oval shape which is vertically elongated. A frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the front of the door frame base main body 110 on the lower end left and right sides of the game window 101, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110 A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base main body 110 and supporting the handle device 500 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side in front view. It further comprises a cover member 134 attached to the front of the door frame base body 110. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower portion of the game window 101 with a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side from the center in the horizontal direction ) Mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotational position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 below the launch cover 191 A handle device relay substrate 192 relaying connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100 and a rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192 are covered. Door frame arranged on the opposite side to the rear cover (in rear view) with respect to the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 etc. with the center in the left / right direction sandwiching the center of the rear cover A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a rear end surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 A wire holding member 197 for holding a part of the wire 196 (see FIG. 28) connecting the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of the present example, the overall rigidity is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled by rivets or the like on the rear side of the rectangular door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin. It has the strength which can fully support each decoration unit 200,240,280, the dish unit 300 grade | etc.,.

  The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to 4140, and includes an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. In this example, the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, the decoration substrates 430, 432 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, the sensors 432a, 432b, The wire 196 connecting the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the bowl unit 300, etc. to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140 etc. As will be described later in detail, the main relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are held by the wiring holding member 197 and extended backward, as will be described later. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically elongated frame shape as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 etc. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the drawing, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curve shape in which the left and right and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a linear shape extending left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the far cover unit 540 can be inserted through the pivoting side (left side in front view) on the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and widths of left and right side sides are the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivoting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed behind the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is supposed to be.

  The door frame base main body 110 is disposed on the left and right outside of the lower side of the game window 101 in addition to the game window 101, and the speaker attachment portion 111 for attaching and fixing the side speakers 130 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached and fixed. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 penetrate in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 of the tray unit 300 are sent to the ball feeding unit 580 A ball feed opening 113 for feeding, and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 by slanting obliquely so that the right (open side) end of the front disposed at the lower right corner in front view and bulging forward is retracted. A wire passage port 115 which penetrates in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment portion 114 and through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass; Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a relay board attachment portion 117 for attaching the handle device relay board 192 to the lower side in the ball feed unit attachment recess 112; From the disposition closer to the center than the speaker attachment portion 111 on the board attachment portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (axial support side) for attaching the door frame base substrate 194 and the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 projecting backward and the door frame base main body 110 is recessed toward the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the game window 101 to the rear side. The glass unit support stepped portion 110a which can be in contact with the front outer peripheral edge of the front face of the game window, and the glass unit locking member 190 which protrudes rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a door frame protrusion 110c that protrudes backward from the lower side by a predetermined amount. This door frame protrusion 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main frame 3 described later. It is supposed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked to the main body frame 3, and an incorrect tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Also, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from invading and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d which protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions by fitting the positioning protrusion 110 d with the fitting groove 612.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided at its front surface with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, etc. In addition, a large number of mounting holes are formed at appropriate positions for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like. In the door frame base main body 110, the mounting boss 110g for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and the mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18 etc.) for mounting the side speaker cover 338 are suitably positioned. Each is formed.

  Further, in the door frame base main body 110, the lower disc ball supply port 310g in the disc unit base 310 of the disc unit 300 described later between the ball feed unit attachment recess 112 and the board attachment portion 118 and At a position corresponding to the double ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Furthermore, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side thereof above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111, and includes a shallow dish-shaped security concave portion 120 recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape from the front side is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120. The crime prevention member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Thereby, in order to cheat the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to make a hole by a thin drill or the like from the joining portion between the side decoration unit 200, 240 and the dish unit 300 as metal. It can be blocked by the crime prevention member 121, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

  Further, although the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) forward from the center of the game area 1100 in front view It is obliquely fixed so as to be at the position of 5 m), and the sound can be most efficiently delivered to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the side speakers 130 are mainly configured to output middle-to-high range sounds, and are disposed at positions separated as far as possible from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, it is possible to output sounds with high stereo feeling.

  These side speakers 130 have their outer peripheries sandwiched by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and the speaker attachment portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 disposed on the rear side. It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the mounting boss 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape whose front side is opened as shown in FIG. 25 to FIG. 27 and the like. It has a step 195a recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the. The wire holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 etc., the wire holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction, and the cross section is formed in an I shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three each in the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends. The wire holding member 197 has the end portion on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 in the vertical direction at the step portion 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. It is pivotally supported around the extended axis, and although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wire holding member 197 is rotated toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, the wire holding member 197 is It can be accommodated in the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  The wire holding member 197 has a wire 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side, and a predetermined binding band is attached to the holding holes 197a paired in the upper and lower direction. The wiring 196 can be held by inserting the 198 and tightening the wiring 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring 196 to the main body frame 3 As a result, it is pushed forward and pivots in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thus, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end of the wire holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wire 196 extending from the free end of the wire holding member 197 to the main frame 3 is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) in the vicinity. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, wiring is held by the wiring 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in the direction of moving away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (the direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the folded wire 196 on the free end side of the wire holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wire 196.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the end of the wire holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is moved by the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end moves to the main body frame 3 side. As it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and is held so that a part of the wiring 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 does not move in the vertical direction, On the other hand, when opening and closing the door frame 5, the wire 196 can be folded or unfolded in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wire holding member 197, and the wire 196 is caught or pinched when the door frame 5 is opened or closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems (breaks in the wiring 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.).

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the wire holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, the upper and lower sides of the door frame 5 may be opened and closed even if a force is applied through the wire 196. It is possible to make it difficult to move in the direction, and the wiring 196 can be reliably folded in the lateral direction to prevent occurrence of a defect.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is put between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wire holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the door frame 5 can not be closed, or the main control board 4100 as the main body side electric device, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, etc. Respective decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432 as electric devices, speakers 130, 222, 262, ball lending units 360, Bundle 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even when the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Because the force can be released at the same time, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from being pulled and to prevent the occurrence of a failure such as disconnection of the wire 196 or disconnection of the connection connector. it can. In addition, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, the conventional one (for example, JP 2009-213675 A) And the wiring 196 does not slide, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being rubbed to cause a fault such as an electric leakage or a disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The holding band 197 can prevent the holding band 197 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and surely prevent the wiring 196 from falling off together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197 can do.

  Further, even if the position where the wire 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position separated from the side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wire 196 can be Since the wire 196 can be favorably prevented from hanging down when opening and closing the door frame 5 by guiding (guiding), the body frame 3 in which the strength and rigidity of the pivotally supported side of the door frame 5 are enhanced. The door frame 5 can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high security against fraud.

  Furthermore, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with the ridges projecting at least the side along the wiring 196 from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, the wiring by the pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wire holding member 197 The three sides 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wire holding member 197 can be enhanced, and the wire holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good condition.

  Further, the length from the proximal end to the distal end of the wire holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axial center of the door frame 5 to the axial center of the proximal end, and the main frame 3 of the wiring 196 extends The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the front end of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member A pantograph link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wire holding member 197, and the position where the wire 196 in the main frame 3 extends, the wire when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, and the opening and closing operation can be facilitated, and the occurrence of an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196 etc. is reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. In addition, a pantograph link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wire 196 extending from the tip of the wire holding member 197 is folded back along the wire holding member 197 at the tip side. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, A step portion 195 a capable of storing the wire holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the step provided with the wire holding member 197 on the door frame base substrate cover 195 Since it is stored in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be compacted, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by another member, thereby preventing a failure from occurring.

  Furthermore, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (the door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to reliably achieve the above effects. In addition, since the wire holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. To make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding the game board 4 having the larger game area 1100 and having the large game board 4 so as to strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 etc., the handlebar bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 extends from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 141 extending in the longitudinal direction to the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 from the rear end. A plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding in the right-angled direction outward with respect to the annular flange portion 142 and the cylindrical portion 141 protruding in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141 A plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 are provided, which connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 to each other in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed in the position corresponding to the three groove parts 502a. Then, only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as to be incapable of relative rotation with respect to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 inclined at an angle so that the axis of the tube portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes to the front in a front view. The axis of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in the state is similarly inclined.

  Subsequently, as shown mainly in FIGS. 25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110; A pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 mounted along the back surface of the support side portion 110 of the support side, an open side reinforcement sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side end portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110 The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101, and they are mutually tightened with a screw or a rivet to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, this reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface and at the upper and lower end portions of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 And a lower support portion 158 having an axial pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower shaft support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 It is pivotally supported open and close freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 is formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side edge of the long side edge A lower bent piece 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent piece 160 bent forward on the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in a front view. And a vertically bent projecting piece 161 which is bent backward at a central portion of the upper long side edge and extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bending projection 159 and the upper bending projection 160 and the like. Further, the vertical bending and projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed to engage and engage with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is engaged with the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 It is possible to regulate moving backward. In the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110 is formed.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 is provided with an open side outward bending projection 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154; It has an open side inner bent piece 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inner bent piece 164 is formed to extend backward more than the open side outer bent piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 is provided on the lower rear side of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 to be in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 is provided with a U-shaped axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 which extends rearward at the outer end of the long side and opens at the outside of the axially supporting side (see FIG. See 112). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending projections 167 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side.

  The axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two upper and lower points of the upper and lower shaft supporting portions 156 and 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is enlarged. Although there is a possibility that it becomes easy to carry out an action, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. In addition, the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted in the U shape of the axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the axially supported reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. (See 112), and can prevent the insertion of the tool, and can prevent only the pivotally supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from being bent, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent intrusion of the illegal tool to the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153, and is arced substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 at the upper side The contact recess 181 is formed, and the post-security projection piece 182 protrudes rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, on the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, there are provided crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting backward along the shape of the end. The rear end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is extended to the rear more than the rear end protrusion 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front protrusion 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the crime prevention front protrusion 184 And a U-shaped attachment elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end of the connector.

  The crime prevention cover 180 mounts the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in a front view to the crime prevention cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) By being attached to the crime prevention cover attaching portion 364 of the unit 300, the door frame 5 can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. When the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the front crime prevention piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bending projection 161. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the pivot support side 182 is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 when the door frame 5 is closed, and the open side half is front It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 in the component 1110. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to intrude into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, it is possible to prevent the intrusion by the post-security projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the crime prevention cover 180 can cover the front lower portion of the guiding passage of the hitting ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed by the back surface thereof. It is possible to prevent the striking of the hitting path against the glass plate 594 which flies or reverses the guide passage portion.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the rear lower portion of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5 is covered with the crime prevention cover 180, so the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if you try to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the security cover 180 can prevent the intrusion of the tool, cheating It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high safety against such as.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with the fitting portions 190 a rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portions 110 b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a screw for securing the locking member to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 passes through the fitting portion 190a. By doing this, it is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion that protrudes rearward on the rear side, although detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion is rotated when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook for operation.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 and the door frame base substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110. When the launch cover 191, the handle device relay substrate cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with one another. It is possible to cover the front surface of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[1-2 B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as it is disassembled and seen afterward.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the right side half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. While being formed in circular arc shape along, the outer side is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210. The right side upper decoration substrate 214 is disposed on the upper side from the approximate center in the vertical direction on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; The lower side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed on the lower surface of the lens 212 from the approximate center of the vertical direction and on the surface of which the plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted Right-handed rhinoceros attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the right side upper decoration substrate 214 The upper decoration substrate cover 218 and the right side lower decoration substrate cover 220 attached to the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 so as to cover the back side of the right side lower decoration substrate 216 and to sandwich the right side lower decoration substrate 216 ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 on the front of the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 and the side lens 210 A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 An inner lens bracket 208 for attachment to the upper portion 212 and an upper right speaker 222 for attachment to the upper side inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, the side outer cover 202, the side flash lens 204, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are formed of translucent members. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the surface of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the lower right side decoration substrate 216 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the upper side inner lens 206. 216a, 216b, etc. can not be clearly viewed from the player side. In addition, the front surface of the right upper side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 is white, and the light such as the mounted LEDs 214 a, 214 b, 216 a and 216 b efficiently decorates the right side decoration unit 200. While the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit, the decorative boards 214 and 216 are not noticeable. The upper right upper decoration substrate 214 and the lower right decoration substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

  As illustrated, the right end and the upper end of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base main body 110 in the front view, and the left end is the game window 101 Is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery on the right side of. The side lens 210 is divided into a plurality of circumferential lens portions 210 a consisting of a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces and the circumferential lens portions 210 a in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and a plurality of circles extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens unit 210b having a prism surface of The plurality of radiation lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed to extend on radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in a front view, as shown in the figure, and from the front surface of the circumferential lens portion 210a The side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  In addition, the side lens 210 includes, on the right side surface, side diffusion lens portions 210c that extend in the front-rear direction and are aligned in the vertical direction. The light from the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 can be widely diffused in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1 by the side diffusion lens portion 210c. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker in the side lens 210, and the sound from the upper right speaker is favorably made to the player side It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent and is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210, and as shown in the drawing, the portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkled shape The portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface. Further, although not shown in detail, in the side inner lens 212, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a forwardly protruding peak portion in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses, and the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 is glittered in cooperation with the side lens 210 disposed on the front side. It is now possible to make it appear strange and unclear with a sense of perspective.

  A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface of the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60.degree. To 180.degree.), And the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively illuminated. A narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. In the present example, the LEDs 214 c of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 are red and green LEDs.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200, like the side speaker 130, outputs middle-to-high range sound and can be attached at a predetermined position by a side upper inner lens 206 in a predetermined direction. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 supporting the upper right speaker 222 has a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in front view, and the upper end back side of the horn portion The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 can not be seen from the player in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and noise is generated for other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. In the same manner as the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 is also formed with a wrinkled front surface, and a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a forwardly protruding peak portion of the wrinkled portion. The light is irregularly refracted and diffusely reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is inserted and disposed on the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and simulates a rocky area by a plurality of spindle-like curved surfaces. The side lens 210 can be accented. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214 b and 216 a of the right upper side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 disposed on the rear side, and the circumferential lens portion 210 a Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2 C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a light emission mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the left half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. Along the arc shape, the left side and the upper side are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200, a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and an elliptical shape disposed between the large window frames 242a. Frame-like lower decoration frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, and two large window frames 244a continuous on the upper side of the lower lower decoration frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and And a frame-like upper decoration frame 244 having an oval small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 has a side flash lens 246 and a side flash lens 246, which are fitted from the rear side to the small window frames 242b and 244b of the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, respectively. Transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of circumferential lens portions 250 a that are supported from the rear side and are fitted from the rear side to the large window frames 242 a and 244 a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244. A plurality of slits 251a disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 are formed, and an inner decorative member 251 provided with a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface, and a rear side of the inner decorative member 251 And a plurality of radially extending bands centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and the decoration on the left side is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) on the surface A substrate 254, and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the lower side from the approximate center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction from the lower side and having a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper side decorative substrate 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Left side lower decoration substrate cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 is transparent on the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252 by supporting the upper left portion speaker 262 and the upper left portion speaker 262 disposed on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and front view upper right portion. A diffusion portion formed by an upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of strip lenses attached to the front of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right in front view and centered on the lower right and left center And an upper right inner lens 266 having a 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is formed of an opaque member, and the lower side decoration frame 242, the upper side decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer of a predetermined color (in this example, a silver color). The side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the lower lower decoration frame 242 and the upper upper decoration frame 244 (small windows with respect to the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) On both sides sandwiching the frames 242b and 244b, opening frames 242c and 244c are formed to penetrate in a state where the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are cut away, and the small window frames 242b and 244b The opening frames 242 c and 244 c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 can not be viewed by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted and closed from the rear side to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, and the transparent peripheral lens portion An inner decorative member 251 disposed on the rear side through 250a can be viewed from the player side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion part 252a, and the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the back of the side inner lens 252. It is not possible to clearly see the side. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slits 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. can not be clearly viewed from the player side.

  In addition, the front surface of the upper left side decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is white, and the left side decoration unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. While the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit, the decorative substrates 254, 256 are not noticeable. The upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140 The light emitting decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  The lower side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed to extend vertically along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose rear side is open. The lower side decoration frame 242 is formed between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and between the large window frames 242a and having a substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the game window 101 side and the outer side of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side. It is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decoration frame 242 can form an outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246.

  Further, the upper side decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the lower side decoration frame 242 and has a substantially triangular shape in a front view extending from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 It is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose side is open. The upper side decoration frame 244 is a substantially oval small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and extending through the two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and extending in the front and rear direction. And an opening frame 244c which is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the game window 101 side and the outer side of the pachinko machine 1) and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and which is notched to the side. ing.

  This side upper decoration frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted from the rear side to the large window frame 244a, and a side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is adapted to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decoration frame 244 can form an outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246. The upper side decoration frame 244 is configured to form a continuous design with the lower side decoration frame 242 when assembled as the left side decoration unit 240.

  In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored in black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized and can be seen.

  Also, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, and has a size ranging from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the gaming window 101 There is. This side lens 250 is a form in which the peripheral lens portion 250 a fitted from the rear side into the lower window decoration frame 242 and the large window frames 242 a and 244 a of the upper side decoration frame 244 is recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250 a. And a radiation lens portion 250b on the front side of which the side flash lens 246 is disposed. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. Further, the side lens 250 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Furthermore, the inner decoration member 251 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of each circumferential lens portion 250a in the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front and back direction ing. The inner decorative member 251 also extends in the width direction so that the plurality of slits 251 a extend along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and are concentric with the center of the game window 101 as shown in the figure. There is more than one. Further, in the inner decorative member 251, the front surface on which the plurality of slits 251a are formed is formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a metallic gloss of silver color on the surface, and can be viewed from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250 and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252 a which is bulged forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted from the rear side into the inside of each inner decorative member 251. In the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252, a plurality of strip lenses extending radially around the lower center of the game window 101 are formed on the front surface, and the inner side of the strip lens extending direction is disposed on the front side It intersects (substantially orthogonal) to the extending direction of the slit 251 a of the decorative member 251.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but the light is irregularly refracted by the plurality of strip lenses formed in the diffusion portion 252a. The rear side is not clearly seen through the part 252a. Further, as illustrated, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and light from the upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the rear side Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  Further, the upper left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 of the left side decoration unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the large lower side decoration frame 242 and large upper side decoration frame 244 The LEDs 254a and 256a disposed at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portions 250a of the side lenses 250) have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60.degree. To 180.degree.). LEDs 254 b disposed at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242 b and 244 b and the opening frames 242 c and 244 c of the lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 (the radiation lens portion 250 b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) 256b has a relatively narrow illumination angle (eg, 15 ° to 6 °) °) is used.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs middle-to-high range sound similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted by the upper speaker bracket 264 at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn (not shown) that protrudes diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper back side of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is not seen from the player in front view It has become. In addition, a protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can be used to prevent tampering with the upper left speaker 262 or the insertion of an illegal tool into the pachinko machine 1 by breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 in this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, so that it is difficult for other pachinko machines to be noisy.

  Next, characteristic light-emitting effects in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the surface of the side lens 250 that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and includes the curved transparent circumferential lens portion 250a, and on the back side of the circumferential lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a having a metallic luster plated layer and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting with the extending direction of the slits 251a A side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of strip lenses, and a left side upper decoration substrate 254 and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 and on which a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a are mounted. And (see FIG. 35 etc.). Thereby, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light irradiated forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252, and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, Light is emitted from the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 to the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, the light irradiated forward (side of the side lens 250) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is partially transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and irradiated to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the circumferential lens portion 250a to illuminate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Then, since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decorative member 251 side by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decorative member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a on the (front surface) side, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the circumferential lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are smoothly curved respectively. The light reflected on the rear surface side converges, and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) diffuses, and direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused to the peripheral lens portion 250a. The indirect light reflected on the front surface of the lens portion 250 a and the inner decoration member 251 is respectively irradiated to the shifted position. Further, the light passing through the slit 251 a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape in the extending direction of the slit 251 a by the diffusion portion 252 a formed by the plurality of strip lenses in the side inner lens 252 and intersected. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is longer than the width of the slit 251a, extends in a direction intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends, and is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of stripes of light of different shading. It is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a sense of perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2 D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as viewed from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front of the door frame 5, between the upper end edges on the central side of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is mounted between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-like upper extension frame 281b which extends laterally from the top of the central frame 281a and narrows toward the tip. A front decorative member 281 having a frame-like lower extending frame 281c which extends from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip, and an upper extending frame 281b and a lower part disposed on the rear side of the front decorative member 281 A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a smaller in diameter than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and closing the inside of the extension frame 281c, and a tubular member inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted in the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a surface disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 A plate-like diffusion lens 285 in which a plurality of minute prisms are formed, an annular lens support member 286 which holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens support member 286 And a light shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a rear side of the light shielding member 287 arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287 A plurality of LEDs 288a, and a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the cylindrical portion 287a are mounted on the front surface of the upper central decorative substrate 288.

  Also, the upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, Of the upper side decoration substrate 290 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 289 covering the rear surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290 and attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the substrate cover 291 and extending backward A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and has a high degree of light transmission under the upper lower cover 293 And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Furthermore, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward in a plate shape from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 and has a cutout 295a whose rear end is open at the center in the left-right direction. The cover 295, a plate-like lid member 296 closing the notch portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 in a front view and shaped into a predetermined shape .

  In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281, and the front decorative member 281 is made to glow by external light. Further, the upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a central annular lens portion 282 b facing the inside of the central frame 281 a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282 a An extension frame lens portion 282c that faces the inside of the frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c is provided. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-shaped lenses radially extending on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b are circumferentially arrayed, and an axial center of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. Thus, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms or strip lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 can not be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed to have a smooth spindle shape on the front side, while a plurality of lenses concentric to the rear side are formed, and light can be irregularly refracted, so the rear side is clear. It can not be seen by

  Further, in the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs, respectively. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Furthermore, in the upper side decoration substrate 290 of the upper decoration unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs, respectively, Are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can emit light and decorate the upper extending frame 281 b and the lower extending frame 281 c of the front decorative member 281 by appropriately emitting the LED 290 a.

[1-2 E. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the portion of the dish unit in the door frame, cut at a portion of the ball lending unit.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 for storing gaming balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper tray 301 A ball can be supplied to a ball striking device 650 described later via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-like dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100; When the upper outer periphery of the upper dish body 312 is covered with the dish-like upper disc body 312 fixed to the front approximately in the center and the upper side and the rear being open and the front left side (axial support side) is largely bulging forward An upper dish upper panel 314 which is formed to be curved so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward in a visual manner, an upper dish front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper dish upper panel 314, and an upper dish front An upper dish upper inner decoration member 318 disposed between the decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper panel 314, and a portion on the right side of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and continuous with a right upper portion of the upper dish upper panel 314 A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the plate attachment base 320 attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left and right center to the right lower surface and having a plurality of minute prisms formed on the surface. And an upper dish decoration substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately lighting the LED 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322, it is possible to make a part of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 emit light and decorate.

  Furthermore, in the dish unit 300, the lower part of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front of the dish unit base 310 and the upper and the rear are opened and the center in the left and right direction bulges forward in front view The lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the head and the upper end of the lower dish body 324 are fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish body 324 and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward similarly to the lower dish body 324 in front view A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of a lock device 1000 described later at a portion covering the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extending to the right in front view An upper opening 330a and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328, the lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing the right side and the right side from the left, right center position of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 And Shitasara side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Further, in the pan unit 300, the lower pan upper left side cover 332 obliquely extending covering the left front end of the lower pan main body 324 and the left front end of the lower pan top plate 326, and the lower end of the lower pan upper left side cover 332 Lower plate lower left side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate which is closed from the rear side and the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 is made transparent And a frame-like holding member 337 which holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower plate lower left side cover 334. The right front end of the lower tray top plate 326 is covered by the upper tray front decoration member 316.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish upper left side cover 332 are designed A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338 And a cover body 339 having a plurality of holes and a disc-like shape which is loosely curved so as to close the portion 338a from the rear side and bulge it forward.

  In this example, since the cover 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to deform even if it is pushed or struck from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be made. As long as it can be protected. In addition, the side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface. The cover 339 is colored black.

  Furthermore, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing the gaming balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish main body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302; A lower disc ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the gaming balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower disc 302, and attached to the upper left side in a front view of the disc unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing gaming balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish main body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the tray unit 300 constitutes a lower tray 302 capable of storing gaming balls by a portion of the tray unit base 310, the lower tray main body 324, the lower tray top plate 326, the lower tray cover 328 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left and right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed at the upper end edge extending in the left and right direction. It is equipped. A rental ball unit attachment portion 310b is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a for attaching the rental ball unit 360 through in the front-rear direction. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner in a front view) of the ball unit attachment portion 310b and has an oblong ball supply port 310c having a horizontally long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front and back direction; An upper countersink outlet 310d which penetrates vertically in the front-back direction below the mouth 310c (approximately in the middle in the height direction of the tray unit base 310) and near the right end of the decorative portion 310a; And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e which are disposed directly below the ball outlet 310d and the upper ball inlet 310c and which project forward and whose upper surfaces have the same height. The upper flat ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the middle position in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower flat support portion 310e disposed immediately below.

  Further, the pan unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower pan support portions 310e, is fitted with the rear ends of the lower pan main body 324 and the lower pan top plate 326, and is formed into a horizontally long rectangular ring in a front view. A groove 310f, and a rectangular lower ball supply port 310g disposed at the lower right of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the bowl unit base 310 is provided with a lower bowl ball feeding rod 310h cylindrically extended rearward so as to be continuous with the lower bowl ball feeding port 310g and an open side of the lower ball bowl feeding rod 310h. And a notch 310i formed on the side and of a size through which the game ball can pass.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 310 c of the bowl unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit through the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the notches 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is in communication with the first ball outlet 544 a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper flat ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guiding recess 310j which extends in the right direction in a front view and is recessed rearward. The guiding recess 310j is inclined so that the right end in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined such that the front end is lower in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the height difference between the front end of the guiding recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper tray main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guiding recess 310j, and at the right end of the guiding recess 310j, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 and The difference in height is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper bowl ball supply port 310c is closed by the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301, the gaming ball paid out from the winning ball device 740 via the far cover unit 540 is Since it is not possible to go straight forward into the upper tray 301 from the upper flat ball supply port 310c, the paid-out gaming ball abuts on the gaming ball in which the front side of the upper flat ball supply port 310c is closed and rolls The direction is changed, and guided so as to roll in the guiding recess 310j to the right in front view, and released from the vicinity of the right end of the guiding recess 310j to the upper side of the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301; Become. Thus, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper plate 301 in the upper and lower two stages, so that the player does not move the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even when the game balls are paid out, the game balls can be continuously supplied (released) into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling bothersome for the storage of the game balls on the upper plate 301. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game by concentrating the player on the game by the operation of hitting the game ball and the game ball hit, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. It is possible to

  The upper bowling ball outlet 310d of the bowl unit base 310 includes the opening 344a of the upper bowl bowling base 344 in the upper bowl bowling mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is in communication with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the lower ball supply port 310g extends rearward from the rear side through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. Above, while being connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, the notch portion 310i of the lower flat ball supply rod 310h is provided in the upper flat ball extraction mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344 c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower spherical ball supply port 310g is provided with an expanded portion 310k that is expanded in the left direction in a front view, and the lower conical ball supply port is formed by this expanded portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is spread in the left and right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early clogging of the lower ball ball supply port 310g by the gaming balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower ball ball supply port 310g, and more games A ball can be fed into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (axial support side) bulges forward than the center in a front view and the bottom surface is entirely lower at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side There is. In the bottom surface of the upper disc body 312, the rear end on the pivotal support side is near the bottom of the upper disc ball supply port 310c in the disc unit base 310, and the rear end on the open side is the upper disc ball discharge port 310d in the disc unit base 310. The gaming balls, which are formed to be respectively positioned near the middle position in the vertical direction, are supplied to the upper disc main body 312 (the upper disc 301) from the upper disc ball supply port 310c and are guided to the upper disc ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  In the upper tray main body 312, a metal upper tray rail 313 which can be in contact with the game ball is attached at the rear end of the bottom and on the open side from the center in the lateral direction. Although not shown, the upper tray rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and outside the open side of the upper plate body 312 A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the mounting hole 314a penetrates in the vertical direction and on which the upper disc ball extracting button 340 described later is attached. The upper tray upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper tray main body 312, and a decorative attachment portion 314b for attaching the upper tray front decorative member 316 and the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c formed in a step shape which is further lowered than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position on the front side than the upper plate main body 312 at the center in the horizontal direction and for attaching an operation unit 400 described later. There is.

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin so as to extend in the left and right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314. The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed to have a smooth shape on the left side from a position closer to the center right in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Further, although the detailed illustration of the upper dish front decoration member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the right rear surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly seen from the player side. The upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. Thereby, while the upper tray upper inner decorative member 318 is in the assembled state, the portion visible through the left side of the upper tray front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side, while the right side of the upper tray front decorative member 316 The part seen through is seeming to be unclear from the player side and the feeling of a sense of distance not fixed.

  Further, the upper tray upper right decoration member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces in the same manner as the right side portion of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and the upper dish upper decorative member 316 is The upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper countersinking button 341 described later. In the upper dish upper right decoration member 319, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the back surface (lower surface), and light can be irregularly refracted, and the lower side is not clearly seen from the player side There is. An upper plate decoration substrate 322 is disposed behind the right side of the upper plate front decoration member 316 and below the upper plate upper right decoration member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration substrate 322 is used. By appropriately emitting light, the upper tray front decoration member 316 and the upper tray upper right decoration member 319 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  A lower plate body 324 of the lower plate unit 300 is fanned in a front view in plan view and has a bottom plate 324a formed so that a rear end is formed linearly in the left-right direction and a substantially center of the upper surface is lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a And a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. An upper end of the side plate 324c of the lower tray main body 324, which rises upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a, is formed in a curved shape so as to become lower toward the front side and to the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower flat plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight part of the upper end.

  The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower bowl ball opening hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower bowl ball outlet mechanism 350 disposed on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver color and metallic feel (a matte state such as sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower tray side cover 330 is provided with a plate-like portion extending rearward from the lower end and forming a part of the bottom surface of the tray unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  Further, the lower plate upper left side cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic gloss on the surface. The lower plate lower left side cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plated layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends backward from the lower end to one side of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. It has a plate-like part that forms a part. The opening 334a of the lower tray lower left side cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front of the lower speaker 821 (speech speaker) provided in the main body frame 3 described later, and the player receives the sound from the lower speaker 821 It can be made to be transparent to the side. The protective cover 336 for closing the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 is a punching metal having a plurality of holes formed in a metal plate, and prevents an illegal tool from being inserted therein. .

  The lower unit side cover 330 and the lower unit lower left side cover 334 close the bottom excluding the center in the left-right direction, and the lower unit side cover 330 and the lower unit lower left side cover The bottom surface between them and 334 is closed by the lower ball ball removing mechanism 350 described later.

  The upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 in the disc unit 300 is operated with respect to the upper disc ball extracting button 341 which is mounted to be able to advance and retract in the vertical direction with respect to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper disc upper panel 314. The actuating unit 342 moves up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper bowl ball release button 341 and is supported on the front side of the bowl unit base 310, and supports the operating plate 342 in an operable (rotatable) manner. A mounting base 346 attached to the front of the housing, and a contact piece which slides in the vertical direction by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and abuts against the actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 described later 343a and arranged on the rear side of the dish unit base 310; The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340 is omitted, the operation piece 342 which moves up and down with the upper disc ball extraction button 341 so that the upper disc ball extraction button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper ball ball removal slider 343 is urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper ball ball removal base 344 and the upper ball ball removal base 344.

  The upper disc ball removing base 344 of the upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper disc ball outlet 310d of the disc unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper disc ball outlet 310d and opens forward. 42 and a ball guiding channel 344b communicating with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper countersinking base 344 and guiding the gaming ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guiding it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b and then extends toward the right (axially supported) end in a rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper countersinking base 344 And a ball removing passage 344c on which the game ball can roll.

  In the upper bowl ball removal base 344, the opening 344 a communicates with the upper bowl ball outlet 310 d, and the lower end of the ball guiding channel 344 b communicating with the opening 344 a is the ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper tray 301 is communicated with the ball feed unit 580 by communicating with the entrance 581 a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 through the feed opening 113. It can be supplied to

  Further, the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper countersink ball extraction base 344 communicates with the ball extraction port 581b of the ball feed unit 580 through the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide flow path 344b. And the lower end extending to the pivotal support side is in communication with the notch 310i of the lower ball supply rod 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower end of the rear end of the ball removal flow passage 344c is closed by the upper countersink ball removal flow passage cover 345.

  When the upper disc ball extracting mechanism 340 presses the upper disc ball extracting button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343 a which protrudes backward is also obtained. Move down. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction by the downward movement of the contact piece 343a. The movement between the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication. As a result, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred from the upper tray ball outlet 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper tray ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding channel 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball outlet flow passage 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 and the lower bowl ball supply port 310g from the lower bowl ball supply port 310g via the lower bowl ball supply rod 310h of the bowl unit base 310. Can be discharged into the

  The ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball removing slider 343 biased upward by a coil spring, so that the ball removing member 583 Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a of the above, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that biases the upper disc ball removal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, While being able to prevent breakage, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 583a.

  The lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 in the tray unit 300 is disposed between the lower tray side cover 330 and the lower tray lower left side cover 334 on the lower side of the lower tray main body 324 to form the bottom central portion of the tray unit 300. A ball-opening base 351, a plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower-disc ball-extracting base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower-disc ball-extracting hole 324 b of the lower disc body 324; It has a lower countersink slide 353 supported so as to move and slide on the upper surface of the lower counterball recess 351 in the front-rear direction, and a lower countersink 354 attached to the front end of the lower countersink 353. ing.

  The lower disc ball dropping base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351 a vertically penetrated at a position facing the lower disc ball dropping hole 324 b of the lower disc body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 is a closing portion 352a which can close the lower ball ball opening hole 324b, and a shutter ball hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction , And the biasing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring 356 so as to close the lower countersink opening 324b and the base opening 351a. .

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin that can contact the lower disc ball slide 353, and the contact pin abuts on the lower ball chop slide 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter opening hole 352b are pivoted to move backward by the lower opening ball slide 353, or the lower opening slide 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. It can be done.

  In the lower disc ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 is substantially coincident with the lower ball removing hole 324b of the lower disc body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower disc remover base 351 A holding mechanism 355 is further provided to hold the lower countersink slide 353 at a predetermined position in order to hold it in the movement position.

  The lower disc ball extracting mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower disc cover 328 or the like. The lower countersink hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a of the open / close shutter 352. In this state, gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower disc ball release button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower disc ball release button 354 and the lower disc flash slide 353 slide backward, and the slide of the lower disc flash slide 353 toward the rear The open / close shutter 352 turns against the biasing force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball opening hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, the opening / closing shutter 352 is pivoted to the rear, so that the shutter ball opening hole 352b is overlapped with the lower ball opening hole 324b and the base ball opening hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball opening hole 352b and the lower ball opening hole The game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 300 through the lower tray ball removal holes 324b. When the lower countersink slide 353 is moved rearward to a position where the shutter holes 352b and the lower countersink 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower countersink slide 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower ball ball slide 353 is locked (held), the lower ball ball release button 354 is kept in the open state retracted backward, and the shutter ball hole 352b is a lower ball ball. The game ball stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower tray sphere extraction button 354 is not kept pressed while being held in alignment with the removal holes 324b.

  On the other hand, in the case where the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b is closed, when the lower ball ball extraction button 354 in the retracted state is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower ball ball slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released. The open / close shutter 352 is urged in such a direction that the closing portion 352a is closed by the coil spring so as to be able to slide, and the closing portion 352a is moved by the biasing force. It will turn in the direction which moves in the direction (forward) of ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the open / close shutter 352 pivots forward, the lower countersink slide 353 slides forward, and the lower countersink outlet 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower counterball relief button 354 is lowered. The game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302 by returning to the closed position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the plate cover 328 or the like.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower ball ball pulling out mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism will not be described.

  A rental ball unit 360 in the tray unit 300 includes a rental ball button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a rental balance display unit 363 between the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball lending unit 360, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be distributed to the bowl unit 300 by inserting cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing the ball rental button 361. Can be borrowed (dispensed) into the upper tray 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned amount is subtracted and the cash remainder and prepaid card inserted are returned. There is. In addition, the remaining amount display portion 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

  The rental ball unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a rental ball unit attachment portion 310 b formed in the upper end decoration portion 310 a of the dish unit base 310. In addition, the rental ball unit 360 is provided with a crime prevention cover attachment portion 364 that protrudes backward from the rear surface and attaches and locks the attachment elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the crime prevention cover 180.

  More specifically, the rental ball unit 360 is disposed on the transparent rental unit front cover 365 covering the front side of the rental remaining display portion 363, and behind the rental ball unit front cover 365, and the rental remaining display portion 363 is attached. Ball unit base 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch activated by the operation of the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 is attached (see FIG. 45) and the ball unit of the bowl unit base 310 covering the back side of the ball unit substrate 366 And a rear cover 367 mounted on the rear side of the mounting portion 310b. The crime prevention cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 367.

  The rental ball unit attachment portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the rental ball unit 360 is attached is formed between a circular button opening 310m facing the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310m. Transparent including a rectangular display opening 310n closed by a ball unit front cover 365 and a projection 310o formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and projecting forward, respectively, and closing the display opening 310n A remaining-loan display portion 363 disposed on the rear side through the rental ball unit front cover 365 can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310 o of the pan unit base 310 is formed to have a round front end.

  As illustrated, the ball unit 360 of the present embodiment has the ball unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the ball ball supply opening 310c. It is arranged to face. In addition, the rental ball unit 360 has a return button 362 disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the rental ball button 361. In the present example, the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the dish unit base 310 (the rental ball unit attachment portion 310 b). Thus, the player can easily recognize the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362.

  In addition, the rental ball unit 360 includes a protruding portion 310o protruding forward (to the player) from the outer periphery of the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301, Since the hand touches the projecting portion 310o before touching the rental ball button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the rental ball button 361 or the return button 362, and the rental ball button It is possible to prevent the erroneous operation of the 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be the pachinko machine 1 having the same feel as a conventional pachinko machine provided with two storage dishes. A new pachinko machine 1 (a new type of pachinko machine) can be regarded as a pachinko machine 1 that can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by reducing anxiety and the like given to the player. It has become.

[1-2 F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. FIG. 46 (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Furthermore, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the pressing operation unit in the operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper tray 301 substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the dial operation unit 401 which can be operated by the player An operation unit 405 is provided, and the player's operation can be received according to the game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved. , To be able to participate in the production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical press operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower connected with the lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 engaged with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 with the drive gear 412 fixed to the rotation shaft, an annular gear rail 416a rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b slidably supporting the press operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 It has an opening 420a through which a spring 418 for biasing upward, a gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and a button support cylinder 416b can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 attached on the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covering the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attaching portion 314c in the pan unit 300, and a plating which is disposed on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and formed in a predetermined shape and has silver metallic gloss on the surface A layer-provided inner cover 427 and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. In the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428, a circular opening through which the outer cylindrical portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass is formed.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A dial decoration substrate 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401, And a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decorative substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation portion holding member 416 by the substrate holding claws 416 g of the operation portion holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a translucent material, and extends outward from the upper end of the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and the inner cylinder portion 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c cylindrically extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b and shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder It mainly includes a collar portion 401d annularly extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401 d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking unit (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylindrical portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, whereby the dial operation unit 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protrusion 401 f protruding in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating portion 401 is annularly formed along the inner periphery of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a. The projecting portion 401f, which will be described in detail later, can come in contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 projects the dial operating portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) from being further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. And the contact area is increased when they abut each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed (released) more to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  In addition, the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button main body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button main body 406, and a button cap And a cap inner 408 disposed between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a frusto-conical shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the frusto-conical shape. And a through hole 406a vertically penetrating in the center of the lower end face of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is supposed to be.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b which extend downward from the lower part of the outer periphery and the lower end protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction. By locking with the locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is prevented so that the button main body 406 does not come off the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although not shown in detail, in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, there is provided a contact portion which prevents the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction, The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is configured not to rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. A gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  The button main body 406 further includes a pressing detection piece 406c which can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432 which extends downward from a position different from the outer peripheral lower portion from the locking claw 406b. When the button main body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressure detection piece 406c is detected by the pressure detection sensor 432c.

  Furthermore, as illustrated, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the upper side below the approximate center in the vertical direction, and a step 407a is formed between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 below the step portion 407a, and the dial operation portion above the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f. Thus, when the button cap 407 (the pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder 401a from above the dial operating unit 401, the step 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401. The button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

  Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the top surface of the cap inner 408 so that the character can be viewed from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 is provided with a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

  Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connection locking claws 410b which project upward from a position where the upper end opposes and then protrudes inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operating portion 401 are connected so as to be integrally rotatable by locking with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylindrical portion 401a.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details will be described later, but the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed between the two. In this example, the lengths in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as illustrated, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed integrally rotatably with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotational direction, rotational speed, and rotational angle, and the drive gear 412 is rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotational shaft. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in small increments of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, etc. It is possible to give a feeling.

  Furthermore, the operation portion holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a for rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, and a button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 projecting cylindrically upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. And a locking projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface in the vicinity of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for transmitting the light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation portion 405) And the rotation detection sensor 4 mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 by vertically penetrating the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b. An opening 416d through which the 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e which the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration substrate 432 vertically penetrates the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and viewed from the upper side; And a pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extending button decorative substrate 432.

  The operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b and forms a gap of a predetermined amount in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and the locking is performed. It further has a plurality of contact parts that can be brought into contact with the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation portion holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, etc. It is prepared for.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operating unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 around the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported rotatably and rotatably. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation section 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation section 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coil spring 418 is disposed between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416 b and the truncated conical lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is less likely to be damaged even if the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates the lower recess 420b which is fittable on the outer periphery of the operation portion holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and the bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower recess 420b, and the operation portion holding member 416 An inner-shaped opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is disposed on the opposite side of the opening 420a to the lower recess 420b and can accommodate at least the driven gear 410; Is equipped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and from the outside to the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in the present example) legs 420e that project a predetermined amount and positioning holes 420f that open downward from the lower ends of the legs 420e are provided.

  In addition, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the upper side outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420 h for mounting the protruding dial decoration board 430. Furthermore, although detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the positioning boss | hub for positioning each member, an attachment hole, etc. are formed in the suitable position of the upper surface and the lower surface of the base member 420. FIG.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side to the central opening 420a, and then the predetermined screw is inserted. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, whereby the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the base member 420 is not shown in detail, when the operation portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420 e of the base member 420 is configured such that a positioning hole 420 f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with a positioning projection 424 a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The lower cover 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the substrate mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and disposed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration substrate 430 mounted on the substrate mounting boss 420h is driven It is not in contact with the gear 410.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 contacts the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420 d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transmitted to the base member 420 side. It can be sufficiently transmitted to the base member 420 so that the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress the overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to the overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose lower part is opened, and the top plate thereof is provided with an opening 422a of an inner diameter which allows the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 to pass and the collar portion 401d can not pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the shaft center of the pressing operation unit 405 (follower gear 410) and the shaft center of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed to be extended, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both longitudinal direction ends, and by engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper surface is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  Further, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one (front side of the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction of the pachinko machine 1), and a claw-like locking piece 422c whose lower end protrudes outward. Is equipped. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper tray front decoration member 316 in the tray unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper tray front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off the operation unit attachment portion 314 c upward.

  The upper cover 422 has the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial operation unit 401, and the like attached to the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a. By covering the upper side of the base member 420 so that it passes through, the opening 422 a can prevent the dial operating portion 401 from coming off upward.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose upper part is open, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning projection 424a that can be fitted with a positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with an engaging portion 424 b engageable with the engaging claw 422 b of the upper cover 422 at the upper part of each end in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engagement claws 422b.

  The cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 is, as illustrated, an opening 426a which vertically penetrates in the center and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the pan unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) slightly floating above the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when it is pressed or struck, so that the impact can be alleviated.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then An inner cover 427 and a surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, which rotates with the dial operation unit 401, has a circumferential length in the slit between adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths of the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, the distance in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is assumed. Thereby, although the details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection It is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotated from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Further, although the operation unit 400 of this example will be described in detail later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist rotation, to prevent it from turning intentionally, and to add a sense of click to the rotation. Furthermore, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeating the forward and reverse rotations of the dial drive motor 414 little by little.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button cap As 407 (pressing operation part 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylinder part 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation part 405 is dialed through the step part 407a and the projecting part 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Furthermore, in the operation unit 400 of this example, with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation portion 405 By repeating the rotation and reverse rotation, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 as well as the dial operation unit 401, and it is possible to surprise the player by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 and enjoy the game and the effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be operated by pressing are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player etc. hit the operation unit 401 or 405 strongly, and the operation unit 401 or 405 can be freely made to the player. While being able to operate it, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405 to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game it can.

  In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is to be strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit The force of tapping 401 and 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and concentration of impacted impact can be suppressed to prevent damage to the operation unit 400 and the tray unit 300. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can withstand the smashing, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. While being able to improve the operability of 405, it is possible to enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405, and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the depressed operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300, and a predetermined amount of clearance is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. When the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300 so that the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to apply an impact or load, The impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover main body 426 until the lower end of the operation unit 400 abuts on the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c After contact, the bottom of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (dish unit 300) Since it is possible to receive the weight, it is possible to disperse the impact and the like from the operation unit 401 and 405 and to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like, so that the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the pan unit 300 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e that project downward to a position away from the position supporting the operation parts 401 and 405, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the tray unit 300. Since the leg 420e is not disposed immediately below the impact even when an impact from the operation portion 401 or 405 is applied to the base member 420 in contact with the bottom surface of the attachment portion 314c, the operation portion 401 or 405 of the base member 420 is The portion supporting the support is flexed by the impact, and the base member 420 is flexed (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300 The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view. When the operation portion holding member 416 holding the dial operation portion 401 is removed from the base member 420 and moved downward when the operation portion 401 is smashed from the upper side, the dial operation portion 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420 The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and depression of the dial operation unit 401 can be favorably prevented.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). Allows the player to be surprised and to pay attention to the effect by the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit It is possible to make it difficult to get bored by making the effect using the 401 (the pressing operation unit 405) more diverse, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 through the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, so that the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 can be Therefore, even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. Direct application to the dial drive motor 414 can be avoided, and damage to the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, after making the opening 420a of the base member 420 smaller in diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member It is possible to reliably prevent the user from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. Thus, it is possible to disperse the impact and load from the rear side and prevent the operating portion holding member 416 from being damaged.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated and driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 Even if the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite the fact that it is rotationally driven by the above, even if the calorific value increases due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be well dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, so that problems with the dial drive motor 414 due to overheating can be prevented, and the dial drive motor 414 Be able to withstand high loads and Ri, it is possible to sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial drive motor 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the pressure of the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation or the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and one more for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensation that has a sense of bodily sensation, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Further, the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 for emitting and decorating the operation units 401 and 405 can be provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated. By doing this, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can easily operate the operation unit 401, 405.

  In addition, since the step 407 a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the player presses the pressing operation unit 405. When the dial drive motor 414 causes the dial operation unit 401 to repeatedly rotate forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range and vibrates, the stepped portion 407a in contact with the projection 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is pressed. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, the player can be given an operation feeling with respect to the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 which was thought not to move by hand, which is good It is possible to make people think that there is something to be done, and it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. While being able to make it easy, it is possible to make the player operate the operation unit 400 positively, enjoy the operation of the dial operation part 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing operation part 405, and the interest to the game decreases Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the press operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the press operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the press operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. This enables the load and impact applied to the pressure operation unit 405 to be dispersed to the side of the dial operation unit 401 even when the pressure operation unit 405 is strongly hit, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressure operation unit 405. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being broken, thereby avoiding interruption of the game due to the breakage of the pressing operation unit 405 (the operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced by the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even when the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401. The respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and it is possible to make it easy for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400 and guiding the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. Therefore, the player can easily read the character "PUSH" from the player's side without turning or tilting greatly. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 has a projecting portion 401 f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401 a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined position in the vertical direction In the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as close as possible. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate or for the pressing operation unit 405 to be difficult because of the intrusion of foreign matter. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Furthermore, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, whichever direction in the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 Since it is possible to make contact even at a position, even if the pressure operation unit 405 is inclined and pressed (presses a position deviated to the outer periphery than the center of the pressure operation unit 405), it reliably contacts the dial operation unit 401 Thus, the rotary drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 contact in an annular shape, the load from the press operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the press operation unit 405 Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lower in the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, The contact area can be relatively increased in comparison, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed radially outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the concentration of the load can be prevented. The loadability and the impact resistance can be surely enhanced, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of rotating in the forward and reverse directions, not only the dial operating unit 401 is simply rotated but also it is easily stopped at a predetermined position, The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and can achieve the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 provided with the upper tray 301 for storing gaming balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to reliably store a large number of gaming balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a blow to the operation unit 400 (the pressing operation unit 405), and to make it easy to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2 G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as viewed from the rear. The handle device 500 of this embodiment is, as shown in the drawing, on the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower tray side cover 330 in the tray unit 300. A handle base 502 fixed at a cylindrical shape and having a front end rounded in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 rotatably relatively to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle body 504 And a front end cover 506 fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supporting the handle body 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

  In the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506 A shaft member 510 having a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 meshing with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a rotatable integrally with the transmission gear 511 And a rotational position detection sensor 512 held between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Furthermore, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511, with the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 in the clockwise direction in a front view via the transmission gear 511. An auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508 with respect to the touch sensor 516; A single-shot button 520 rotatably supported to operate the firing stop switch 518, one end attached to the handle base 502 and the other end attached to the handle main body 504, the handle main body 504 in an initial rotational position (counterclockwise in front view Urge to return to the rotating end) A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As illustrated, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 according to the present embodiment is configured to have a rear end cylindrically extended rearwardly from a front end that is open on the front side and bulges backward. Three axially extending grooves 502a are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502 a of the handle base 502 are one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and unevenly spaced with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502 a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle unit 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a disposed concentrically with the rotation axis is formed in the handle main body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. The mounting bosses 506 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504 a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504 a in the handle main body 504 abuts on the mounting boss 506 a of the front end cover 506, whereby the rotation range of the handle main body 504 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking projection 504b that protrudes rearward, and the other end (front end side) of the coil-like handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is biased in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end side.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so that its attachment surface faces the outer side (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above, so the handle attached via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1) and the door frame It is attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling discomfort in the turning operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft 512a is to be rotated. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes in accordance with the rotation angle of the detection shaft 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 described later changes in accordance with the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 506 are plated with a conductive material, and when the player contacts the handle main body 504 or the like, the touch sensor 516 detects the contact. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects the player's touch, when the handle main body 504 is rotated, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball is hit. It is possible to That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball can not be hit, It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original and reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Also, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the launch stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the launch control unit 4120 (see FIG. 188) The rotational drive can be stopped. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the gaming ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520, the operation before the one-shot button 520 is performed. It is possible to fire the game ball with a hitting strength.

  The steering apparatus 500 according to the present embodiment electrically detects the rotation operation of the steering wheel main body 504 by the rotational position detection sensor 512 and, based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512, Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the hit ball launch device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine are There is no need to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism to be linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and to be released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration according to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. While being able to do, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of the trouble in the joint unit, to control the decrease in the player's interest due to the hitting trouble of the game ball It has to be able to bet.

[1-2 H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 52 and FIG. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door cover in an exploded manner, and FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view taken after the camera (B) disassembled the cover unit. Moreover, FIG. 53 is a front view shown in the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit.

  The fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later, or a hit ball firing device 650. The game ball (Fall ball) which has not reached the inside of the game area 1100 despite this is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The fowl cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 open on the front side and having a flow path of a plurality of gaming balls therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the far cover unit 540 communicates with the first ball inlet 542a disposed in the upper right corner and penetrating in the front-rear direction in rear view, and the first ball inlet 542a. A first ball passage 542b extending toward the front end of the cover base 542 to the right in front view, and a second ball inlet disposed outside the first ball inlet 542a (right side in rear view) and larger than the first ball inlet 542a 542c and a second ball passage 542d which is in communication with the second ball inlet 542c and which is extended downward and is lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view inside the cover base 542; The first ball inlet 542 a and the second ball inlet 542 c are configured such that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed to the main frame 3. And are respectively formed at opposite positions. In the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542, as shown in the figure, the height of the portion extending in the left and right direction along the lower end is about three times the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball. A housing space 546 capable of housing a predetermined amount of gaming balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can communicate with the far ball inlet 542e disposed at the substantially central upper portion in the lateral direction and opened upward, and the far ball inlet 542e, and can guide the game ball to the upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And the ball passage 542f. In addition, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. The opening and closing operation piece 542 g rotates the opening and closing crank 793 by contacting the spherical abutment portion 793 d of the opening and closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the false cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front and rear direction And a second ball outlet 544b disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper countersink supply port 310 c of the tray unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544 b is connected to the rear end of the lower flat ball supply rod 310 h in the pan unit 300 through the ball passage opening 110 f of the door frame base main body 110.

  The far cover unit 540 of this example is the first ball outlet through the first ball passage 542 b for the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542 a. It can be supplied to the upper tray 301 through the upper tray ball supply port 310c of the tray unit 300 from 544a. In addition, the foul cover unit 540, the game ball supplied to the second ball inlet 542c from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700, through the second ball passage 542d It can be supplied to the lower tray 302 from the lower tray ball supply rod 310h and the lower tray ball supply port 310g of the tray unit 300 from 544b.

  Furthermore, although the details of the fal cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the fal ball inlet 542 e is positioned below the far space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launch device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a far ball and falls down the far space 626, it is received by the far ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the far ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply ) Can be.

  Further, the fal cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface of the second ball passage 542 d on the upstream side (left side in a front view) of the accommodation space 546, and the cover base 542 is pivotable by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. The rocking member 548 pivotally supported at the same time, a full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting the rocking of the rocking member 548, and a spring for urging the rocking member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550 552 and. As shown in FIG. 53, the lower end of the pivoting member 548 is pivotally supported by the cover base 542 and the upper end is pivoted to the left in front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. The swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a substantially vertical position. The swinging member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side opposite to the housing space 546, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. There is.

  Furthermore, the fal cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542 d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of a game ball.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the winning ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the far cover unit 540, If the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540 and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the inside of the normal passage 773 on the upstream side is also full, gaming balls roll to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 83), and the full tank branch unit 770 Second ball inlet 542c, second ball passage 542d, and second ball outlet 544 of the far cover unit 540 from the full ball outlet 776 of It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with gaming balls, the game balls can not be released from the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, and stagnated in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The game ball will be stored. Furthermore, as game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the storage space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548, resisting the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swinging member 548 moves to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is stopped on the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 188). The user is notified that the player is urged to discharge the gaming balls in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

  In addition, when the gaming ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to the substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 It becomes non-detection, and the payout of the game ball from the winning ball unit 700 is resumed.

[Antistatic measure for door frame base board 194]
As described above, the fal cover unit 540 (the transparent polycarbonate molded article) (see FIGS. 52A, 52B and 53) includes the second ball passage 542d and the game ball for guiding the game ball to the lower plate. A storage space 546 for retaining the game ball is formed, and the game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while in contact with the passage wall, so that the game ball and the resin rub against each other to generate static electricity and charge the game ball. Cheap.

  Therefore, at the bottom of the second ball passage 542d, a metal ground rail 554 is provided for removing static electricity of the gaming ball generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of the gaming ball and discharging it to the lower plate. There is. In addition, the fowl cover unit 540 is provided with a plate-like ground fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of the cover base 542, and the ground fitting 556 at the left end can conduct to the ground rail 554 (See FIGS. 52A, 52B and 53). This earth metal fitting 556 is screwed to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (FIGS. 18, 23, 26) of the door frame 5 so that static electricity can escape.

  Although the second ball passage 542d of the foul cover unit 540 can remove static electricity from the game ball by the ground rail 554 as described above, the electrostatic charge is accumulated in this part of polycarbonate, and may reach 10 several kV Some (3-4kV at most even if you feel pain due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, even if the charge accumulated in the resin is grounded, only the very periphery is removed, and most of it remains. Then, there is a possibility that the digital amplifier circuit of the door frame base substrate 194 in proximity to this may malfunction due to electrostatic induction due to this charge.

  In the gaming machine, an earth wire for releasing static electricity is attached to the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, for example. However, there is a risk that the ground wire may be broken or the connection terminal portion of the ground wire may be disconnected due to an unexpected accident.

  The embodiment described below is made in view of such a situation, and the charge accumulated in the fall cover unit 540 does not cause electrostatic induction even if the ground is not taken. The invention relates to an invention relating to an anti-static mechanism for shielding the door frame base substrate 194 with a metal plate (shield plate 562 described later) and preventing the static electricity released to the shield metal plate from jumping to surrounding conductors. It is.

  FIG. 54 is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing a door frame provided with an anti-static mechanism, as viewed from the back. FIG. 56 is a rear view of an essential part of a door frame showing a state provided with an antistatic mechanism. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the antistatic mechanism 560 in the embodiment is a metal (thin plate in this example) thin plate that shields the door frame base substrate 194 so as not to cause electrostatic induction due to the charge accumulated in the far cover unit 540. Shield plate 562 and a thin plate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) which is formed into an outer peripheral shape larger than the shield plate 562 and insulates the charge jumping to the shield plate 562 from jumping to the surrounding conductors And an insulating sheet 570.

  The shield plate 562 has a flat plate-like conductive portion 563 which is conductively contacted by contacting the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the door frame 5 at the upper part in the vertical direction, and a stepped portion 568 bent in the left-right direction. A substantially plate-shaped shield portion 564 located below and behind the conductive portion 563 with the border as a boundary, and disposed over substantially the entire rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame 5 And.

  In the middle of the upper side of the conductive portion 563, an attachment portion 565 extending in a substantially semi-circular shape is formed, and an insertion hole 566 is bored in the attachment portion 565. Is drilled.

  The insulating sheet 570 has a shape larger than the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562, and serves to electrically insulate the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 from the surrounding electrical conductors. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, the insulating sheet 570 is attached by adhesion to the upper side of the back surface of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562.

  In FIGS. 55 to 57, as described above, the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 on the rear side (FIGS. 23 and 24). The insulating sheet 570 of the anti-static mechanism 560 is disposed over substantially the entire rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. At this time, shield plate 562 is arranged such that the outer peripheral edge of shield portion 564 is surrounded by insulating sheet 570 on the back surface of insulating sheet 570. That is, the shield plate 562 is disposed between the door frame base substrate cover 195 and the shield plate 562 so as to be sandwiched. At this time, the outer peripheral portion of the insulating sheet 570 is located radially outside the outer peripheral portion of the shield plate 562. The conductive portion 563 of the shield plate 562 is brought into conductive contact by coming in contact with the back surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 23) of the door frame 5, thereby releasing static electricity.

  Note that mounting bosses 110g, 110h, 110i, and 110j for attachment to the fall cover unit 540 are provided at appropriate places on the right side of the lower back surface of the door frame 5 (the door frame base body 110). In addition, screw insertion holes 154a and 154b for screwing the shield plate 562 and the earth metal fitting 556 to the metal lower reinforcement sheet metal 154 so as to release static electricity to appropriate places of the lower reinforcement sheet metal 154. , 154c (see FIG. 56).

  The shield plate 562 is positioned by inserting the mounting boss 110g into the insertion hole 566, and a screw is inserted into the mounting hole 567 and the screw insertion hole 154a of the lower reinforcing metal plate 154, and the screw is screwed into the door frame It is screwed to the base body 110.

  The front cover 544 is disposed on the rear surface of the shield plate 562 so that the front cover 544 is in surface contact, and a screw is inserted through the mounting portion thereof, and the screw is screwed into the mounting bosses 110g to 110j. It is screwed to the back of the door frame base main body 110. In addition, a screw is inserted through the mounting portion of the ground metal 556, and a screw is further inserted through the screw insertion holes 154b and 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, and the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is electrostatically charged by screwing the screw. It is screwed to the door frame base main body 110 so as to escape.

  The shield plate 562 and the fal cover unit 540 are fastened together by screws to the mounting boss 110g. In addition, in the screw insertion hole 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, a ground wire (not shown) is fastened together with a ground fitting 556 with a screw.

[Function of Antistatic Mechanism 560]
The static electricity accumulated in the false cover unit 540 escapes to the metallic lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 through the conductive part 563 in surface contact with the shielding part 564 of the shielding plate 562 in surface contact and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. The thin plate-like shield plate 562 can shield the door frame base substrate 194 so as not to cause electrostatic induction by the charge accumulated in the fal cover unit 540.

  In addition, since the shield plate 562 is disposed so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570, the charge jumped to the shield plate 562 from the corners or end face of the shield portion 564 Things and harnesses can be prevented from jumping.

[1-2 I. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 58 to FIG. FIG. 58 (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 58 (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 59 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 60A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 61 (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front. (D) is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the gaming balls supplied from the upper tray 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the ball launching device 650 and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301. The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper tray ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper bowl ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 A box-shaped front cover 581 having a through opening 581a and a ball outlet 581b opened to the lower side of the opening 581a, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. The rear cover 582 has a striking ball supply port 582a for supplying to the striking ball launch device 650 the gaming ball which penetrates in the longitudinal direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581, a rear cover 582 and a front cover A partition 58 for pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitioning the entrance 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b on the rear side of the front cover 581. The ball removal member 583 having a and the gaming balls on the partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 are sent one by one to the ball hitting supply port 582a of the back cover and extend in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 A ball feeding member 584 rotatably supported around the axis and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for turning the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and the ball feeding member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right. It is arranged.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 has an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, is extended forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper countersinking base 344 It is formed to close the.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 is a partition portion 583 a that partitions the space between the inlet 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b below the inlet 581 a and the upper surface becomes lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and is bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction, and the lower end extends around the longitudinally extending direction A pivoting collar portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-like operating rod 583c projecting forward from an upper end of the pivoting rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c And a weight 583d projecting to the opposite side to the partition 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 58), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base main body 110 It comes in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300 via the disc 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in plan view with a center on a rotation axis centering on the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 and extending in the vertical direction. It has a ball holding portion 584b which is recessed in a circular arc shape from the rear end to the rotary shaft side, and a rod-shaped collar portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to be able to hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the collar portion 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

  In the ball feed member 584, the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b is in communication with the hitting ball supply port 582a at the same time as the blocking portion 584a turns in the direction of the partition portion 583a It pivots between the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position, the game balls held by the ball holding portion 584b are supplied from the ball hitting supply port 582a to the ball striking and launching device 650, and the game entered into the partition 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the ball remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition 583a, and the ball holding portion 584b has the end portion on the flange portion 584c side closing the hitting supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Also, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 585, and movement of the tip of the ball feed movement rod 586 that is swung in the vertical direction A ball feed crank 587 is provided, which pivots about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 and extends in the left and right direction with an engaging portion 587a, and a side engaged with the ball feed actuating rod 586 of the engaging portion 587a. A shaft portion 587b rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 584c (see FIG. 60) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586, which is oscillated by the driving of a ball feeding solenoid 585 which advances and retracts in the vertical direction, by a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587. The 584 can be turned. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position. Also, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted upward so that the ball feed member 584 pivots to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 is received. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

  In addition, the ball extraction member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 580 in this example is configured such that a moment is applied by the weight 583 d so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view. The forward movement of the actuating rod 583 c abuts against the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300, thereby restricting its rotation. In normal times, the dividing portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing hole 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removing hole 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper countersink releasing button 341 of the upper countersink removing mechanism 340 in the countersink unit 300 downward, the upper countersink removing slider 343 slides downward with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, the actuating member 583c moves downward with the contact piece 343a of the upper ball ball extracting mechanism 340, so that the ball removing member 583 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the gaming ball entering from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet flow path 344c of the upper tray ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. , And is discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball removal slider 343 with which the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 is in contact is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a. Also, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that biases the upper ball ball withdrawal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, so that breakage of the ball withdrawal member 583 and the like can be prevented, and the gaming ball is It can be prevented that the partition part 583a bounces back.

  Further, in the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, a rectangular attachment recess 582b (see FIG. 60B, etc.) recessed forward is formed at the upper right on the back cover 582a of the back cover 582 in a back view. And the tamperproof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape whose entire outer diameter in a rear view is horizontally long, and is opposite to the substantially center in the vertical direction at the tip on the left side in the rear view. Of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c which are divided up and down with the dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) of V formed between the upper piece 588 b and the lower piece 588 c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588 b in the direction (backward) perpendicular to the general surface of the tamperproof member 588 so as to be away from each other And an inclined portion 588e which is formed at the tip of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and is inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

  As shown in the figure, in the fraud prevention member 588, the base end side of the upper piece 588b is bent so that the tip of the upper piece 588b (left end in rear view) moves backward, so that the cut portion 588d The wire Iw attached to the incorrect gaming ball I is inserted into the V-shaped interior, which is formed in a V-shape in plan view. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the proximal end It is formed as.

  The inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and can guide the wire Iw attached to the incorrect gaming ball I by the inclined portion 588e into the cutting portion 588d. It is supposed to be. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as illustrated, and the cut portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b in the rear cover 582 A portion corresponding to the portion where the portion is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, it communicates with the striking ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in such a shape that the hitting ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the ball striking device 650, and the ball striking device 650 causes the illegal game ball I to be played on the game area of the gaming board 4. When driven into the interior 1100, the illegal gaming ball I fired by the striking device 650 moves along the launch rail 660 diagonally to the upper left in front view, and between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 It tries to penetrate into the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the force of the hit game ball I, and unlike the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, the wire Iw is a passage of the game ball It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance inside. Therefore, the wire Iw extended from the plate unit 300 through the hitting supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting launch device 650 side moves the gaming ball I in the upper left direction (upper right direction in rear view) in front view Then, to move onto the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the back surface view of the hitting ball supply port 582a, and is moved into the mounting recess 582b formed in the back view upper right side of the ball hitting supply port 582a. And wire rod Iw which moved to the part (inside of attachment recess 582b) which extended to the right by back view of hitting supply port 582a is a cutting part by a pair of inclined parts 588e of fraud prevention member 588 arranged in the position concerned After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the momentum of the incorrect game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I is pulled by the force of the illegal gaming ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (left direction in front view) by the cutting portion 588d of the tamperproof member 588 In this state, friction and shear force are applied by the cutting portion 588d to cut the wire Iw (see FIG. 61D). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal gaming ball I with the wire rod Iw is reduced by the friction acting on the wire rod Iw, the portion between the outer rail 1111 and the firing rail 660 does not enter the gaming area 1100. It will be discharged through the

  Therefore, since the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud preventing member 588, a fraudulent act is performed by the illegal gaming ball I with the wire Iw in the gaming area 1100. It is possible to prevent being cursed. In addition, even if an illegal game ball I intrudes into the game area 1100, as described above, since the wire Iw can be cut by the anti-corruption member 588, an illegal action can not be performed. Even if the wire Iw can not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the force of the illegal game ball I, thereby reducing the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and supplied to the ball feed unit 580, and then the player operates the handle device 500 provided on the front of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580, and the game ball is hit into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting and firing apparatus 650. The game is performed in the game area 1100 which is made visible through the game, and the player can be entertained, and the feed mechanism (the ball feed member 584 or the ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and the discharging mechanism (ball removing member 583), and the ball feeding unit 580 is disposed. The ball feed member 584 and the ball hitting and firing device 650 also come close to each other as much as possible, and remain on the ball feed member 584 when the game ball in the upper tray 301 is ejected by operating the upper disc ball release button 341. The number of gaming balls can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, it is possible to increase the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300, and the game ball is hit. The game balls in the upper plate 301 can be eliminated early by the operation, and the upper plate 301 can be prevented from being filled with the game balls at an early stage, and the game balls in the upper plate 301 can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to reduce the feeling of inconvenience for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest, and also to miniaturize the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to be the pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball pulling member 583, the ball feeding member 580 can be compared with the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 separately. The 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, and the time and effort for assembling can be simplified, and the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 Even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be solved easily.

  Furthermore, since the ball feed unit 580 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper disc ball is compared to that provided with the ball feed unit 580 on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure a transmission mechanism (upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the extraction button 341 to the ball extraction member 583 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (every time the door frame 5 is opened compared to the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) Blocking of the upper ball ball withdrawal mechanism 340) can prevent the possibility of premature wear of the transmission mechanism, causing malfunction or breakage, and reliability for operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be enhanced.

  Further, since the upper disc ball release button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper disc ball release button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301 It is possible to stop the game balls from being discharged from the game player, and to allow the player to easily operate the ball extraction operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball extraction button 341.

  In addition, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is made movable by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper countersink slider 343 and the partitions 583a can be reduced as much as possible. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is at the raised position, the partitioning portion 583 a of the ball extracting member 583 brings the entry port 581 a into communication with the hitting supply port 582 a. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts against the partition portion 583a, the impact can be mitigated by the biasing force acting on the upper tray ball withdrawal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a The durability of 583) can be enhanced. In addition, since the impact applied to the partition 583a can be alleviated by the biasing force acting on the upper flat ball slide slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to collide even if it collides with the partition 583a. Thus, the ball feeding unit 580 or the like can be damaged and the occurrence of a defect can be suppressed.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, it is related to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operation of the upper bowl ball withdrawal button 341 can be lightened to improve the operability, and the movement range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, as in the above. The effects and effects of

  In addition, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction to connect the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper countersinking mechanism 340, the partition By turning by its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are communicated, and the game medium in the storage tray is fed to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player without being stopped, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is moved to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem so that it is interesting It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  Furthermore, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated through the pivoting collar portion 583b of the dividing portion 583a, when the game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the pivoting collar portion whose impact is bent It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotation shaft by dispersing the pressure by the 583 b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotation flange portion 583 b, so that the durability of the ball removing member 583 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper tray 301, when discharging the gaming ball in the upper tray 301, the right and left sides of the gaming ball in the ball feeding unit 580 The movement of the direction can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can be used as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to suppress the ball feeding unit 580 from being unnecessarily enlarged.

  Furthermore, the tamperproof member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the tamperproof member 588 (cut portion 588d) is disposed as close as possible to the ball striking device 650. As a result, the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being fired by the ball striking device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d While the wire rod Iw is pulled fast (strongly) against it, the wire rod Iw can be cut reliably and at the same time, the impetus of the momentum of the game ball I is damped and prevented from entering the game area 1100. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed by the fraudulent game ball I.

  In addition, since the tamperproof member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b which is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward can be configured not to protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the worker is injured during assembly by the upper piece portion 588b of the tamperproof member 588. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I, the upper upper piece portion 588b is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material. Since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. It is possible to suppress the increase.

[1-2 J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. This glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the gaming window 101, and an annular octagonal unit frame 592 molded with synthetic resin, and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592 respectively. A transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 112). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stop pieces 592a disposed at the upper portions of the left and right sides and extending outward in the form of a plate, and a plate-like engagement extending in the lateral direction along the lower end and extending downward. And a stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be engaged from behind and above Then, the outer periphery of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support stepped portion 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the locking piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2 K. Shaped decoration in the door frame]
Next, the shaped decoration in the door frame 5, that is, the shaped decoration will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 62. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame at a substantially central position in the vertical direction. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls are vertically arranged below the vertically elongated oval shaped game window 101. , In a front view right side of the lower plate 302, for driving the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 for closing the gaming window 101. A handle device 500 is arranged. In addition, the door frame 5 surrounds the lower side of the game window 101 while the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 are disposed so as to surround the left and right and upper side of the game window 101. The tray unit 300 is disposed as shown.

  The door frame 5 has a greatly different appearance on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has a natural rock-like appearance by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. While the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 viewed from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 on the left side is a sharp and artificial metallic appearance ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 62, the door frame 5 has different amounts of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. Protruding forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a loosely curved planar shape.

  Thereby, when the door frame 5 of this example is viewed from the right front, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look like volumes similar to each other (see FIG. 19), but the left front When viewed from the top, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240 and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is hardly visible, and can give different impressions depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1 It is supposed to be. That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and can be made to look like a pachinko machine with different models, the player etc. The appeal to the player can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted to the player's attention.

  In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left and right asymmetrical, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows in the left and right direction in the island facility of the game hall, the appearance of the entire island facility looks super solid An alternative appearance (atmosphere) can be provided to give the player a rhythmic impression by alternately arranging right side decoration units 200 and left side decoration units 240 of different forms to suppress turning-off. It is possible to make the player's attention strongly by raising the appeal of the player.

  In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby the game window 101 The light emitting decoration can be made with any light emitting color so as to surround the. Also, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. , 254 b, 256 can be turned on or off to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2 L. Luminescent decoration in the door frame]
Then, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 is mainly demonstrated with reference to FIG.63 and FIG.64. FIG. 63 is a front view showing the arrangement of the light emitting decoration LEDs in the door frame. Moreover, FIG. 64 is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, and 300 is provided with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, and 322 on which an LED is mounted. The outer periphery of can be decorated with light emission.

  The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. The lens units 210a and 250a are disposed along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion in the left-right direction center of the game window 101 Are disposed between the circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, while the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 The circumferential lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth and loose curved surface. In the door frame 5, on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a between the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 is disposed.

  Further, the door frame 5 is on the back side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, and the left side upper decoration substrate 254. And the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is disposed, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front of each decoration substrate 214, 216, 254, 256 ing.

  The upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, and circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a LED 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a disposed at the corresponding position, and LED 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b disposed at the position corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246) . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high luminance. It is supposed to be an LED. In addition, two LEDs 214c disposed at the upper right end of the decoration substrate 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surface of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing) ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that light from the player is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 214a, 216a, etc. are not lit. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and worsening in appearance, and at the same time, the board reflects the light from the LEDs 214a and 216a that emit light to the player. The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated more brightly.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the door frame 5 at the top of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center in the left-right direction. It is formed to decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 disposed at the center in the lateral direction, an annular central annular lens portion 282 b disposed on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central annular lens portion 282 b. And four extending frame lens portions 282c extended thereto. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered by the upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed on the rear side of the central ring lens portion 282 b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally beyond the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288. The upper central decorative substrate 288 has a plurality of LEDs 288 a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288 b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282 b mounted on the front, and the upper central lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282 b And can be separately lighted and decorated. Further, on the upper side decorative substrate 290, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front face, and it is possible to make each extension frame lens portion 282c emit light and decorate respectively . The LEDs 288 a, 288 b and 290 a of the upper central decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, and the appearance is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In the dish unit 300, the upper dish decoration substrate 322 is disposed on the back side of the upper dish front decoration member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper dish decoration substrate 322 An upper plate upper right decoration member 319 for decorating the right side portion and the front outer periphery of the upper plate ball release button 341 can be lighted and decorated. In this example, the LEDs 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322 are full color LEDs.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the pan unit 300 includes a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent cylindrical press operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432 d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED of high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, and the same function and effect as those described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 covering the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 correspond. The second annular group 103 in which the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are disposed outside the first annular group 102 and the first annular group 102 (within the range of the hatch in FIGS. 63 and 64) close to the game window 101. (In the range of cross hatch in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are lighted appropriately, so as to surround the game window 101 approximately concentrically A plurality of (two in this example) light emitting decorations can be made. In other words, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the hatch area near the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 When all lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light.

  Moreover, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 In FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, a radially extending group 104 (FIG. 63 and FIG. 64) radially extending around the lower center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) to divide the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated to emit light radially, and in addition, the annular group by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 The light emission decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c on the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right-side decoration unit 200 is used as a notification group 105, and this LED 214c is made to emit light as appropriate. It is possible to notify various information to a person or an employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Moreover, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282b in the upper decorative unit 280 for decorating the upper center of the game window 101 are the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The upper central group 106 is an upper central group 106 for light emission decoration. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 288 a and 288 b of the upper central group 106, the upper central portion of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It can be made to emit light decoration that becomes a point. In addition, the LEDs 290 a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282 c in the upper decorative unit 280 are the upper central side group 107 for emitting and decorating the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Furthermore, in the door frame 5, the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 corresponding to the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 arranged under the game window 101 It is considered as the dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 of the operation unit 400 disposed at the upper center of the tray unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 It is considered as an operation group 109 for emitting light and decorating. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated to emit light, and the operation timing, operation direction, and the like of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are played Can be notified to

  The light emission decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108 and 109 to which they respectively belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided for the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 by 102a to 102j. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250, which are divided into 10 systems. It is done.

  Also, the twenty LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, the upper side 105a and the lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a central portion 106a, a right portion 106b, and a left portion 106c. Further, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems of the right side 107a and the left side 107b.

  Furthermore, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper tray group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d at the front and rear and left and right. In the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and the LEDs 430b form a pair. , And one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 are divided into three systems of one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a and 432d are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a and 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c, to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong, are further provided with three independent RGB systems to emit full color light. In the light emission control, there are 84 systems that are three times as large. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high brightness white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light at high brightness, so Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, eight systems are doubled.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs with normal luminance and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Moreover, LED214c is made into green LED and red LED, and belongs to two system 105a, 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system. Therefore, the same number of ten systems is used in actual light emission control.

  Accordingly, the actual number of systems in light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and the respective LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, Lighting and flickering are controlled by dynamic lighting for each system to which 430b and 432d belong, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control) . By this, it is possible to perform expressive light emission effects.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (the same color or similar colors are sequentially emitted) so that the light spreads outward around the game window 101. On the other hand, light emitting effects such as converging from the outside toward the game window 101 by causing the second ring group 103 to sequentially emit light (in the same color or similar colors sequentially) from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102; Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light simultaneously, it is possible to perform a light emission effect or the like that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

  Further, by cooperating with the LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first ring group 102 near the game window 101, and the first ring group 102 With the LEDs of the second ring group 103 disposed outside the display, it is possible to perform a more expressive luminous effect, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to entertain the player and make it interesting. Can be suppressed.

  Also, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, the lines 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j are appropriately lit to emit the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to have a light effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284 or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are divided into ten groups 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited thereto. If it is divided into about eight systems (about eight divisions), it is possible to favorably perform light emission effect such that light circulates on the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Furthermore, by emitting only the radial group 104, the light emission effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. By making it emit light that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or making the radial group 104 emit light (light on / blink) while emitting light from the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 It is possible to give a light emission effect that gives an accent to the light emission decoration of Further, by causing each system 104 a to 104 h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to perform light emission effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210 b and 250 b) circulate.

  In addition, by making the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 107 emit light, the player is given a chance or a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability changing gaming state, a time saving gaming state, a probability changing time short gaming state , Etc.) can be performed.

  Furthermore, by causing each system 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108 to emit light appropriately, it is possible to perform light emission effect to embellish the upper plate 301 or to emit light in association with the operation group 109. A light emission effect can be performed to prompt the user to operate the unit 405. In addition, by causing the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 to emit light as appropriate, the operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prompted or the light emission effect for guiding the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is provided. can do. Furthermore, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that urges the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the system 109c of the operation group 109 are full color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as light emission color and brightness for each of 109, and for each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 65 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear view of the main body frame. 67 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the front, FIG. 69 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the rear FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side in a front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. In addition, the main unit frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and also has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4; Upper shaft support bracket 630 and lower shaft support bracket 640 for supporting the door frame 5 by being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left side end portion of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2; Ball hitting device 650 for hitting the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front of the game board, and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the winning ball unit 700 to the tray unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the main frame 3 Open ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the electric parts provided on the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 And a back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view And a lock device 1000 attached to the right side end in a front view of the main body frame base for opening and closing locking of the main frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and locking and closing the door frame 5 to the main frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape in a front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 69). Thus, when attaching the main body frame base 600 to the main body frame base 600 at the time of attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. The rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main frame base 600 has a gaming board holding opening capable of fittingly holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating the inside of the range of about 3⁄4 of the whole from the top to the bottom in a rectangular shape 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming a front end outer periphery excluding the front side left side of the main body frame base 600, a recess from the front of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear; The door frame projecting piece 110c which protrudes backward from the lower end of the upper frame, the upper bent projecting piece 167 which protrudes to the rear of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side projecting to the rear of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engagement groove 603 into which the bent projection piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 A peripheral wall portion 605 which protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and which forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 is provided. The free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 is connected by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and the game board placement unit 606 on which the game board 4 is placed; Positioning projections 607 that project upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engage with the outer ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 65) to which the fastener 1120 is fastened, and the plate shape which descends downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact with the upper end A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are provided. The positioning projection 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out ball discharging groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict movement of the lower end of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and backward. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict movement of the right side in a front view of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board fastener 1120 of the game board 4 There is. In addition, although the details will be described later, the movement of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the game board 4 in a front view.

  Furthermore, the body frame base 600 is a bracket attachment for attaching the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 to the rear surface of the free end (upper and lower left end in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602. Portion 610 (see FIG. 73). As shown in FIG. 72 etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the vertical and horizontal directions on the front side, and the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 should be attached with sufficient strength. It is possible to Further, the body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and formed in the lower left in front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The U-shaped fitting groove 612 which fits with the positioning projection 110d which protrudes backward from the door frame base main body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and firing device 650 formed on the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. On the front side, the hitting and launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and launching device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid receiving recess 613. When the hitting and launching apparatus 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall 604, as shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. A downwardly extending far space 626 is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the feline space 626 is lowered. A game ball is received at the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower tray 302 of the pan unit 300.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left than the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by the relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 70 etc.), and the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear face of the rear face face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a barrier on the front side.

  In addition, the main unit frame base 600 rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 in the vicinity of the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 which protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixed piece 690a fanning around an axial center supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600 and a fixed piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side to be the rear end when rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600 and then operates the operation piece 690 b to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward beyond the game board placement unit 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placement unit 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. In addition, the game board fixture 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b abuts against the stopper 617, and by abutting against the stopper 617, the rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is restricted. It has become.

  Furthermore, a door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. In addition, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the main body frame base 600 on the lower rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 73), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing thereof is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the three main body frame bases 600 penetrate longitudinally in the front and rear direction inside the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in a front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 which is penetrated in the front and rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and aligned in the left and right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Locking projections 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock lock holes 621, respectively. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view in the front view. Then, in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. A state 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 67).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is gently and diagonally lowered from the upper right end toward the approximate center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in a rear view, and the lower rear wall 604 in the approximate center in the lateral direction. The game apparatus is provided with a main frame base ball removal passage 622 which is lowered from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward to allow the game ball to roll. The main unit frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed on the rear side by the substrate unit base 810 of the substrate unit 800, and the game ball obtained by rolling the ball extraction passage 741d in the award ball device 740 will be described later in detail. Is supposed to roll.

  In addition, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are disposed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the back view, and back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supporting the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for attaching the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to the front left side of the opening 614 in the front of the lower rear wall portion 604 and a lock device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall 605 And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for attaching the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed.

[1-3 B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws respectively to the metal fitting attachment portions 610 on the left and right rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner.

  First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like attachment portion extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. A front extension portion 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from near the front end of the front extension portion 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 67 etc.) vertically penetrated into which the is inserted and the downward movement from the front end left end of the front extension portion 632 to the open side of the door frame 5 A stopper 635 (see FIGS. 69 and 113) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 includes a door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a lower portion of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and supports the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-like mounting portion 642a extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front A plate-like front extension portion 642b extending, a door frame shaft support hole 634 penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and the front extension portion And a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end in a front view of the door 642b and which restricts the pivoting end of the door frame 5 to the open side. The mounting portion 642a, the forward extension portion 642b, and the stopper 642d of the door frame shaft support fitting 642 are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  In addition, the main frame support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main frame base 600 and extends from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a to the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extension portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 644b are provided. Also in the body frame shaft support bracket 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In the lower shaft support 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body shaft support bracket 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame The front extension portion 642b of the pivot support 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support bracket 644 are attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is supposed to be.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are mounted on the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640. Are coaxially positioned, and the main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is By inserting the upper support fitting 20 into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, when the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 The bracket 642c is coaxially located, and the door pin of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is mounted on the front extension portion 642 b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when inserting the upper shaft support fitting 630 into the door frame shaft support hole 634, the shaft pin 155 is Once the upper pivot support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper pivot support member 630 vertically overlap by sliding downward, the door is slid upward by sliding the pivot pin 155. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Ball hitting launcher]
Next, the hitting and launching apparatus 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device launcher in the main body frame. FIG. 75 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking and launching apparatus in the main body frame. This ball striking device firing device 650 can strike the gaming balls supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with the strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the hit and fired device 650 of the present embodiment, a firing base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600 and a rotational drive shaft 654 a project forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652 , A hitting ball 656 fixed integrally to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a movement locus of the tip 658 Between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 attached to the front end of the launch rail 660 extending from the predetermined position at the top to the base end as the base end at the base end A ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the firing rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball can not pass at the same time as the 658 is made passable. The ball 662 (the tip 658) is controlled to rotate to the side of the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where it is possible to hit the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the piece 662 and the ball stopper 662 And a stopper 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 reciprocates and rotates the drive shaft 654a at a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. The hitting rod 656 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a gentle arc extending from the fixing portion 656a, and a tip end with respect to the axial center of the driving shaft 654a. It has a collar portion 656b with the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can contact the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the collar portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip of the tip end 658 is pivoted toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view) It is supposed to be regulated.

  In addition, the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 has a loose arc shape in which the lower part is recessed along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 102). On the other hand, the center is in a V-shaped recessed shape, and the game ball hit by the hit ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the firing rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting and firing apparatus 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 capable of restricting the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 to the hitting position side, and rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, and can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts, and suppresses the generation of noise due to the abutment. It can be done.

  When the hitting and launching apparatus 650 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. 102 etc. It is positioned below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the gaming board placement portion 606 (the lower side of the gaming board holding port 601), and the outside of the gaming board 4 held in the gaming board holding port 601 Between the lower end of the rail 1111 and the lower end, a far space 626 which is downwardly extended with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed. The ball hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example is to hit the gaming ball into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 by firing the gaming ball so as to jump over the far space 626 on the left side in front view than the firing rail 660. It is possible to As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball entry 542e of the far cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the far space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven in is dropped into the foul space 626, received into the foul ball inlet 542e, and discharged to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, the striking launcher 650 is configured such that the launch solenoid 654 is driven by the launch control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle unit 500 and the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the driving of the Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 for supplying the game balls to the hit ball firing device 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven. When the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 to the hit ball launch device 650 side when it is released (OFF), the shooting solenoid 654 is driven substantially simultaneously with the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 By turning on (ON), the game balls can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game balls can be reliably fired by rotation of the hitting ball 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 83. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of a winning ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the winning ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the winning ball tank and the tank rail unit in the winning ball unit, disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball device in the winning ball unit, as disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 82 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotary body in the prize ball device. FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing the ball rolling passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main unit frame 3 of the present embodiment stores predetermined gaming instructions after storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed Based on the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 is provided with a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and aligning the gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sending it downstream, and a predetermined payout of the gaming balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730. The winning ball device 740 paying out based on the instruction and the gaming ball paid out by the winning ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of gaming balls It mainly comprises a full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 for closing the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. The external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the award ball base 710 and the external terminal board cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal board 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 on its rear surface and a back cover 900 fastened to the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in a back view. And a back cover fastening hole 780b (see FIGS. 77 and 79).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. As well as being disposed, a vertically extending prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal board 784 and an external terminal board cover 786 are disposed immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a front view reverse L shape substantially corresponding to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view. It is integrally molded of transparent synthetic resin. The award ball base 710 extends inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a extending inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a and is disposed substantially in the same plane. And a back wall 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the award ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the back wall 710b is recessed from the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, it can form a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 ing.

  In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and a lateral terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate An external terminal plate attachment portion 712 for attaching the cover 786, a plurality of attachment locking portions 713 for attaching the tank rail unit 730 to the upper end lower end rear side of the rear wall 710b, and a vertical side rear side of the rear wall 710b A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball device 740 to the ball, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding the gaming ball dispensed from the prize ball device 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and a rear wall And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branching unit 770 at the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 is penetrated in the back and forth direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b, and a relief hole 717 for releasing the dispensing motor 744 etc. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. In addition, although detailed description is omitted in the award ball base 710, an attachment hole, an attachment boss, etc. for attaching the award ball tank 720, the award ball device 740, etc. to the main body frame base 600, etc. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown also in FIG. 80, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an oblong box shape whose upper side is opened, and the bottom wall portion having a substantially rectangular shape with a long plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall 722 which rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall 721 and which protrudes only rearward on the right rear (the rear on the open side) in a rectangular shape in a plan view from the bottom wall 721; An outlet port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward than the bottom wall portion 721 of the right rear at 722 and opened downward, and a plate shape from the left side (axial support side) of the outlet port 723 in plan view to the left end of the award ball tank 720 Formed in the vicinity of the base end of the shaft portion 725 and on the front both ends of the outer peripheral wall portion 722 Award the tank 720 to the ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the winning balls tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  An outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of gaming balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the winning ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the gaming balls on the bottom wall 721 roll toward the discharge port 723 It has become.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 is provided with two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 in a rotatable manner. As shown in the figure, the ball straightening member 727 has one end pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein so that the other end hangs down by its own weight. . The ball straightening member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730 to be described later, and the game balls rolling in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. The bowl portion 724 of the award ball tank 720 is formed to cover approximately the upper half of the tank rail unit 730 and can prevent the game ball from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730 and the tank It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the award ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lower toward the right in plan view, The right side (closer to the outlet 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear outlet 723 in plan view. As a result, the flow of gaming balls can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown also in FIG. 80, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 is provided with a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth open at the top, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is sloped so that The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 83) which opens downward at the left (axially supported) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom substantially at the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end And a plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 78) which are further downwardly protruded and are locked from the upper side to the attachment locking portions 713 of the award ball base 710.

  The tank rail 731 is arranged such that the end on the right side (open side) in a front view is positioned directly below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720, and the gaming ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is After being received, it can be rolled to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the award ball base 710, the tank rail 731 that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the award ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported at the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 for closing the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stopper which can be moved into and out of the tank rail 731 to stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. And an earth plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the gaming balls in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the gaming balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball holding plate 734 has an attachment portion 734a to which the ball stopper 735 is attached at the top, and two slits 734b which are vertically penetrated and through which the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In the tank rail unit 730, two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the winning ball tank 720 are inserted from the upper side to the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which has not been made one step higher by the ball straightening member 727 one more step, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower as it goes to the discharge port 731a side. Is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As illustrated, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. Thus, when the upper portion of the gaming ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the outlet 723 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the gaming balls arranged in two rows alternately receive prize balls one by one It is sent to the device 740.

  In the bottom portion of the tank rail 731 is formed a narrow groove penetrating vertically, so that foreign substances such as dust rolling in the tank rail 731 together with the gaming balls fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. Further, although the ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not illustrated in detail, it is to be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply substrate 851 via the grounding fitting 782 When the gaming ball contacts the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734 a of the ball holding plate 734 so that the projection 735 a of the ball stopper 735 passes through the slit 734 b and is inside the tank rail 731. By inserting it, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the projecting pieces 735a, and the supply of gaming balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. There is.

  Furthermore, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 delivers the gaming balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710 as shown in FIGS. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage which opens at the upper end on the rear side and extends slightly to a position slightly lower than the vertical center with a width slightly wider than the outline of the gaming ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and a lower end of the distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end on the left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b A prize ball passage 741c opened on the left side, and a ball extraction passage 741d communicating with the lower end of the distribution space 741b in the rear view right side (axial support side) and extending downward and opening on the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 whose length in the vertical direction is shorter than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742 Dispensing motor 744 disposed on the front side of the plate 743 and the motor supporting plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor supporting plate 743, and is integral with the rotating shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744 The first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745, and the second gear 746 meshed with the second gear 746 The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotation integrally rotating with the third gear 747 and disposed in the distribution space 741 b of the unit base 741 The body 748 and the dispensing rotating body 748 are integrally rotatably supported on the opposite side across the third gear 747, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. And 749.

  Also, the prize ball device 740 is a ball out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 for detecting the presence or absence of gaming balls in the supply passage 741a, and of the gaming balls attached to the unit base 741 rolling in the prize ball passage 741c. The count sensor 751 for measuring the number, the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotation body 748, and the rotation angle sensor 752 are attached to the back surface of the back cover 742 A relay board 754 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the sensor substrate 753 and the payout motor 744, the ball breakage switch 750, the count sensor 751, and the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control substrate 4110; Is equipped.

  Furthermore, the award ball device 740 covers the award ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side, and a substrate cover 755 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742; a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749 And a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the sensor substrate 753 covered from the rear side with the back cover 742 interposed, and a supply channel that can contact the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741 a of the unit base 741 An earth metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween and grounding the dispensing motor 744, and a back cover 742 so as to be removable from the unit base 741 And an attach / detach button 759.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the open rear end of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d Is supposed to be closed. In addition, the unit base 741 has a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a that is temporarily bulged backward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side (left side in rear view) below the position where the supply passage 741 a bulges rearward and is outside the cut-out position of the supply passage 741 a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball breakage switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the count sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a longitudinal direction below the prize ball passage 741c. And a motor insertion hole 741g through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball breakage switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball breakage switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball, it is possible to detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741 a by the ball breakage switch 750. When the gaming ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the out-of-ball switch 750 (the out-of-ball state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate and the player or the hall It is reported to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748), and the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. Ground fitting attachment portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j disposed on the upper portion of the unit base 741 and having a detachable button 759 for mounting and demounting and supporting the back lid 742; Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage earth fitting 757 can be in contact with the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757 to the ground fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a via the supply passage ground fitting 757 is eliminated It can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 is generally in the form of a vertically long plate, and the upper end is bulged rearward. At the top of the back cover 742 is a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the detachable button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear face in the vertical direction A sensor substrate mounting portion 742c disposed below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor substrate 753, and a through hole 742d through which the dispensing rotating body 748 can pass. The relay substrate attachment portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed on the rear side of the earth metal fitting attachment portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the award ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 can be It is possible to make it easy to dissipate heat.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a of a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the payout rotating body By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749, which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotating body 748, are formed at positions corresponding to between the concave portions 748a of the dispensing rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, it is possible to detect the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout command from the main control substrate 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control substrate 4110, or the payout switch 860b is operated, or the like. By rotating 744, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be paid out to the player side (upper tray 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 is rotated, and the second gear 746 is further rotated. The third gear 747 meshing with the gear is rotated. In the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 is fixed on the front side, and the rotation detection board 749 is integrally rotatably supported on the rear side, and together with the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 and the rotation detection board 749 are It is supposed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the prize ball device 740, the dispensing rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at substantially the center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation is performed. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741 c by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the clockwise direction from the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball pulling passage 741d, and the payout rotating body 748 is The game balls paid out to the ball removal passage 741d side from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d, the ball removal passage 778 of the full tank branching unit 770 described later, the main frame base ball removal passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and the board unit 800 It is possible to discharge to the rear side outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the award is made from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as a ball clog can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 79 and 83. The full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls are full on the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 can be distributed so as to pay out the game balls.

  The full-tan branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the award ball base 710 at the rear end upper portion and a locking portion 770 which is locked to the attachment locking portion 716 of the award ball base 710 substantially at the upper center in the front-rear direction. And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the rear side of the mounting lock portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a from the rear side to the mounting locking portion 716 of the winning ball base 710, and the winning ball base 770 By fixing the fixing portion 770b to a predetermined screw 710, the full-tan branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the winning ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box-like shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction in the upper rear end. A prize ball receptacle 771 for receiving game balls having flowed down a prize ball passage 715 of a prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 disposed under the prize ball receptacle 771 and expanded in the left-right direction (see FIG. 83) The game ball is rolled forward from the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 83) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving opening 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the front view and a full channel 775 for guiding the game ball forward from a position farther to the right in the rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving opening 771 in the branch space 772 (FIG. three A), a full Tan passage 775 to release the rolling was game balls forward and full ball outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Furthermore, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that receives the game ball that opens upward at the left end in a front view at the upper end of the rear end and flows down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740; A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 83) for guiding the gaming ball received in the extraction opening 777 to the front side and the gaming ball rolled on the ball extraction passage 778 are released forward and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end in front view And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full ball outlet 776.

  In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 are the first of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 774, which is in opposite communication with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c, passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540, and The gaming balls supplied to the upper tray 301 and discharged from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542 c of the far cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed to communicate with the upper right end of the main frame base ball escape passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 in a back view, and the gaming ball released from the ball outlet 779 is the main frame base 600 The main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is to be delivered.

  In this full tank branching unit 770, the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received by the prize ball receiving opening 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the gaming ball having entered the prize ball receptacle 771 drops the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receptacle 771. Then, the gaming ball that has flowed down into the passage 773 normally enters the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540 from the ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and the dish unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 (the winning ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of gaming balls, the first ball outlet of the far cover unit 540 The game ball which can not go out to the upper plate 301 side from 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540, and eventually, the inside of the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full branch unit 770 is also full. become. In this state, the gaming ball entering the branch space 772 from the winning ball receptacle 771 can not normally enter the passage 773 and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball enters into the full tank passage 775, and from below the full ball outlet 776 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, under the dish unit 300. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  Note that the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be viewed from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign substances such as dust and dirt that have entered the full tank branch unit 770, clogging of the ball, etc. without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  As described above, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example automatically performs the game ball paid out from the winning ball device 740, until the full tank is cancelled. Since the lower tray 302 can be supplied to the lower tray 302, the upper tray becomes full and the ball release button of the upper tray is operated like the conventional pachinko machine, so that the game balls can not be supplied to the striking device. It is possible to avoid interruption of the hitting of the game ball, and it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience in the game and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example branches the passage of the gaming ball paid out immediately below the winning ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Because the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper tray 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 hit the ball launching device The storage ball of the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so the game ball of the same amount as the conventional is stored in the upper plate 301 Can. Therefore, by making the upper tray 301 smaller, it is possible to make the game window 101 in the door frame 5 relatively large (wide), and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 provided with the wider game area 1100 and play a game A pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, and the player can be entertained by the large game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full ball outlets 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate so that the receiving port (first Even when the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are only one, the game balls can be sent to the door frame 5 without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branch unit 770) of the game ball in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost of the machine can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 through the normal passage 773 is preferentially hit into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray The game balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to a lack of game balls for throwing in, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 in which the number of storage dishes is different. .

  In addition, unless the upper tray 301 is full, since the gaming balls paid out from the winning bowl device 740 are sent to the upper tray 301, the frequency of transferring the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 302 to the upper tray 301 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to concentrate the player on the operation of hitting the game ball and the like, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, even when the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball The position of the lower end of the inlet corresponding to the inlet 542a etc. can be made the same height as the first ball inlet 542a etc corresponding to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage trays, so It becomes possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and the storage plate can be made deeper to secure a sufficient amount of storage for the game balls, and the player can be made to play without having to worry about the storage amount frequently. It is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 provided with different numbers of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the winning ball apparatus 740, and the upper tray 301 is full tank with game balls. Even if no game balls are released from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branching position of the full passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls can not be ejected from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is disposed as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the substantial storage amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage dishes provided on the door frame 5 is different, the storage amount of gaming balls in each door frame 5 can be maximized without changing the main frame 3 (full tank branch unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be made as much as possible, and can cope with different door frames 5 sufficiently.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are large enough to roll the game balls in a plurality of rows, and the amount of game ball parked in the full tank branch unit 770 (storage amount) Can be increased, so that even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is avoided that the total storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 decreases. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

  In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. At the time, it is possible to easily find a clogged spot from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem early and to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3 E. Ball outlet opening and closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 84 to FIG. FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 86 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the fal cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the attachment portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the regular ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are closed, and from the winning ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 Can block the flow of gaming balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to project beyond the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 held slidably in the vertical direction by the shutter base 791, the opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 via the opening / closing crank 793 And an open / close spring 794.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791 a for slidably holding the opening / closing shutter 792 vertically upward so that the opening / closing shutter 792 protrudes upward beyond the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed in front of the left end in front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side in a front view of the opening 791b, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of an upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, the open / close shutter 792 of the ball outlet open / close unit 790 is a flat shutter body 792a, and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) which slide from the front of the shutter body 792 and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. And a laterally long rectangular drive hole 792b disposed in a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding projections and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a crank support 791c of the shutter base 791; From the tip of the drive rod 793b extending rearwardly from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the open / close shutter 792 Drive pin 793c, an abutment portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and the tip end having a spherical shape, and the other end of the opening / closing spring 794 And the spring locking portion 793e for locking the

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening and closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed behind the opening and closing shutter 792 even when the opening and closing shutter 792 is lifted. The normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 etc. in the full tank branch unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the drive pin 793c of the opening and closing crank 793 rotates up and down like an arc at the same time as the opening and closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front and rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction via the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790, the contact portion 793d of the opening and closing crank 793 contacts the opening and closing operation piece 542g of the door cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. The contact portion 793d is pivoted in the clockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 can be lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793 d of the opening and closing crank 793 and the opening and closing operation piece 542 g of the full cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released. Is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the opening / closing shutter 792 is lifted to close the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776. It can be done.

  Thus, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 automatically automatically sets the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776 in the winning ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game balls are prevented from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 It can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 93. FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 88 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after being disassembled and viewed. FIG. 91 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply substrate box in the substrate unit. FIG. 92 (A) is a cross-sectional view of a terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 93 (A) is a front view of the firing power supply substrate box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A).

  The substrate unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 in front view, and the substrate unit base A firing power supply substrate box 830 attached to the right end rear surface of the front view 810, a power supply substrate box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 so as to surround the firing power supply substrate box 830 from the rear side A power supply substrate box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control substrate box 860 attached to the power substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the front view 860; and a main relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral relay terminal board 882 attached to the front of the board unit base 810; Have.

  The substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example is configured to extend in the left-right direction as shown in the figure, and the substantially central part in the left-right direction inclines gently upward as it goes down one step toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall 811 projecting forward from the front, an opening 812 disposed on the upper side of the shielding wall 811 at a position one step lower than the middle in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction Board attachment portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view and for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and in a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front and rear direction in front view left side of the board attachment portion 813 Longitudinally slit-shaped plural-pieces penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the penetrating cylindrical duct portion 814 and the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface A through hole 815 of, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  In the substrate unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The gaming balls can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the substrate unit base 810 can be enhanced. In addition, the substrate unit base 810 sends the gaming balls having flowed down the main frame base ball escape passage 622 to the power supply substrate box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. It can be done.

  Further, in the board unit base 810, the board attachment portion 813 for attaching the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is disposed at a position corresponding to the opening 614 opened in a rectangular shape in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main frame base 600. It is supposed to come to Further, the substrate unit base 810 can transmit the sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 favorably to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box storage portion 843 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 in which the box storage portion 816 is disposed on the rear side, the box storage portion 816 and the front box storage portion 843. And a receiving recess for receiving the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with the lower speaker 821 mounted facing the front. At the same time as sealing the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a sealed manner, the speaker box 820 is formed with a horizontally long rectangular opening port 822 on the left side of the lower speaker 821 in a front view. The open port 822 communicates with the space on the rear side of the lower speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, though the detailed illustration is omitted, so that the phase of the sound on the rear side of the lower speaker 821 is reversed. It radiates forward and is a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting more deep bass to the aperture of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 in the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted forward. ing.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply substrate 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. In the firing power supply substrate box 830, various electronic components attached to the firing power supply substrate 831 are accommodated internally, and heat from the electronic components etc. is provided through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 is detached from above in the upwardly open accommodation recess formed by the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810 and the front box accommodation portion 843 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 described later. It is supposed to be accommodated. Thereby, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, when a problem occurs in the firing power supply substrate box 830, the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily detached, replaced, or repaired from the front side of the main body frame 3. It can be done (see Figure 67).

  Further, the launch power supply substrate box 830 will be described in detail. As shown also in FIG. And a combined current combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is driven by causing a current to flow to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking and launching apparatus 650. In this firing power supply substrate box 830, slits 830a as heat dissipation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat emitted from the DC / DC converter 831a mounted on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the outside. ing.

  Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply substrate box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply substrate box 830, a partition wall 830b, which divides the internal space into two spaces of a space for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, has an upper inner wall And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom to the end opening edge. Thus, when the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830 and the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 is closed, the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Partition wall 830b for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a. The housing space 830 d for housing the DC / DC converter 831 a functions as a heat insulating wall that blocks the heat from entering and exiting.

  The heat in the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed on the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface for communicating the housing space 830c with the outside air. The released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored by being released to the outside through 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a, is a heat radiation hole formed on the upper surface and the lower surface communicating the housing space 830d with the outside air. By being released to the outside through the slits 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In this embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for producing combined current to be supplied to the launch solenoid 654 of the striking launcher 650 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851, but are separately emitted from the power supply substrate 851. By being provided on the power supply substrate 831, the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply substrate 851. Therefore, the size reduction of the firing power supply substrate 831 facilitates handling, the replacement work of the firing power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, and the time spent on the replacement work can be shortened. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the firing power supply substrate box 830 while the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830.

  Also, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its life, and even if the driving by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, replacement work of the firing power substrate 831 is easy The interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage by being able to Therefore, the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing can be resolved at an early stage, the game can be resumed, and the interest of the player decreases. Can be suppressed.

  The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is deteriorated by repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time drive firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654, and reaches the life On the other hand, although the power supply substrate 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island facility such as a game hall, charging and discharging are not repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831. The life is extremely long as compared with the firing power supply substrate 831. In other words, the power supply substrate 831 reaches its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply substrate 851 comes to life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851 but are provided separately on the power supply substrate 851 and not on the power supply substrate 851 for producing combined current flowing to the emission solenoid 654. Can be concentrated on the power supply substrate 851. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electronic component associated with the long-term aging change from being replaced together with the short-lived electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the bat firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity is changed to change the driving characteristics. It is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach the launch power supply substrate 831 even if the fraud is changed to different electrolytic capacitors SC0 different from each other, and replacement of the launch power supply substrate 831 is difficult It is possible to make it difficult to make fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the impact strength that has been optimized by making unauthorized modifications to the launch power supply substrate 831 and to make it difficult to do fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of preventing a player who has learned frustration etc. from developing into injustice such as injustice.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 is made removable so that it can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is cheated, the firing power substrate 831 is immediately replaced to make cheating. It is possible to eliminate the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of frustration and feeling unhappy due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 for controlling the strike launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3 holding the game board 4 When replacing the game board 4 due to a model change, etc., the firing power supply substrate 831 (firing power supply substrate box 830) of the firing control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, so it matched the concept of the new model to be replaced etc. By replacing the launch power supply substrate 831 with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a that can realize the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the bat striking launch device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 is a new game It can be matched to the board 4. Therefore, since the hit characteristics of the game ball can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the game by the game board 4 of the new model and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply substrate 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply substrate 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as game halls, While the effort required for replacement can be simplified, it can be replaced in a short time, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed. Further, since the firing power supply substrate 831 (the firing power supply substrate box 830) is made removable so that it can be replaced, the change of the implantation characteristics is made as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (the delivery control substrate 4110) is replaced. The cost of reducing the cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hole side can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 etc. can be used as they are before. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is degraded, as described above, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, a defect occurs due to the degradation and the firing power supply substrate 831 is immediately replaced. And the problem can be resolved, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and at the same time, the interruption of the game can be quickly resolved to feel frustrating or to feel disappointing. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, the shooting power supply substrate 831 (the shooting power supply substrate box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game power holding board 601 is held by the game board holding port 601 Because it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for fraudulent action is made to enter from the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, an illegal tool reaches the firing power substrate 831 by the game board 4. While being able to prevent that a fraudulent act is performed with respect to the injection | emission electric power source board | substrate 831, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high defense power against a fraudulent act.

  Furthermore, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601 and the position for supporting the firing power supply substrate box 830 is on the rear side of the front surface of the main body frame 3, the firing power supply A space for supporting the substrate box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power supply substrate box 830 and achieves the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  Also, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the firing power supply substrate 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3. Therefore, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (fired power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, so that the problem can be eliminated early and the game is interrupted. While being able to shorten time as much as possible, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which reliably plays the effect mentioned above.

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 in the substrate unit 800 receives the gaming balls discharged upward from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the gaming board 4 to the upper left on the left front than the left and right center in front view. Ejecting ball receiving portion 841, Ejecting passage 842 for guiding the gaming ball received by Ejecting ball receiving portion 841 downward, and Ejecting passage 842 and the front of the side of Ejecting passage 842 and Ejecting ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box accommodating portion 843 opened forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply substrate box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed to be recessed forward and the front end of the power supply substrate box 850 And a rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  The power supply substrate box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is in a position desired to the discharge passage 842 The body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the body frame base 600 is rolled to pass through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the back of the substrate unit base 810 The game ball which has flowed down to the side and the game ball which is discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and which is received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 will be described later in detail. It can be discharged downward.

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodation portion 816 and the front box accommodation portion 843 accommodate the fired power supply substrate box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply substrate box 850 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose front is open, and includes a power supply substrate 851 attached so as to close its front end opening. The power supply substrate box 850 is adapted to receive various electronic components attached to the power supply substrate 851, and externally transmits the heat from the electronic components through the plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released into the As shown in FIG. 90, the power switch 852 attached to the power supply substrate 851 is exposed on the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850.

  In addition, power supply substrate box 850 is a standing wall projecting rearward along the lower side of the opening facing power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 88 and 90) mounted on the lower side of power supply switch 852 in power supply substrate 851. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding backward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b and the outer periphery of the power supply substrate box 850 And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece And the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  The power supply substrate box 850 is slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the upright wall portion 850b connects the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 to the power terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 as shown in FIG. It is formed to project into In the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is hooked from the lower front side of the power supply substrate box 850 to the rear end of the upright wall 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, after connecting the connector terminal which the wiring cord extended to the connection terminal attached to the substrate and then pulling the wiring cord to the substrate side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed to the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the opposite side to the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply substrate 851 side (front side with respect to the main frame 3). Since the wiring cord 854 is wound around (folded back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b that protrudes rearward relative to the connector terminal 855 even if it is pulled, the connector from the wiring cord 854 It is possible to prevent application of a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed to the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since power supply substrate box 850 is provided with protruding portions 850c that project rearward on both sides of the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, even if wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, the rear end The projections 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side. The wire cord 854 can be brought close to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d immediately after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It is possible to make it possible to simplify the working process involved in the assembly.

  The power supply substrate box 850 and the power supply substrate box holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. The rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851, the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850 b projecting rearward than the rear end of the connector terminal 855 Since the wiring cord 854 extended from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is a power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It becomes possible to act in such a direction as releasing the connection with the 853 and can prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unremovable by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851. Can be easily removed to easily perform maintenance such as substrate replacement.

  Also, the wiring cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850, and the degree of bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is not provided. Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the 854 itself, and disconnection of the wiring cord 854 due to the unreasonable force can be prevented from occurring.

  Furthermore, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853 and, since the standing wall portion 850b is adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, it is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It becomes possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extended from the connector terminal 855 as straight as possible backward with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. It is possible to prevent the force from acting and to prevent the occurrence of problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851 is provided with the upright wall portion 850b, there is no need to provide the power supply substrate 851 with the upright wall portion 850b, and the assembly operation of the power supply substrate 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply substrate 851 is covered with the power supply substrate box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dirt, and the like that cause the occurrence of defects from adhering to the power supply substrate 851, and it is mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) so that it is difficult to touch or replace them, and it is possible to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  The direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 in the power supply substrate 851 is substantially perpendicular (front-back direction) to the substrate surface, and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, shear force can be prevented from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention can be configured such that a defect does not easily occur.

  Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850 b and the wiring cord 854 is Even when a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. The connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent the occurrence of problems such as contact failure and conduction failure.

  Further, since the protruding portions 850c that project backward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protruding portions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can not be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. A pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and reliably exerts the above-described effects can be embodied.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded at the standing wall portion 850b is brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 is made difficult to be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. While the wire cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the assembly process can be simplified to suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, the delivery control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a thin box-like box base 861 that is wide and open at the rear, and a thin box-like cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear side and opens at the front. 862 and a dispensing control substrate 4110 (see FIG. 188) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation / cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 can not be separated without being cut off, and the trace thereof is left when the delivery control substrate box 860 is opened. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been improperly opened and closed. In this example, the delivery control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removing switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 are faced rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 66). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are arranged to face rearward through the cover 862.

  Furthermore, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, and the board attachment part 871a formed on the upper left rear face in rear view and the board cover attachment part 871b formed on the rear right end rear face A peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted from the rear side to the substrate mounting portion 871a of the substrate base 871 and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871 A connection terminal board cover 873 attached from the rear side and having an opening 873b extending vertically in the rear wall 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 are attached to the rear surface CR unit connection terminal board 8 supported in the connection terminal board cover 873 4, a, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a power indicator for displaying the operating state etc. of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island equipment side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The substrate base 871, the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 are respectively formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the CR unit connection terminal are provided from the outside. The plate 874 or the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, if a problem such as ball clogged in the pachinko machine 1 occurs, the contents of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator installed on the island facility side or the CR unit 6 The displayed condition display sticker 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the substrate base 871 in the terminal substrate box 870, the substrate attachment portion 871a is formed in a thin box shape whose rear end is opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a and fixed to the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown), and is formed on the lower inner portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a. A terminal board box locking claw 871I for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 is detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the terminal board box locking claw 871I. It can be done.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape with the substrate cover attachment portion 871b opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is made such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. The inner peripheral wall is made into the outer piece part 871c extended in the front-back direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f disposed on the left outside of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b in a rear view in the back and forth direction. The protrusion 871e of the substrate base 871 has a rearward protrusion amount slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in FIG. It is arranged to be close to the

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear surface right rear surface of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b so as to be vertically separated, and has a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875; And a rectangular tubular locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871 A rear wall 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall 873c, a rectangular opening 873b extending vertically through the rear wall 873a, and a rear wall substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 873b The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall 873d extending from the 873a to the front (substrate base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall 873d abut on the front surface And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873 e formed in 873 c.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and substantially in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g which covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open in the left side in a rear view, and extends outward (right direction) from the rear end in the outer wall portion 873c A pair of fixing pieces 873h which can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement formed at the left end portion of the outer wall portion 873c in the rear view and lockable to the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. And a hooking piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall 873d extending forward is formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening 873f having the protective portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. In addition, the connection terminal plate cover 873 may restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 backward by the front end of the inner wall 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. While being able to control the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to move forward by the pair of substrate holders 873e, it is possible to detachably hold the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871 to obtain the substrate. The base cover mounting portion 871b of the base 871 can be detachably mounted.

  CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 In addition to the above, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360 and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as illustrated, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

  Further, the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size substantially covering the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and opened entirely to the front, and disposed on the right side surface in rear view. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portions 871g, a through hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and front from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b An abutment wall 875c extending to the end and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871 are provided.

  The substrate box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be capable of opening and closing by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871. There is. The board box cover 875 has a length such that the partition wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the partition wall on the side farther from the shaft 875a The length 875 c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the substrate box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the partition walls 875c substantially abut on the rear surfaces of the substrate base 871 and the connection terminal plate cover 873. It is supposed to be.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is used as a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside also on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminals 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are square two-piece connectors, and are attached so as to be able to be fitted and connected from the rear as illustrated.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, as shown in FIG. 92, in the assembled state, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer rim 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal cover 873 and the shaft 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since each side has an opposing wall 875c, a multiple-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized flexible tool is introduced between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool is not bent along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal An unauthorized tool can be reliably prevented from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and the unauthorized action on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be surely prevented. It has become.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even with the D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, which can prevent the fraudulent act from being performed. It is supposed to be.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft parts 875a on the shaft part 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported rotatably on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. Since the partition wall 875c has a length extending between them, and the partition wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if it is attempted to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and to prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to conduct fraudulent action and suppressing It can be made expensive.

  Furthermore, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b in the vicinity of the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the insertion of the electrode can be prevented by the protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, and an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b can also be prevented.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if the incorrect tool is inserted through the gap etc. and the tip of the incorrect tool is made to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the CR board connection terminal plate 874 housed is protected by the terminal board box 870. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

  When CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in terminal substrate box 870, outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate extend in the direction along the front surface (rear surface of the substrate) of CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the ridges 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate Since the partition walls 875c of the box cover 875 exist, respectively, the multiple barriers will be constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 will be a crank shape meandering. In addition, an attempt is made to infiltrate a flexible tool having an excellent flexibility between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary). Also, since the tool does not bend along the boundary, it is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tool entry from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of reliably preventing fraudulent acts on the unit connection terminals 874a and the internal connection terminals 874b.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act.

  Further, one end of the terminal base box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so as to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and to open and close the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 And the board box cover 875 having a plate-like partition wall 875c extending forward from the side end on the pivotally supported side of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to insert a screwdriver or the like between the parts of the box cover 875 pivotally supported to the substrate base 871 to form a gap and allow an unauthorized tool to enter, the incorrect tool is a connection terminal by the partition wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and to prevent fraudulent acts being performed. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal substrate box 870, the connection terminal plate cover 873 must be opened after opening the substrate box cover 875, making it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be enhanced by the partition wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, and it is possible to make it difficult to conduct fraud and to have high deterrence.

  Furthermore, even if it is attempted to tamper with insertion of needle-like electrodes through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord in the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 The protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875 cover the rear side of the opening portion 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body, so the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 ( A needle-like electrode can not be inserted into the gap of the main body of the connector from the rear side), and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act on the terminal of the connected wiring cord, and it is possible to have a high crime prevention capability It can be done.

  Further, the outer wall 873 c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873 e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall 873 c is extended to the front side relative to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform an improper action, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves backward with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). CR unit connection terminals on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal substrate box 870 is formed of a transparent resin, and the inside of the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside, the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 without disassembling. Is an illegal tool inserted into CR unit connection terminal board 874, peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, etc. housed inside, or CR unit connection terminal board 874, etc. has not been replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, etc. are replaced with unauthorized ones, etc. Can make it easier to detect cheating, and it also makes it easier to detect cheating. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since terminal board box 870 is mounted on the back surface side of main body frame 3 so that the front surface of CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, the outer frame 2 can be When the main body frame 3 is pivoted to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal board 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal board box 870 face the worker side (player side). The unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily checked.

  A main side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are a door control and a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, the decoration substrate, the operation unit 400 and the like provided in the fifth embodiment. The main side relay terminal boards 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal boards 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a substrate formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810 By attaching them to the attachment portion 813, the connection terminals face the front side from the front face of the main body frame base 600.

  The main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are covered by a relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connection to the door frame 5 side come to the front side through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal board cover 692, and the wiring 196 is connected to those connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  In addition, main side relay terminal board 880 is the ball position button 361 of return ball unit 360 of ball unit 360 in dish unit 300 which is arranged on the door frame 5 side, return button 362, remaining display portion 363 and rotational position detection sensor of handle device 500. A relay 512 is used to relay the connection between the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full detection sensor 550 of the far cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is used for the decoration units 200, 240 and 280 disposed on the door frame 5 side, the decoration substrates 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 disposed on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3 G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 95 is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover disassembled and viewed from the rear side. The back cover 900 in this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 3 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main unit frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (game unit 4 attached to the main unit frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main unit frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-like main portion 902 closing the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 extending forward from the right side of the main portion 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of support pins 906 arranged in the vertical direction and protruding downward and pivotally supported by the back cover support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 and formed in the upper and lower portions of the left side of the main portion 902 in front view An engagement piece 908 engaged with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and a back cover 900 near the lower engagement piece 908 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in an unopenable manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, etc., the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side in a rear view of the lower locking piece 923a in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. 921 and a longitudinally long rectangular lock port 922 disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lock that is elastically locked from the rear side with respect to the lock port 922 A plate-like guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a laterally elongated long hole 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and the long hole 923b of the guide 923 are inserted from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having an external thread 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 92 on the external thread 924a of the fastening member 924. A holding member 925 mounted so as to sandwich the, and a. In addition, the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is loosely fitted to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play at In the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. While being slidable in the left-right direction, it does not drop out of the long hole 923 b. The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body portion 902, the locking member 924 of the fastening member 924 projecting forward through the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924 a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 in this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame 3 by pivoting the pivot pin 906 to the back cover pivot 623 of the main frame base 600. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially in agreement.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 in which the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900 is locked, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900. A state of being positioned behind the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the end of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b from this state and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed). Note that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique to the main body 902, the fastening member 924 is Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axial center of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably transferred to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, fastening or fastening can be performed easily simply by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve the maintainability.

  In addition, the back cover 900 has a connecting notch 910 which is notched upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 in a rectangular shape, and a confirmation opening which passes through in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connecting notch 910. 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in a front view.

  The back cover 900 is, as shown in FIG. 5, closed with respect to the main frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4. Etc. are coming to the rear side. In addition, the back cover 900 is configured such that the board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 105) attached to the back surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the back side through the confirmation opening 912 and the back cover 900 The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the notch portion 914. As a result, even if the back cover 900 is not opened relative to the main body frame 3, operation check, appearance check, control state check, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 can be performed.

  Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating thinly in the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through the slits 916 is of the main frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the rear outside. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and elongated in the vertical direction are provided at a position slightly leftward in a front view from the center. The through holes 918 close the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 and accommodate and hold the game board 4 in the main body frame 3, the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. Located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 included in the unit so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted well. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Thereby, in the present example, a fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900 When the game board 4 is held by the main unit frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main unit frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game unit 4. Even when the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923 Can be prevented from losing the fastening member 924 or leaving it in the pachinko machine 1 from the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the open back cover 900, there is no need to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. The rear cover 900 can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the opposite side to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is assuredly correct with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be concluded. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the holding member 925, which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 and holds the fastening member 924 in a movable manner with respect to the guide member 923, is attached to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. Thus, the fastening member 924 can be movably held with respect to the guide member 923 due to the gap between them and the long hole 923 b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 passes through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are in close contact. Protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. It can be done and it can look good.

  In addition, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is screwed to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 with the female screw portion, the screw is fastened only by pulling compared with the engagement by the simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, and the security effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility, and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or move the male screw portion 924a straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Thus, the male screw portion 924a can be reliably fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  Further, in a state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along an inner wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900, the locking opening Since it is elastically locked to 922, an axis extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the distal end side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 attached movably to the insertion hole 921 It can be moved so as to turn around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported relative to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held by the long hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 may be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Since this can be performed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, after further providing a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a at a position different from the back cover fastening hole 780b in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 elastically engages with the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a, respectively. In addition, a plurality of engagement pieces 908 are provided, and by engaging the engagement pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780 a of the main body frame 3, fastening by the fastening member 924 is Since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 separately, the number of fastening operations can be reduced as much as possible with only one fastening portion using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement between the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a separately from the fastening member 924, a wide closed range is provided. Even with the back cover 900, the rear side (the rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening portions by the fastening members 924.

  In addition, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported relative to the body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600). Since the rear cover 900 is turned in the closing direction and the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the rear cover 900 and the rear cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The holes 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening members 924 held by the back cover 900 can easily be fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b through the insertion holes 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, the back of the back cover 900 is released even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and maintenance is performed. The cover 900 can be kept in the state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side crime prevention board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 70 and FIG. The side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms a left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 fixed to the upper and lower portions near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 And a positioning member 956 fixed inside the main body 952 and engaged with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction with substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction and a front end of the side piece 952a as viewed from the front Front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c disposed so as to form a predetermined gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and having a smaller projection than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side piece 952a And a rear end piece 952d extending longer in the rightward direction than the front end piece 952b (see FIG. 112). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by the side piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and the front component 1110 in the game board 4 between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. The left side in a front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 112).

  In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600. When the side crime prevention plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is the axial support side of the axially supporting reinforcing plate 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. To be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped protruding piece 166, and to prevent insertion of a tool for cheating between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view (See Figure 112). In addition, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and the like disposed in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 etc. favorably. It has become.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is formed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950. The rear side piece of the substantially U-shaped axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the case is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952 b In this state, the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is in contact with the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3 even if the door frame 5 is forced open with respect to the main body frame 3. It becomes possible to abut and prevent the pivotal support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened up Can be used to open the door frame 5 against the main frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  Further, since the side crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by the unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. In addition, after the main frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of a synthetic resin, the side crime prevention plate 950 on the side (shaft support side) on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is formed of metal, The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared to the case where the entire body frame 3 is formed of metal.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 for locking the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one position between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041 so as to be stopped, the open side is improper such as a bur Even if it is scolded by such a tool, it can be favorably prevented that the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is expanded, and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being forcibly opened.

  In addition, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the side crime prevention plate 950 is made to extend backward than the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, so that the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a becomes long. Since the bending rigidity to the load applied in the front-rear direction becomes stronger, the strength and rigidity of the entire side crime prevention plate 950 can be further enhanced, and the side crime prevention plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent and cheating being performed .

  Further, since the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal extrusion type material, the side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined sectional shape with the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily made While being able to form, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and defects such as strength reduction that occur during processing as compared to the case where the metal plate is bent The side crime prevention plate 950 can be made as small as possible and high in durability and strength.

[1-3 I. Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. 97 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 98 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 98 (B) is a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding door for a main frame, which are provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device disassembled and seen from the rear, and FIG. 100 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding door for glass door and the sliding door for main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 101 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3. A door hook hole 620 formed at the top of the right side (open side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main frame base 600 and a lock retaining hole 621 formed at the lower portion, and a peripheral wall of the main frame base 600 It can be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 in a front view.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding wedge 1040, the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame can not be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame are formed therein. And are arranged slidably. The U-shaped base 1001 is extremely thin in comparison with a lock device integrated in a conventional L-shaped cross section. This makes it possible to make the size in the left and right direction of the lock device 1000 as thin as possible, and the size in the left and right direction of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively enlarged. It is possible to provide a large 1,400 game board 4.

  The U-shaped base 1001 can be attached in a state where the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001 form the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-tampering structure which makes it difficult for the user to tamper with the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) up and down opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002 and a screw stop 1003 protruding outward in the middle and the upper part of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 99) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side Protruding forward from the lower end of the upper end and the middle of the open side (front side) of the side 1001a (see FIG. 99) opposite to the side 1001b where the 1003 is provided and the lower side of the open side 1001a, 1001b And a locking projection 1004.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is a hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. The screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attaching portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 coincide with each other when inserted upward from the rear side into the lock locking hole 621 and moved upward. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (the main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the same.

  The lock device 1000 is attached with screws not only at the upper and middle screw stop portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw lock portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The lock mounting portion 625 is also fixed to the main frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower side of the lock device 1000 can also be mounted.

  In addition, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the lock projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001, the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper and the lock lock hole 621 is inserted and positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw. It can be fixed firmly to (body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into a very thin U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing on the front and back sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projections 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be the fixing structure) project from the side surface 1001 a not in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure protrudes from the side surface 1001 b in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605 The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed dense.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left and right direction at the upper part, middle part and lower part of both side faces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with sliding levers 1040 for door frame and By inserting a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking the main frame sliding gutter 1050, the door frame sliding gutter 1040 and the main frame sliding gutter 1050 can be inserted into the U-shaped base 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), while the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at three places in the upper, middle and lower of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portion of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 respectively formed on the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 can be moved upward, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be moved downward.

  Furthermore, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the side wall portion 605 in the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed in the lower closed side surface and the open side main body frame base 600. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring engagement piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch portion 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001, which will be described in detail later, advances and retracts the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001 b below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected laterally from the front end, through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and an attachment hole 1013 formed on the lock attachment substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 with two screws 1012 An attachment hole 1014 is formed in the lower case, and a screw stop 1003 is formed in order to attach the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion longitudinal opening 1020 in which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud preventing member 1032 upward, and a relief lateral hole 1022 for forming a relief hole so as not to disturb the movement of the connecting pin 1034; Is equipped.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for mounting to the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed into a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 engaged with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 at the time of rotation, The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 when it is rotated.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted from the rear side into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and then mounting holes 1013 formed at two upper and lower positions of the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the above.

  The tamperproof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire, a wire, etc. To prevent lowering of the The fraud preventing members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is a vertically long plate-like member and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper resistant member 1023 is the highest through the swinging shaft hole 1025 together with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is opened longitudinally at a position overlapping the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the plate-like surface, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. Provided with the projecting piece insertion hole 1026. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 to slide the door frame sliding wedge 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The second engaging protrusion 1018 is engaged with the second engaging protrusion 1018. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely to be able to abut the rear surface side of the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates on the outer side of the front upper side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026. Provided with the inclined portion 1024, and the inclined portion 1024 abuts on the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 101B, it swings (clockwise in FIG. 101B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer lower side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and a position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. A downward projecting restriction protrusion 1031 and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 which are vertically penetrated in the left and right direction on the front side of the restriction protrusion 1031 are provided. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is engaged with and engaged with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 when the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is locked. Thus, the main frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding improperly. In addition, the control projection 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035 so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first tamper resistant member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud protective member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first anti-corrosion member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 by being engaged with the horizontal opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. It is possible to Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "-" shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 at its upper end, and a spring engagement hole 1036 at its upper other end. And are provided with abutments 1037 at their lower ends. The second fraud prevention member 1032 may be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be rotatable relative to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second tampering prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Furthermore, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutment portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001, and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a door frame hook portion 1041 that protrudes forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, it protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 67 and 72, etc.) formed in the main body frame base 600. The hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5 can be locked. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging hook shape as shown in the figure, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the door frame sliding lever 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  In addition, the sliding frame for door frame 1040 is provided at the bottom of the longitudinally long rivet long hole 1042 which is drilled at the center of the side in the upper, middle and lower and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted and the bottom of the rivet long hole 1042 at the top The lower end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide projection 1043 which protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding door 1040 for a door frame. The rivet long hole 1042 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is configured such that a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is a door frame sliding It is formed to be vertically long so as not to disturb the lifting operation of the crucible 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 passing through the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 is in contact with the upper end portion. In the door frame sliding wedge 1040, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050. The sliding movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed at its upper end with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The wedges 1040 are biased downward, and the main frame sliding wedges 1050 are biased upward, respectively. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 by press molding It is formed in a convex shape. The abutting elastic piece 1047 abuts against the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to suppress rattling of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is supposed to be.

  Furthermore, the sliding door for a door frame 1040 is provided with a vertically-long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 does not interfere with the rotational movement of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, and the tip end of the first engagement projection 1017 The unit constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the raising engagement hole 1045 causes the sliding rim 1040 for the door frame to ascend by the turning operation of the engagement cam 1016. To engage. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction at the lower part of the lower side of the vertical side in the vertical direction. In the escape notch portion 1049, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 reliably engages with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066. In order not to do so, the relevant part is cut off.

  On the other hand, the main frame sliding weir 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire weir 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052; Is equipped. In other words, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is not constituted by one metal longitudinal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by a press, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connection wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 A protrusion moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left and right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055; a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a front longitudinal side of the protrusion moving hole 1056; And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper inside of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward.

  The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the guide projecting piece 1043 on the upper side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to be engaged with the other end of the spring 1048. Further, the upper end of the connecting wire wedge 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051. Furthermore, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding action of the upper hook member 1051 It can slide smoothly without rattling.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is for a rivet which penetrates in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the upper end of the hook portion 1065 projecting backward from the lower end and the plate surface of the lower hook member 1052 A long hole 1061, a downward engaging hole 1062 disposed below the long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a downward direction of the idle hole 1063 A protrusion moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connection hole 1060 bored on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower lower side of the rear side of the lower hook member 1052. It has a joint portion 1066 and an abutting portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward. Further, the rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and the rivet long hole 1061 is riveted In a normal state where the through hole 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating through the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. Thus, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  In addition, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. To engage. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 does not interfere with the pivoting operation of the second engagement protrusion 1018. The tip of the can form a movable space. In addition, the guide piece 1043 under the sliding door 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the moving part 1042 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main frame are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the torso 1050.

  In addition, the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when being stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can slide smoothly without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are connected by the connecting wire ridge 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Insert the piece 1043 into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 and align and overlap the rivet long holes 1042 and the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 with each other. For the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main body frame, while making the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 pass through the hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005 .

  When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swinging shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud preventing member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. In addition, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is a pin hole. It is necessary to further insert a guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after fixing it to the opening 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the body frame sliding wedge 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door The frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are biased in opposite directions from each other, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud The member 1032 is in contact with the restriction projection 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024 and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip end of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  As described above, in order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting it, the hooking protrusion 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the body frame base 600 and moved upward, and the screwing portion 1003 projecting horizontally in that state is moved in that state. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. The screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001 b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001 b is formed.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. As shown in FIG. 100, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. Of the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the door frame 5 in which the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding frame 1050 for the main frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement projection piece 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and connect it The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descended. Thereby, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is released, and the main frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the main frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054, 1065 are in a state of being lifted by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as shown in FIG. 100A). Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the closing plates 24 and 25 are forcedly pressed against the outer frame 2. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are engaged again with the closing plates 24, 25 and the main frame sliding The wedge 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the two-engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding door 1040 for the door frame against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and raises it. Therefore, since the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 are released from the locked state, the door frame 5 can be released by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same position as shown in FIG. 100A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The sliding lid 1040 for the door frame ascends upward by coming into contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again The pivot 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding weir 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the side surface of the main body frame 3 in the longitudinal direction. A door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and which is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three places of an upper end portion, a central portion and a lower end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the entire length of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the vertical direction, and forcefully open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert illegal equipment such as a piano wire from the interval. I can not do the act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 5 of the present embodiment unlocks the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, The locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released by rotating. In addition, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent action such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering the same. Can not be The first of the structures for preventing such fraudulent action is a lock mechanism constituted by the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the sliding door 1050 for the main frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut It is in a state of In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 causes the first fraud prevention member 1023 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the stopper piece 1027 intrudes into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch An engagement notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame slide lever 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked to the main frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to unfairly pull down (unlock) and it is not possible to conduct an unfair act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and unlocking the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is pivoted to penetrate into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a pivot shaft hole. The rotation of the stopper piece portion 1027 starts to move in the clockwise direction in the drawing around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 is also moved so as to withdraw from the tamper-proof notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017 as well, the leading end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 is released to the outer frame 2. It can be done.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the control projection 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. 101 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 from being performed illegally, the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to cheat the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can not be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to invalidate the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, in the case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is incapacitated by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided in the housing are completely covered by being enclosed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. Since it is in the state, even if it is attempted to pull down the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire etc., both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Prevents unauthorized devices from entering the enclosed space, making it a structure that can not be easily tampered with.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide frame 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001 which is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The attachment position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for operating the lock device 1000 with the main frame slide lever 1050 slidably set to a position below the lower edge of the game board 4 Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and the up and down direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the body frame 3 is made large, It can be installed.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 faces the back surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. It is possible not to easily carry out an unauthorized action such as pulling a piano wire or the like and pulling down the main frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside.

  Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621. The structure is such that the positioning and locking is performed and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the upper, middle and lower of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with the above structure.

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is screwed to the screw mounting portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3. The structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, but instead of this, the tip of the screw 1012 is attached using a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole screwed by penetrating the piece 1008 in the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, the locking device 1000 can be used as the main body frame 3 (the main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625 without screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001). It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this embodiment, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A door frame sliding wedge 1040 and a main frame sliding wedge 1050 are provided in a closed space formed by an L-shaped base (lock base) and the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the peripheral wall portion 605. It is good also as a structure stored, and the same operation effect as lock device 1000 mentioned above can be produced.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the transparent award ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710 a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the award ball base 710 On the back wall of the prize ball base 710, the prize ball tank 720 for storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side of the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the gaming balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of 710 b and a gaming ball discharged from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 on the basis of a predetermined payout instruction. It has a partially transparent prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side of the 710b and a side part 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 with a tank rail unit 730 and a prize ball device 74. And the transparent back cover 900 disposed substantially in the same plane as the rear face of the game board, the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized, and the rear side of the game board 4 can be inspected (visually inspected) easily without opening the back cover 900 covering the rear side of the game board 4 It can be a pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, since the rear side of the game board 4 as well as the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent award ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When you remove the game board 4 from the front to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, etc. It is easy to find out from and can prevent the occurrence of any failure due to the residue.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, an unauthorized device, tool, etc. for performing cheating on the rear side or the side of the game board 4 are attached Even if it has been, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted, and it is also possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to make the installation of an unauthorized device or the like hesitate, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  In addition, since the back side of the game board 4 is covered with the award ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed may contact the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side of the game board, and to maintain the gaming board 4 in a good state and to suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the award ball tank 720 is positioned approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is approximately half the depth of the main body frame 3, so the rear side and rear side of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. In addition, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to make a flat shape. The mounting operation can be facilitated by attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Furthermore, the rear surface (main body 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made substantially flat, and it is possible to catch or abut on other members in the installed island equipment by eliminating the protrusion to the rear. It can prevent and it can prevent that a failure generate | occur | produces. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when transporting the pachinko machine 1, a buffer material with a simple shape can be used, and the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Also, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 etc. The rear side of 4 and the like can be further easily viewed, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900 and the like. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, or the member such as the synthetic resin is deformed or the occurrence of a problem is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball can not pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the game ball from intruding into the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to the intrusion of the game ball.

[1-4. Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 111. FIG. FIG. 102 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 103 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the back FIG. Further, FIG. 106 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on the game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine, and FIG. 106 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  Further, FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the gaming panel according to an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 etc. and seen from the front, and FIG. 108 is a gaming viewed from the rear of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 107 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using a front component member of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 etc. and seen from the front, and FIG. 111 is a gaming board showing FIG. FIG.

  The gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, is a front configuration in which the outer circumference of the gaming area 1100 where the gaming ball is struck by the player operating the handle device 500 is partitioned and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 disposed on the rear side of the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 disposed on the rear lower portion of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160 And a main control board box 1170 for containing a main control board 4100 for controlling a game content to be played by putting a game ball into the game area 1100 and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game situation and visibly attached to the player at a predetermined position of the front component 1110; To have. Although this gaming board 4 is not illustrated in FIGS. 102 to 109 and will be described in detail later, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1150 It is further provided (see FIGS. 114 to 120 and the like).

  The basic configuration of the game board 4 of this embodiment is formed by the front component 1110, the game panel 1150, the substrate holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

1-4A. Front component]
Subsequently, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front and rear direction in a substantially circular shape The inner periphery of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 1100. The front component 1110 is an outer rail 1111 extending in a circular arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower end toward the left from the center in the lateral direction in front view, and extending to the upper right corner passing the upper end in the lateral direction in the front view. The inner rail 1112 is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction to the upper left diagonal upper portion, and smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 Inner circumferential rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in a front view, the end (upper end) of inner circumferential rail 1113 and outer rail 1111 A stop 1114 that allows the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 to connect with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 and the inner rail 1113 And is rotatably supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and closed between the outer rail 1111. Thus, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where it is pivoted in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front and opened between the outer rail 1111 A backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  In this front component 1110, when the game board 4 is attached to the main frame 3, as shown in FIG. 102 etc., the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 An extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650 is located. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 is Over the space, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball inserted between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls up along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 By turning the opening position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter into the game area 1100.

  In addition, when the game ball is hit hard in the ball firing device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 abuts on the stopper 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the gaming ball can be compulsorily changed by bringing the gaming ball into contact with the stopper 1114, and the gaming ball is continuously rotated from the outer rail 1111 to the inner circumferential rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (entered into) the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 is returned to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents backflow of the gaming balls.

  In addition, when the game balls driven into the game area 1100 are not accepted by the start ports 2101 and 2102 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the front unit 2000 described later, they flow to the lower end of the game area 1100. Are guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 and discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower side of the back of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher 650 can not enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the end of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the roll of the space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is performed. It falls and is received by the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the far space 626 and discharged to the lower tray 302 in the pan unit 300.

  A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the gaming ball is enhanced and the gaming ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, elastic members such as rubber and synthetic resin are arranged on the surface of the stopper 1114, and even if the game balls roll vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and make a collision, the shock is mitigated. As well as being able to repel the gaming ball inward.

  In addition, the front component 1110 has a wall-like security projection 1117 projecting forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-out guide surface 1115 A groove-like rail security groove 1118 is provided which extends up to the front end and is recessed by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps vertically with the crime prevention rear end projection 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5. Therefore, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can be made to reach the game area 1100. Can not be

  Further, in the front component 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the protrusion 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. To be inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so that the protrusion 182 after crime prevention substantially contacts the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even with the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, illegal equipment such as a piano wire which is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the front component 1110 is vertically spaced at the left end in the front view and recessed from the front to the rear and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened at the left end, and spaced apart in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view A pair of game board fasteners 1120 arranged in a row, a fixed recess 1121 disposed on the left side in front view from the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward and having an upper side formed in an arc and recessed from the front side; In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a rectangular-shaped notched ball passage cutout portion 1122 which extends in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is engaged with the positioning member 956 attached to the inner side of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the front end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 However, it is possible to regulate movement in the back and forth direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably engaged with the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be used as a game board By locking the locking portion 608, the front end right end of the gaming board 4 inserted into the gaming board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Also, with the fixed recess 1121 of the front component 1110 inserted in the gaming board holding port 601 of the main frame 3, the gaming board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front of the main frame 3 can be viewed from the front When turned clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It is supposed to be. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152.

  Furthermore, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front and rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion and a thickness in the front and rear direction from the center in the left and right direction at the lower side of the through hole 1123 A fastening portion 1124 thinly formed, and a stamped paper sticking portion 1125 which is disposed on the left side in a front view of the through hole 1123 and to which a certificate stamp for certification confirmation is stuck. Although the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 is not shown in detail, when the game board is attached to the previous main frame, a predetermined fastening band is fixed to the fastening hole formed in the previous main frame. The game board 4 can be made difficult to remove by winding and fastening each other, and unauthorized removal of the game board 4 can be prevented.

  Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the lower right of the front view on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner circumferential rail 1113. The front component 1110 also includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 that project rearward from left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 that project rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixing boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and screws a predetermined screw from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixing boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126. By being worn, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning projection 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting it to the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[1-4 B. Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower center of the front view in the left and right direction. And a ball passage notch 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the lower right corner in a front view And an insertion hole 1153 into which the 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower part and the positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed And a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed downward from the rear surface by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side of the plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and the out port 1151 (see FIG. 105) And a notch 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component 1110 and which penetrates in the front-rear direction from the right end of the front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example is capable of partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110, and within the range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a table unit 2000 is attached. In addition, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, the gaming panel 1150 is formed such that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-out guide surface 1115 is made to enter the out-port 1151 and be discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall is an out-ball The game ball which is formed to be lower toward the discharge unit 1161 and is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160 is The ball is discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned immediately above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3. The game balls discharged from the above are all discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the substrate unit 800.

  Further, the substrate holder 1160 is provided with a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 projecting forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are adapted to be fitted with the rear end of the mounting boss 1126 of the front component 1110 after the tip is inserted into the boss insertion hole 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1150 With the boss 1126 fitted, the inside of the fixing boss 1162 is penetrated from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126, whereby the substrate holder 1160 with respect to the front component 1110 is It can be assembled, and the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion capable of fitting the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 from the side at the left end portion of the rear surface in the rear wall in a rear view. An elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 disposed so as to face the portion 1163; and a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 by the fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Subsequently, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control substrate box 1170 is a thin horizontal box-shaped substrate base 1171 open on the rear side, and a thin horizontal box-like shape covering the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 open on the front side and fitted into the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. And a main control substrate 4100 having electronic components, terminals, and the like mounted on the rear side of the front end of the substrate cover 1172. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the substrate base 1171 in a rear view, and a fixing piece 1174 which fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the substrate holder 1160, and the right end of the substrate cover 1172 from a rear view. And a resilient fixing piece that is resiliently engaged with a locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 that protrudes rearward.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end portion of the rear view two at a time, with the elastic fixing piece 1175 interposed therebetween, sealing the opening and closing of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 Seal (not shown) which is applied across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower end of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the sealed seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control substrate box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the delivery control substrate box 860 in the substrate unit 800, and caulking fixation is performed on any one of the four sealing portions 1176. It is done. In order to separate the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, the main control substrate box 1170 needs to cut the caulked fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the trace of the opening and closing of the main control substrate box 1170 remains. It has become. Thus, whether or not the main control board box 1170 is improperly opened can be clearly determined visually from the outside.

  In addition, since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed three times. Further, in the main control substrate box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or replaced with an incorrect main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even if it can be confirmed visually from the outside, it can be prevented that those fraudulent acts are performed.

  Further, the main control board box 1170 is provided with an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. The various connection terminals and the like for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010 and the payout control board 4110 and the like are to be exposed to the rear side. Note that by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the main control input circuit 4100 f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 or the sealing seal is cleverly worked, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed except by visual inspection, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance It can be done.

[1-4 E. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component 1110, and the display unit 1181 is disposed on the front of the front component 1110 so as to be visible from the player side, and the front component 1110. And a rear protrusion 1182 protruding rearward than the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 106A, the game state changed by the game balls driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in front view Play status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 to display the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 For the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, and the first special symbol lottery result which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 and received by the game ball to the first starting port 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the special lottery result) as the first special symbol, and the upper right of the first special symbol display 1185 A second consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special symbol lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol arranged and received by receiving the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 The second special symbol for displaying the number of reservations regarding the reception of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 comprising a special symbol display 1186 and two LEDs lined up and down on the right of the second special symbol display 1186 And a memory display 1187. In addition, the lottery performed based on the reception of the game ball to the first start opening 2101 or the second start opening 2102 is different from the jackpot lottery seen in the conventional pachinko machine, and the precondition for executing the jackpot game Is a lottery that determines whether to activate the condition device. Therefore, even if the lottery is won, only the condition device is activated, and the jackpot game is not executed with only this as in the conventional pachinko machine.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc substantially along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from immediately above the second special symbol display 1186, and the number of reservations regarding passage of the gate unit 2301 by the game ball is An ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188 consisting of four LEDs for display and an ordinary lottery result arranged by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2301 arranged under the ordinary symbol storage indicator are displayed as an ordinary symbol For the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED to do, and the normal special symbol storage indicator 1188 are arranged side by side obliquely to the upper right side, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result Round indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 at the time of It is provided with a 190, a.

  The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and the light emission color to be emitted and the on / off blink By the combination, various gaming states (for example, probability fluctuation state, time shortening state, probability variation time short state, jackpot gaming state, etc.) can be displayed.

  In addition, when the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185, the gaming ball is received in the first starting opening 2101 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the first special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of reservations can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b Lights together, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the number of first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both when the number of reservations is four It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, when the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, the gaming ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the second special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of reservations can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b Turns on together, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a flashes and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights when the number of reservations is three, and when the number of reservations is four, both the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Furthermore, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, the first special lottery The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and after the 7 segment LED fluctuates for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, it stops after the change and the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7 segment LED The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  The normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and is a combination of the light emission color to be emitted and the light on / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display an ordinary lottery result which is drawn by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2301. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being variably displayed for a predetermined time as in the special symbol.

  Further, when the gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2301 when the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the normal symbol in the normal symbol indicator 1189, the start of the variation display is suspended It is to display the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the stored standard symbols. This ordinary symbol memory display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holdings. The number of reserved symbols can normally be displayed by sequentially turning on 1188 d. In the present example, up to four variable symbols of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes round indicator lamps 1190a and 1190b consisting of predetermined LEDs, and lighting of these indicator lamps can indicate the number of rounds in the "big hit" game. It is supposed to be.

  As shown in FIG. 106A, the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1 It has become. In addition, the game state indicator 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the ordinary symbol memory The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 147). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared to the case where it is provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as a basic configuration of the game board 4, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 which can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and which can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. In order for the store clerks in the hall to be able to recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without confusion You have me.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 106 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by seven-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol memory display 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  Since the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are composed of eight LED groups in addition to the same function and effect as described above can be achieved by the function display unit 1180 as well. It is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case of using the segment LED. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are hard to understand, it is possible to prevent the display on the function display unit 1180 from being concerned during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game, the movement of the game ball, The game can be made more enjoyable by concentrating on movable effects, effect images and the like.

1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from the game panel 1150 in the above-described game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. The front component 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 107 to 109 have the same configuration as those described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted here. The game panel 1200 of this embodiment is thinner than the above-described game panel 1150, and has a plate shape capable of dividing the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is divided by the front component 1110, according to the outer shape of the front component 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110 and detachably holding the panel plate 1210 from the front side.

  The panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. It is formed. The thickness of this panel board 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail G is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of circular holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left part and penetrating in the front-rear direction and vertically. Is equipped. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are disposed outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement steps 1213 having a front side recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step 1213 is cut out to about half of the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 in the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000 such as the attachment unit 2100 or the center character 2500 etc. The attachment unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed from the front side (see FIG. 119 and the like).

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the gaming panel 1150 made of wood described above (in this example, about 20 mm) and made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). In the panel holder 1220, a holding step 1221 detachably holding a panel plate 1210 and recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a size substantially equal to that of the game area 1100 inside the holding step 1221 It mainly comprises a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

  The depth of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210 from the front surface, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220 It becomes almost the same plane as. Further, the front inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. By this clearance, even if the panel board 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to a temperature change and a temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. The clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of projecting pins 1223 which can be extended and fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engagement claw 1224 and an engagement piece 1225 which engage with the engagement step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claws 1224 are disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, correspond to the upper engaging step 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and extend from the front of the holding step 1221 to the front. It protrudes toward and resiliently engages with the engagement step 1213. The engagement claw 1224 is sized such that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is disposed in the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is between the front surface of the holding step 1221 and the panel In a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement step 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed, the plate 1210 is configured to extend a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held on the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component 1110 can be inserted. The boss insertion hole 1226 is a mounting boss of the front component 1110 By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 in a form recessed on the front side by a predetermined amount so as to leave an outer peripheral edge lower than the center slightly below in the vertical direction. ing. The rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end by a predetermined range from the lower end by the attachment support portion 1227 so that the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface protrudes rearward, and the amount Depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) which can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3010 c (see FIG. 141 etc.) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the mounting support 1227 And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3010 c can be prevented from projecting rearward beyond the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, ie, the game board 4, can be used as the main unit frame 3. It can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601 of (pachinko machine 1).

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 which are disposed in the rear side of the mounting support 1227 and above the housing recess 630h and into which predetermined screws can be screwed. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be attached and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure, projecting forward from a fixing portion 3010 c formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3010). Is omitted)) is inserted. In the present example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in a rear view.

  An attachment hole of an appropriate diameter according to the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be attached and fixed such that the inner diameter of the hole is a mixture of a large diameter and a small diameter with respect to the attachment hole 1228 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portion 1230 It has become. As shown in FIG. 107, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed within a predetermined range from the lower end of the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height from the front side of the housing recess 630h. In this case, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the back surface of the front component 1110 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the gaming ball is fired from the bat firing device 650 But they are guided smoothly. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that the mounting hole 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. The box-like rib is formed for the purpose of

  The panel holder 1220 is provided with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and the game panel 1150 is held by the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set in the state of In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front and back direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 of the front component 1110 And a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180 inserted in the front-rear direction through the lower right corner in front view And an insertion hole 1234.

  Also, the panel holder 1220 is a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 108) which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and the lower end side is opened downward; A notch 1236 is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and is cut away so as to penetrate from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharging groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed on the main body frame 3 (upper surface of the game board placement portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to be fitted with the provided positioning projection 607, and by the out ball discharging groove 1235 being fitted with the positioning projection 607, the game board 4 is moved relative to the main frame 3 in the left and right direction. It is supposed to be regulated.

  In the game panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224 and the engagement piece 1225 engage with the engagement step portion 1213. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 become substantially flush, and a conventionally used obstacle nail planting The panel plate 1210 can be set in the conventional obstacle nail implanting apparatus while holding the panel plate 1210 in the panel holder 1220 without remodeling the installation apparatus, and the cost for implanting the obstacle nail G increases. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, although the game panel 1200 of this example is not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. And the front unit 2000 can be attached. In addition, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, in the thin panel board 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that the panel board 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 is configured to be divided by the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, an increase in weight of the entire gaming panel 1200 can be suppressed even when the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, and a transparent panel The pachinko machine 1 which can be seen by the player from the rear side of the game area 1100 can be embodied through the board 1210, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel board 1210 whose position such as the obstacle nail or the winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part The panel holder 1220 can be a common part, and by replacing only the panel plate 1210, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with the game board 4 compatible with various models.

  Further, since a plurality of mounting holes 1228 are provided in advance in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 and the like mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 The panel holder 1220 can be a common part of the pachinko machine 1 which does not depend on the model by designing the fixing portions of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228 even if they are at different positions. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of front component member]
Next, a front component 1110A different from the front component 1110 in the above-described game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the game panel 1200, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 110 and 112, the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 are the embodiments of FIGS. The configuration is the same as that of the example shown in FIGS. 107 to 109 except for the difference.

  The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 is different from the above-described front component 1110 in that it has a function display unit 1180 in addition to a part of the inner circumferential shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The points are very different. The other configuration is the same as that of the front component 1110, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description will be omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit Prepared for 2000).

  As shown in the figure, the front component 1110A has a frame-like inner circumferential shape extending clockwise in a front view from the out-out guide surface 1115 up to the stop 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed in the same shape as the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the shape from the stopper 1114 to the out-port guiding surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component 1110 ing. More specifically, the section from the stopper 1114 to a position immediately above the right sticker sheet sticking portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stopper 1114 is formed in a gentle arc, and from the lower end of the arc to the outlet. It is formed in the shape of a straight line inclined so that the distance up to the guiding surface 1115 is lower toward the out-port guiding surface 1115.

  The front component 1110A of this example can secure the game area 1100 more widely as compared with the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the player can be more entertained by the wide game area 1100. It can be done.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 112 and FIG. FIG. 112 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the gaming board accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 112, the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a side surface on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin in the door frame 5. As shown in FIG.

  As described above, the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and the dimension in the vertical direction is substantially the same as the dimension in the vertical direction of the main body frame base 600 In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. The side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction and extends in the front and rear direction. A plate-like side piece 952a which forms the side of the main body frame 3 and a front end which extends inward (open side) from the front end of the side piece 952a. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the side security plate 950 is formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section opening inward (open side) by the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c.

  The side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d disposed in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side piece 952a. It is enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 and the like well.

  On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, etc. In the outer side of the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the support side, a support U-shaped protruding piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (the support side) is provided. In the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced by the axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is less likely to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, the door frame 5 is mounted and supported only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main frame 3 and the main frame 3, the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main frame 3 becomes large. There is a risk of fraud. On the other hand, in the crime prevention structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950 A rear-side piece of the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is axially supported. It is in a state of being sandwiched by the side U-shaped projecting pieces 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcedly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotally U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 abuts on the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 from moving away from the main body frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being broken open. It is possible to prevent the fraudulent action such as opening the door frame 5 against 3 being performed.

  Further, since the side crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the side crime prevention plate 950 extends rearward than the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is tentatively assumed. Even if is destroyed, illegal tools such as a piano wire can not penetrate into the game area 1100 on the front of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and cheating is performed. Can be reliably prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 112, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact so as to cover the outside of the side crime prevention plate 950, it is a pachinko machine 1 having a rigid side, from the side It is possible to sufficiently fight against the vandalism of Also, in general, in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1. From the (front) side, it is almost impossible to allow the unauthorized tool to enter behind the rear end of the middle piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, a prize ball base 710, a tank rail 731 and a prize ball device 740 in the main frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 can be used as the rear or side of the game board 4 housed in the main frame 3. It is possible to visually recognize from the rear side of the main body frame 3 without removing it from the main body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found, and it can be prevented that an illegal act is performed. In addition, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to make the installation of the unauthorized device fooling, and it becomes possible to increase the deterrence against fraud. ing.

  Further, since the rear side and the side of the game board 4 can be viewed through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. from the rear side of the main body frame 3, the main body frame for maintenance or model change. When you remove the game board 4 against 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt, etc. remain between the main unit frame 3 and the game board 4, those should be outside. As a result, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine, FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the game board viewed obliquely from the front right, and FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left diagonally Is a perspective view of the game board viewed obliquely from the lower left front. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear FIG.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and the game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110A for partitioning and forming the inner periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven, and a rear of the front component 1110A are attached to close the game area 1100 and have a predetermined shape corresponding to the game area 1100 A plate-shaped game panel 1200 having a plurality of openings 1215 (see FIG. 119 and the like) penetrating in the front-rear direction and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 is provided.

  The game panel 1200 of this example is a plate that can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110A, and a transparent panel plate 1210 formed smaller than the front component 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110A and detachably holding the panel plate 1210 from the front side. The opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  In addition, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached from the front to the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200, a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front end left end of the back unit 3000 And a function display unit 1180 disposed at a position where it can be viewed from the player side through the transparent panel board 1210 and can be viewed from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko machine 1 The liquid crystal display device 1900 attached to the back side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side and having a display screen (display area) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and covering the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the back side Substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1200 and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 Includes a main control board box 1170 attached, a.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of this example is an attacker unit 2100 arranged to extend right from the top of the out port 1151 in the lower part of the game area 1100 and a game area 1100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. Front side unit 2200 arranged along the inner circumference of the game machine, a gate unit 2300 arranged slightly higher than the center in the vertical direction near the left end in the front view in the game area 1100, and And a frame-shaped center piece 2500 disposed in the central portion.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the back side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220) and the front side is opened and the opening which penetrates the back wall 3010a in the front and back direction where the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces. A back box 3010 in which a 3010 b is formed, a back front decoration unit 3100 disposed near the front end in the back box 3010, a back up rendering unit 3200 disposed above the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010, and a back box A lower back rendering unit 3400 disposed below the opening 3010 b within the 3010, and a lower right back corner disposed between the lower back rendering unit 3400 and the back front decoration unit 3100 in the front right lower corner of the back box 3010 A presentation unit 3600 is mainly provided. The back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position where it can be viewed from the player side through the transparent panel board 1210.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board that accommodates a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 188) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 will be described later in detail. A box 1910 is provided.

  In the gaming board 4 of this embodiment, the gaming area 1100 is divided into right and left by the center role 2500 attached to the game panel 1200, and the outer periphery of the right side of the center role 2500 and the outer periphery of the gaming area 1100 Between (the inner periphery of the front component 1110A) and a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer periphery of the left side of the center role 2500 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 (front component 1110A Between the inner circumference of the game area and the front side of the panel board 1210 in the area on the left side of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100. Not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

  In the game board 4 of this example, when the game ball is hit to the right of the center character 2500 (is hit with a strength higher than a predetermined strength), this game ball is upstream of the stop portion 1114 of the front component 1110A. It is sent from the side to the receiving space 2530 by the receiving entry passage 2545 of the center product 2500 and is guided basically to the right route in the receiving space 2530 by the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550. Then, after rolling the right side route in this way, after being discharged from the discharge port 2534, it is guided by the guide passage 2540 and is released into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2541 opened on the upstream side of the big winning hole 2103 It is designed to be refluxed and released.

  However, although it will be described later, the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550 performs a periodic operation such that a specific timing for failing to guide the gaming ball to the right route in the receiving space 2530 is regularly visited. . And although this will be described later, when the game ball rolls on the left route in the receiving space 2530, game control different from that in the case of rolling the right route in the receiving space 2530 is executed. ing. The gaming balls that are to roll on the right route are discharged from the discharge port 2534 and guided by the guide passage 2540 from the discharge port 2541 opened on the upstream side of the winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. It is returned and released into the game area 1100. The game balls that are to roll on the left route are returned / discharged into the game area 1100 from the left gate passage ball discharge passage 3650 described later. Therefore, according to such a receiving unit 2550, as long as the gaming ball passes through the receiving space 2530, it is received with high probability to the large winning opening 2103 in the open state regardless of the rolling route in the inside ( It will be possible to win).

  In the game board 4 of this example, when the game ball is hit to the left side of the center character 2500, the game ball is made of the gate unit 2300, the front side unit 2200 and the attack unit 2100 by a plurality of obstacle nails placed It is guided in the direction, or enters the warp inlet 2504 halfway and is discharged right above the first starting opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 via the stage 2510, and the gate 2301, general winning opening 2104, 2201, It is possible to win in the starting openings 2101 and 2102, the large winning opening 2103 and the like, and it is possible to enjoy the pachinko machine 1 original game by the movement of the game ball.

  That is, in the game area on the right side of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100, movement of the game ball in the receiving space 2530, easy acceptance to the big winning opening 2103, etc. without contacting the obstacle nail. While it can be entertained, in the game area on the left side of the center character 2500, bouncing by the obstacle nail can entertain the movement of the game ball with a sense of movement, and the player feels like or feels like it The game ball can be hit and operated along a favorite route according to the skill etc. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being hit or moving monotonously and to make it hard to get bored. It is supposed to be.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged to extend right from the top of the out port 1151 to the right at the lower center of the game area 1100 and is supported by the front of the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210). The front side unit 2200 disposed on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and extending in an arc substantially along the inner circumference of the game area 1100, and near the left end in the game area 1100 above the left end of the front side unit 2200 A gate unit 2300 disposed at a position slightly above the center in the vertical direction, and a frame shape disposed from the approximate center of the game area 1100 to the right of the game area and supported by the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210) The center character 2500 is provided.

  The details of the attacker unit 2100 in the table unit 2000 will be described later, but the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102 are selected according to the special lottery result, in which a predetermined special lottery result is drawn upon receiving the game ball. It has a large winning opening 2103 capable of receiving game balls, and a general winning opening 2104 capable of always receiving game balls. In this example, the second starting port 2102 is disposed immediately below the first starting port 2101, and the lower second starting port 2102 is normally incapable of receiving gaming balls, and the gate unit in the gate unit 2300 It is considered as a variable winning opening that allows the game ball to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn on the occasion of the passage of the game ball in 2301. The special winning opening 2103 is disposed on the right side of the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 in a front view, and the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 and the special winning opening 2103 are mutually left and right. The central axes of the directions are arranged at different positions.

  The front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is disposed at the upper left than the two general winning openings 2201 disposed on the left of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2201, and flows down from above. The racks 2202 and 2203 are provided to guide the game ball to the right.

  The gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the left side of the center part 2500 above the front side unit 2200 and is attached to the front surface of the transparent panel plate 1210, which will be described in detail later. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate unit 2301 having a size that allows only one game ball to pass therethrough, and the gate unit 2301 is provided with a gate sensor 2302 for detecting passage of the game ball.

  Furthermore, the center character 2500 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a large opening 1215 formed substantially at the center of the panel plate 1210 and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side. Is formed in a frame shape having a window 2501 that can be viewed from the player side. In this center role 2500, a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502 in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210) and a game ball flowing down the inside of the game area 1100 are prevented from entering the frame. A circumferential wall 2503, a warp inlet 2504 opened at a predetermined position of the circumferential wall 2503, a warp outlet 2505 for releasing game balls entering the warp inlet 2504 into a frame, and a gaming ball released from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction And a stage 2510 for releasing the ball into the game area 1100 and returning it to the game area 1100 after rolling. The stage 2510 of the center character 2500 is disposed immediately above the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100, and the gaming ball returned from the stage 2510 into the gaming area 1100 has a high probability of being attached It can be received into the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 of the unit 2100.

  Further, the center character 2500 is provided with a receiving unit 2550 formed to receive all of the game balls flowing down along the peripheral wall 2503 in the upper part on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction in front view .

  The receiving unit 2550 includes a receiving space 2530 for receiving the game ball, a movable valve 2551 for guiding the game ball basically to the right route in the receiving space 2530, and the movable valve 2551 in the receiving space 2530. The game ball rolls on the left route in the receiving space 2530 by the gate 2575 (right gate 2575R) through which the game ball guided to the right route of the gate can pass and the movable valve 2551 fails to guide to the right route. Route detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580L, which can detect whether the game ball has passed through gate 2575 (left gate 2575L) which can be passed when the game ball is passed and which gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) And 2580R).

  Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a jackpot game is not started just by being won by a jackpot, and a route is required to start the jackpot game. To either of two gates 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) in the receiving space 2530 under control of detection by the detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580R). At least passage of gaming balls is required. In addition, when passing through the left gate 2575L, the passage of the gaming ball to the jackpot determination gate 3660 (see FIG. 181) is further required for the jackpot game to be started.

  Further, although this will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if the game ball is merely shot toward the game area 1100 by the above-described movement by the movable valve 2551 or the like, those gates Among the gates 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R), although the probability that the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R is higher than that of the left gate 2575L, those gates 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) The processing at the time of winning of the jackpot is made to proceed so that the jackpot form described later differs depending on which one of the game balls has passed.

  However, as described above, although the movable valve 2551 according to this embodiment is basically provided to guide the game ball to the right route (right gate 2575R) in the receiving space 2530. Perform a periodic operation so that the specific timing at which the game ball is likely to be guided to the left route (left gate 2575L) is more regularly visited than the right route (right gate 2575R) in the receiving space 2530 It has become a thing. Therefore, if the firing timing of the gaming ball is adjusted in relation to the specific timing periodically visited, the probability that the gaming ball is induced to the left route (left gate 2575L) in the receiving space 2530 is within a certain range Although it is possible to adjust within, this point will be described later.

  In addition, the center character 2500 has a guide passage 2540 for guiding the gaming ball having passed through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) of the receiving unit 2550 to the center side in the horizontal direction at a position lower than the stage 2510 A discharge port 2541 is provided for returning and releasing the game ball guided by the guide passage 2540 into the game area 1100 above the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. In such a configuration, gaming balls that have passed through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) in the receiving space 2530 can be received by the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 with high probability. .

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 123 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the front, FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 125 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the bottom rear. Further, FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the attached unit which is partially disassembled and seen afterward.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the gaming board 4 in the front unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 formed at the lower part in the center in the left-right direction of the panel board 1210 of the gaming panel 1200. It is fixed to the front of 1200 (panel board 1210). The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of receiving openings (prize openings) in which the game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, a first starting opening 2101 disposed immediately above the out opening 1151 of the game panel 1200 and capable of always receiving gaming balls, and a position between the first starting opening 2101 and the out opening 1151 and normally It is disposed at an intermediate height between the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 on the right side in a front view of the second starting opening 2102 and the second starting opening 2102 and the first starting opening 2101 incapable of receiving gaming balls. It is possible to receive the regular game ball disposed immediately above the large winning opening 2103 and between the large winning opening 2103 and the second starting opening 2102 which is normally a long rectangular shaped winning opening 2103 in which the gaming ball can not be received. And a general winning opening 2104.

  The first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward, and the gaming ball can always be accepted (winning). On the other hand, the second start port 2102 disposed immediately below the first start port 2101 is, as illustrated, a pair of blade-shaped movable pieces 2105 disposed substantially upright on the left and right sides of the second start port 2102. The space between the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2101 is closed, and the gaming ball can not be received by the second starting opening 2102 in the illustrated state (normal state).

  The lower end side of the pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second start port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 is rotatably supported at its lower end side, and the upper end side is pivoted in a direction away from each other to expand it. The game ball can be received into the second starting opening 2102. That is, the second start opening 2102 is a variable winning opening by the pair of movable pieces 2105. In this second start opening 2102, the pair of movable pieces 2105 opens and closes in accordance with the result of the normal lottery that is selected by the game ball passing through the gate of the gate unit 2300 and being detected by the gate sensor. It has become.

  Further, the winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the opening of the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. In the normal state, the large winning opening 2103 is closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing member 2106, as shown in the figure, and is opened and closed by the rotation of the opening / closing member 2106. The opening and closing member 2106 for opening and closing the special winning opening 2103 is pivotally supported pivotally about the substantially lower side, and in the substantially vertical state, the special winning opening 2103 can be closed and the game ball can not be received. At the same time, when the upper side pivots to move to the front side, the special winning opening 2103 can be opened to allow the game ball to be received. That is, the special winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening by the opening / closing member 2106.

  Furthermore, the two general winning openings 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 have substantially the same height as the second starting opening 2102 between the large winning opening 2103 and the second starting opening 2102 immediately above the center of the large winning opening 2103 in the left-right direction. , And are arranged with the upper side open.

  In this attacker unit 2100, the width in the left-right direction of the first starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 is slightly larger than the outline of the gaming ball, and the size (width) is such that the gaming ball can be received one by one. ing. In addition, the second start opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are rotated in the direction away from each other to expand three times the width of the game ball It is considered to be five times as wide. Further, the winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the opening / closing member 2106 is in the open state is five to eight times the width of the outer shape of the gaming ball. That is, in the state where the gaming balls can be received, the gaming balls are easily received in the order of the first starting opening 2101, the general winning opening 2104, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103.

  Furthermore, in the present example, the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 so as to close the opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200 and has a flat front end 2110. A first receiving member 2111 attached at a position where the first starting opening 2101 is disposed to form a first starting opening 2101 and opened at the upper side, and a position where the first receiving member 2111 in the base plate 2110 is attached (first starting A second receiving member 2112 attached to the lower side of the opening 2101 and rotatably supporting a pair of movable pieces 2105 and having a second starting opening 2102 and an open upper side and a rear side; A general receiving member 2113 attached at a position where the general winning opening 2104 in the second embodiment is disposed to form a general winning opening 2104 and having an upper side opened; It is provided.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 is disposed on the rear side of the base plate 2110 and supports the start port solenoid 2114 for opening and closing a pair of movable pieces 2105 for opening and closing the second start port 2102 and supports the start port solenoid 2114 to cover. A solenoid cover 2115 mounted on the rear side of the base plate 2110, and a starting opening decorative substrate 2116 held between the solenoid cover 2115 and the base plate 2110 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 126, the attacker unit 2100 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the large winning opening 2103 on the base plate 2110 and opens and closes the opening and closing member 2106 for opening and closing the large winning opening 2103 Unit case 2120, an attachment solenoid 2121 supported in the unit case 2120 for opening and closing the opening / closing member 2106, a count sensor 2122 for detecting a game ball received in the big winning opening 2103, and an upper portion of the unit case 2120 A general winning opening sensor 2123 which is supported by the main winning opening 2103 and detects the gaming ball received to the general winning opening 2104 and is mounted on the rear side of the base plate 2110 with the unit case 2120 covered from the rear side. Unit cover 2124 and behind unit cover 2124 A large winning opening decoration substrate 2125 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and an attacker unit relay substrate 2126 disposed on the rear side of the large winning opening decoration substrate 2125 and attached to the rear of the unit cover 2124 There is.

  The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape whose front surface extends in the left-right direction, and the surface is decorated with a shallow relief. In the base plate 2110, an opening 2110a penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the game ball can pass is formed at a position corresponding to the second start opening 2102 (see FIG. 123). In addition, the base plate 2110 is provided with a hook portion 2110 b extending rearward at a position corresponding to the first start opening 2101, and the gaming ball received by the first receiving member 2111 as the first start opening 2101. Can be delivered to the first passage 3122a of the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, via the guide path 2115a of the solenoid cover 2115. ing.

  As shown in the figure, the second receiving member 2112 of the attacker unit 2100 has translucency on the front face and is decorated with a predetermined character along the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The second receiving member 2112 has a pair of shaft portions extending rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at an interval wider than the left and right width of the opening 2110a in the base plate 2110, although detailed illustration is omitted. The movable piece 2105 can be rotatably supported by the shaft portion.

  Further, the general receiving member 2113 of the attacker unit 2100 is provided with a hook portion 2113 a for guiding the received gaming ball to the rear side of the panel board 1210.

  The start port solenoid 2114 of the attacker unit 2100 has a plunger which can be advanced and retracted by energization and urged in a projecting direction by a coil spring, although not shown. A plunger is supported by a base plate 2110 and a solenoid cover 2115 at a rear position of the second start port 2102 so as to project forward. In the present embodiment, when the starting opening solenoid 2114 is energized, the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2114 retracts against the biasing force of the coil spring, and the pair of movable pieces is engaged via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The upper ends 2105 rotate in directions away from each other, and the second start port 2102 is in an open state.

  Also, the solenoid cover 2115 of the attacker unit 2100 has a guiding path 2115a on the top surface, the front end side being connected to the rear end of the hook portion 2110b of the base plate, and guiding the gaming ball from the hook portion 2110b ing. The guiding path 2115a of the solenoid cover 2115 is received by the first receiving member 2111 and is received by the first starting opening 2101 and is guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1210 by the flange portion 2110b of the base plate 2110. It can be guided to the right in front view and can be delivered to the first passage 3122a in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later. Also, the solenoid cover 2115 is provided with a discharge port 2115 b that opens rearward at a lower side of a portion that supports the start port solenoid 2114. The discharge port 2115 b is in communication with the second start port 2102, and the game ball received in the second start port 2102 is transferred from the discharge port 2115 b to the second passage 3122 b in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to

  As shown in FIG. 125, the unit case 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 has a large entry and exit 2120a for discharging the gaming balls received in the large winning opening 2103 downward below the panel board 1210, and a large winning combination And a general discharge port 2120 b for discharging the gaming balls received by the general winning opening 2104 disposed immediately above the mouth 2103 downward on the rear side of the panel board 1210. Further, although not shown, unit case 2120 is a first passage for guiding the gaming ball received in large winning opening 2103 to the rear side of gaming panel 1200 and discharging it from large inlet / outlet 2120a, And a second passage for discharging the game balls, which are received by the general winning opening 2104 immediately above the big winning opening 2103 and induced by the ball receiving portion 2124a of the unit cover 2124, from the general discharge opening 2120b. As shown in FIG. 126, the unit case 2120 supports the general winning opening sensor 2123 at a position immediately below the ball receiving portion 2124a in the unit cover 2124.

  Although not shown in the drawings, similarly to the start port solenoid 2114, the adder solenoid 2121 of the adder unit 2100 can be advanced and retracted by energization and has a plunger biased in the protruding direction by a coil spring. In the present embodiment, when power is applied to the attachment solenoid 2121, the plunger of the attachment solenoid 2121 is retracted, and the upper end of the open / close member 2106 is relatively moved forward via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger The special winning opening 2103 is in an open state.

  The unit cover 2124 of the attacker unit 2100 is received by the general winning opening 2104 immediately after the brim 2113a of the general receiving member 2113 mounted immediately above the big winning opening 2103 as shown in the figure and is moved backward by the brim 2113a. It has a ball receiving portion 2124a that receives the guided game ball and guides it downward.

  The starting opening decorative substrate 2116 of the attacker unit 2100 can emit light and decorate the second starting opening 2102 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. In addition, the special winning opening decoration board 2125 of the attacker unit can emit light and decorate the special winning opening 2103 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Furthermore, the attacking unit relay board 2126 includes a starting opening solenoid 2114, an attachment solenoid 2121, a count sensor 2122, a general winning opening sensor 2123, a panel relay board 3040 (main control board 4100), a starting opening decoration board 2116 and a special winning opening decoration. It is for relaying the connection between the substrate 2125 and the lamp driving substrate 3041.

  In the attacking unit 2100 of this example, the first starting opening 2101 is in a state where it can always receive the game ball. On the other hand, in the second start opening 2102, the start opening solenoid 2114 is energized and driven according to the result of the normal lottery that the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 in the gate unit 2300 described later. The piece 2105 is spread and can be received. In addition, in the special winning opening 2103, according to the special lottery result which is drawn by accepting the game ball to the 1st starting opening 2101 and the 2nd starting opening 2102 (starting winning combination) (for example, the special drawing result At the same time, the open / close member 2106 can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern and can be received by energizing the attachment solenoid 2121.

  In this attacking unit 2100, the gaming balls received to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 are the first passage 3122a and the second passage of the lower unit base 3122 in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. After being received by the sensor 3122 b and detected by the first start port sensor 3131 and the second start port sensor 3132, they are discharged downward.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 detects the game ball received to the special winning opening 2103 and the general winning opening 2104 directly above, by the count sensor 2122 and the general winning opening sensor 2123 in the unit case 2120, and then detects the unit case 2120. It is discharged downward from the large inlet / outlet 2120a and the general outlet 2120b on the lower surface.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of this embodiment, the attacker solenoid 2121 is disposed such that the advancing and retracting direction of the plunger is in the left-right direction, and the attacker solenoid 2121 is disposed as close as possible to the opening and closing member 2106. Accordingly, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2100 can be shortened by 5 to 30% as compared with the conventional product, and the rear space of the attacker unit 2100 can be secured wider.

[2-3. Table side unit]
Subsequently, the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 (a) is a perspective view of the front side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 127 (b) is a perspective view of the front side unit as viewed from the rear. The front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the center of the game area 1100 on the panel board 1210 of the game panel 1200 and lower than the center in the vertical direction. And fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 so as to be in contact therewith.

  As shown in the figure, the front side unit 2200 of this example is formed in an arc shape along the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and two general winning openings 2201 arranged from the center in the left-right direction to the right Plate-like members disposed on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and inclined to have two shelf portions 2202 and 2203 inclined so that the right end side is low in front view and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 and close the opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 A base 2210 and a hook 2211 extending rearward from the rear surface of the base 2210 at a position where the general winning opening 2201 is disposed.

  As shown in the figure, the front side unit 2200 is provided with two general winning openings 2201 and shelf portions 2202 and 2203 on the front surface of the base 2210, and the whole is substantially transparent.

  In addition, the front side unit 2200 moves the game ball that has flowed down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100 to the center side in the front view left / right direction of the game area 1100 by the two shelf portions 2202 and 2203. It can be induced. Further, the front side unit 2200 guides the gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2201 to the rear side of the panel board 1210 by the hook 2211 and lower unit base in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. It can be delivered to the general passage 3122 d of 3122.

[2-4. Gate unit]
Next, the gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 121 and FIG. The gate unit 2300 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front to the opening 1215 formed on the left side of the panel board 1210 of the game panel 1200 and slightly above the center in the vertical direction on the left side. Is fixed to the front of the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210).

  The gate unit 2300 has a gate portion 2301 having a width allowing only one game ball to pass, and the game machine having passed through the gate portion 2301 is detected by the gate sensor 2302 disposed in the gate portion 2301. It is possible to

  The gate unit 2300 of this example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction as compared with the conventional gate, and the portion on the rear side of the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the gaming panel 1200 is the panel plate 1210 To fit within the thickness of the. That is, only the wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 2302 extends from the rear surface of the panel plate 1210.

  When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2301, the gate unit 2300 can detect the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 2302. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2302, the gate unit 2300 is normally The lottery result is drawn, and the start port solenoid 2114 is driven according to the selected normal lottery result to turn the pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second start port 2102 and the second start port 2102 is received for a predetermined time It will be possible.

[2-5. Center feature]
Subsequently, the center product 2500 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 to 140. FIG. 128 is a front perspective view of the center character, and FIG. 129 is a rear perspective view of the center character. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of a center product disassembled into major components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the center components disassembled into major components and a back. Further, FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the reception unit of the center object seen from the front, and FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the reception unit of the center object seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the receiving unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the receiving unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 136 is an enlarged front view showing the movement of the receiving unit in the center product, and is a view showing an aspect in which the game ball is guided to the left route. FIG. 137 is an enlarged front view showing the movement of the receiving unit in the center product, and is a view showing an aspect in which the game ball is guided to the right route. FIG. 138 is an explanatory view showing the driving of the receiving unit, and FIG. 139 is an explanatory view showing the driving of the movable decorative body of the receiving unit. FIG. 140 is an explanatory view showing an example of the flow of gaming balls in the receiving unit of the center product.

  The center character 2500 of this example is inserted from the front side into an opening 1215 formed large so as to penetrate the approximate center of the transparent plate-like panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and the panel plate 1210 Fixed to the front surface of the game area, and as shown in FIG. The large window 2501 is provided.

  The center character 2500 is a plate-like flange 2502 that abuts the front of the game panel 1200 on the outer periphery of the window 2501 and bulges forward from the flange 2502 within the gaming area 1100 bordering approximately the center in the left-right direction. And a peripheral wall portion 2503 for guiding the game ball which has flowed to the left and right and preventing the game ball from entering the frame. In addition, the center character 2500 is opened on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall 2503 located on the front side of the panel plate 1210, and the warp entrance 2504 is allowed to enter the game ball flowing down the game area 1100 (FIG. ), The warp outlet 2505 for releasing the gaming ball entering the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and the first starting aperture in the attacker unit 2100 after rolling the gaming ball discharged from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction. And a stage 2510 disposed at the lower inner edge of the window 2501 to be released / recirculated into the upper play area 1100 of 2101.

  The stage 2510 in the center product 2500 is supplied with gaming balls discharged from the warp outlet 2505 and is capable of releasing the supplied gaming balls forward from a predetermined position, and a first stage 2511 And a second stage 2512 capable of releasing game balls supplied from the first position while being provided with gaming balls from the first stage 2511, and a second stage 2512 disposed in front of the second stage 2512 Between the third stage 2513 and the third stage 2513 and the first stage 2511 between the third stage 2513 and the first stage 2511, which are supplied with game balls from the predetermined position and can be discharged backward from the predetermined position Game balls are supplied from the third stage 2513 and released downward from the supplied game balls. The game balls are supplied from the fourth stage and arranged on the lower side of the two fourth stages 2514 and the fourth stage 2514 and the game balls are released forward from a predetermined position to place the game balls in the game area 1100. And a fifth stage 2515 for refluxing the water.

  In addition, the stage 2510 of the center character 2500 is opened at a predetermined position of the first stage 2511 and the first chance entrance 2516 where the game ball can enter and the game ball is opened at the predetermined position of the second stage 2512 The second chance entrance 2517 made possible, the game ball which entered the first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 is returned and discharged into the game area 1100, and the opening immediately above the first starting opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 Have a chance exit 2518, and have.

  The first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so that the left and right ends are the highest, and is formed so that the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 is high. The game ball is released forward from the lowest parts on both sides of the raised part at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100. In addition, the second stage 2512 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the left and right parts of the first stage 2511 at the lowest and releases the game ball forward, and has a gentle curve so that the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 is lowered. The gaming ball is released forward from a predetermined width at the center in the left-right direction.

  The third stage 2513 of the stage 2510 has a length in the left-right direction substantially the same as that of the first stage 2511 and is formed in a curved shape so that the left and right ends are the highest. A smooth, flat W-shaped wave is formed as a whole so that the center of the direction is high, and the lowermost portions on the left and right sides of the raised portion at the center in the lateral direction of the game area 1100 are the second stage It is formed to be positioned outside in the left-right direction than 2512. In the third stage 2513, the gaming ball is released backward from the lowest position.

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the fourth stage 2514 in the stage 2510 is disposed independently on the left and right sides of the second stage 2512, and is gently inclined so that the side away from the second stage 2512 in the left and right direction The game machine is provided with a drop hole 2514a which opens downward at the lowest position and through which the game ball can pass. In the fourth stage 2514, the supplied gaming balls are discharged downward through the drop holes 2514a.

  Further, the fifth stage 2515 in the stage 2510 has a length extending in the lateral direction so as to extend over the falling holes 2514 a of the fourth stage 2514 arranged to be separated from each other in the left and right direction. Formed in a smooth, flat, W-shaped wave shape as a whole so that the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 is high, and both left and right sides of the raised portion in the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 The game ball is released forward (in the game area 1100) from the lowest position of the

  In addition, the first chance entrance 2516 in the stage 2510 is disposed such that the rear half in the front-rear direction covers the raised portion at the center in the left-right direction of the gaming area 1100 in the first stage 2511. In addition, the second chance entrance 2517 is disposed at the lower part of the second stage 2512 at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 so as to open on the rear side in the front-rear direction. The first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 communicate with each other on the lower side of the stage 2510 and move forward from immediately below the raised portion at the center of the gaming area 1100 on the fifth stage 2515. The game ball is released into the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2518 opened.

  In stage 2510 of center character 2500, gaming balls supplied via warp inlet 2504 enter either first chance inlet 2516 or second chance inlet 2517 and are discharged from chance outlet 2518 into gaming area 1100. Then, since the chance outlet 2518 is disposed immediately above the first starting opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, the gaming ball is received to the first starting opening 2101 (the second starting opening 2102 in the open state) with high probability. It is supposed to be (winning).

  Although not shown in detail, the inner bottom surface of the chance outlet 2518 is formed with a groove narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball extending in the front-rear direction, and the groove is rectified by this groove The game ball can be released into the game area 1100 to stabilize the behavior of the game ball discharged from the chance outlet 2518.

  The center character 2500 is formed by a member in which substantially the entire stage 2510 is transparent, and the gaming balls rolling on the stages 2511, 2512, 2513, 2514 and 2515 formed in a plurality of steps from the player side are sufficient. It is possible to see in the

  In addition, as illustrated, the third stage 2513 of the center character 2500 extends in the lateral direction from the left end of the center character 2500 to a position substantially the same as the right end of the first stage 2511 and The game ball is in contact with the obstacle nail that is projected forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1210 of the panel 1200 and is embedded in the lower area of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100 and jumps largely upward. Even in this case, it can come in contact with the lower surface side of the third stage 2513 and can be recoiled downward. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball jumping due to the obstacle nail from entering the window 2501 (within the frame) of the center character 2500, and a member that prevents the game ball from entering the window 2501. Are arranged below the stage 2510 so that the inside of the stage 2510 and the inside of the window portion 2501 can be easily viewed.

  In addition, the center product 2500 of this example is projected into the front of the plate portion flange portion 2502 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200 and from the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 2502 The game machine further includes a transparent frame-shaped center base 2520 having a peripheral wall portion 2503 capable of preventing the game ball from intruding into the window portion 2501 (inside the frame). The center base 2520 has a rear extending wall 2521 extending rearward from the rear surface on the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 2502, and in the state of being attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 It is adapted to be inserted into the opening 1215 of the plate 1210.

  The center base 2520 of the center product 2500 is provided with a space forming recess 2522 whose front side is opened for forming a receiving space 2530, which will be described later, at a position above the center in the vertical direction in front view and at the right end. The center part 2500 is provided with a transparent plate-like receiving space cover 2525 closing the open front end side of the space forming recess 2522 in the center base 2520 and received by the receiving space cover 2525 and the space forming recess 2522. A space 2530 is to be formed.

  In addition, the center character 2500 of this example is disposed at a position above the center in the vertical direction in the front view and at the right end, and the gaming ball having flowed down along the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 2503 on the right side than the center in the horizontal direction can enter. And a receiving space 2530 of a predetermined size capable of releasing the entered gaming ball to the outer side than the peripheral wall 2503 on the right side at a substantially central position in the vertical direction of the front view, and released from the receiving space 2530. A guiding path 2540 for guiding the gaming balls flowing down along the peripheral wall 2503 to be discharged to the upstream side of the big winning opening 2103 in the attachment unit 2100, and the gaming balls basically in the receiving space 2530 A receiving unit 2550 provided to guide to the (right gate 2575R) and a receiving space 2530 by the receiving unit 2550 (movable valve 2551). Route detection sensor 2580 (2580R) capable of detecting gaming balls guided to the right route (right gate 2575L) at the right, and the right route (right gate 2575R) in the receiving space 2530 of the receiving unit 2550 (movable valve 2551) And a route detection sensor 2580 (2580L) capable of detecting a game ball that has failed to be guided to the left route (left gate 2575L) in the reception space 2530.

  The center part 2500 is disposed above the receiving space 2530, and the upper end opens at a predetermined position on the upper right side in the front view of the peripheral wall 2503 and the lower end opens at the upper end of the receiving space 2530 and goes downward. The game machine further includes a receiving entry passage 2545 formed to be narrower in width according to and the gaming ball enters the receiving space 2530 through the receiving entry passage 2545.

  Further, the center part 2500 is provided with a ball route indication member 2590 which is disposed on the left and right sides of the receiving space 2530 and is formed in the shape of a downward arrow. The ball route suggesting member 2590 is partially translucent and can be lighted and decorated by a decorative substrate disposed on the rear side, and success or failure of guidance to the left route by the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550 described later By emitting light in accordance with this, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize a route or the like on which the gaming ball in the receiving space 2530 rolls.

  As described above, the receiving space 2530 in the center part 2500 is formed by the space forming recess 2522 whose front side is opened in the center base 2520 and the receiving space cover 2525 which closes the front end of the space forming recess 2522. The transparent center base 2520 and the receiving space cover 2525 allow the rear side to be viewed well.

  The receiving space 2530 includes an upper space 2531 which bulges upward in a semicircular shape, and a lower space 2532 which is disposed below the upper space 2531 and which bulges wider in the left-right direction than the upper space 2531. . In the receiving space 2530, the lower end of the receiving access path 2545 is opened at the center in the left-right direction of the upper space 2531. Further, in the receiving space 2530, the bottom 2533 of the lower space 2532 is inclined so that the right side in the front view is lowered, and an outlet 2534 opened in the peripheral wall 2503 is formed at the right end of the bottom 2533 of the lower space 2532. ing.

  Also, in the receiving space 2530, the route detection sensor 2580 is disposed in the lower space 2532 so as to be separated in the left-right direction. Specifically, on the axis on which the two route detection sensors 2580 are distributed to the left and right by the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550 in the upper space 2531 and suspended (the inner circumference of the upper space 2531 and the cylindrical portion 2551 a in the movable valve 2551 They are respectively disposed on the axis line perpendicular to the circumference passing through the center with the outer circumference.

  Further, in the receiving space 2530, a circular opening 2535 penetrating in the front-rear direction along the inner shape of the upper space 2531 formed in a semicircular shape is formed in the rear wall partitioning the rear end of the receiving space 2530. ing. In the opening 2535, the game ball is closed so as not to pass by the disk-shaped rear wall 2551c of the movable valve 2551 in the receiving unit 2550 described later.

  The gaming passage 2540 in the center character 2500 is discharged from the discharge port 2534 of the receiving space 2530 to the outer peripheral side of the peripheral wall 2503 and flows down between the inner periphery of the game area 1100 and the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 2503 From the outlet 2541 (see FIG. 117) opened on the upstream side of the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 at a position lower than the stage 2510 to the center of the front view in the left-right direction It can be released to the

  In the passage between the outlet 2541 of the receiving space 2530 and the guide passage 2540 on the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 2503 of the center character 2500, the flow velocity of the gaming ball is attenuated by contacting the gaming ball. A plurality of protrusions 2506 are provided.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the reception entry passage 2545 in the center character 2500 is formed to narrow as it goes downward, and the width on the lower end side is a width slightly larger than the outline of the game ball, The game balls can be sent to the lower receiving space 2530 in a single row. The receiving entrance passage 2545 is formed such that the upper end side of the side wall on the left side in front view forming the passage is continuous downward from the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 2503, while the upper end of the side wall on the right side in front view It is formed to extend up to the stopper 1114 of the front component 1110A that defines the inner periphery of the region 1100. As a result, all game balls driven between the upper inner periphery of the game area 1100 and the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 2503 from the center in the left-right direction of the front view in the center character 2500 are all received into the reception approach passage 2545 It is sent to the receiving space 2530.

  The receiving unit 2550 in the center character 2500 is provided so that the game ball can be easily guided to the right route rather than the left route in the receiving space 2530 when the game ball is simply fired toward the game area 1100. Regardless of whether or not the game ball is fired toward the game area 1100 at a specific timing that periodically visits, the cycle is such that the game ball is more easily induced to the left route than the right route in the receiving space 2530. A movable valve 2551 which performs a movable operation (here, rotation between two positions), a movable shaft 2552 extending rearward from the rotation center of the movable valve 2551 and integrally rotating with the movable valve 2551; A locking member 2553 having a locking piece 2553a at a position fixed to the rear end of the shaft 2552 and offset from the shaft core, and the locking member 2553 are movable The unit base 2554 rotatably supports the movable shaft 2552 with respect to the unit 2551 and is disposed on the rear side of the receiving space 2530, and a predetermined position in the lateral direction on the rear side of the unit base 2554 and below the movable shaft 2552. It has a locking piece 2555a slidably supported in a sliding range and disposed immediately below the movable shaft 2552 when slid in the approximate center of the sliding range, and a groove 2555b extending vertically from one end side A connecting spring 2556 is engaged so that biasing forces act on the slider 2555, the locking pieces 2555a of the slider 2555, and the locking pieces 2553a of the locking member 2553 so that both ends approach each other. The transmission pin 2557a slides in the groove 2555b of the 2555 and extends in the front-rear direction, and from the axial center of the transmission pin 2557a A link member 2557 which is rotatably supported in the core position, and a, and receiving a drive motor 2558 attached to the rear surface of the rotate driven unit base 2554 to the link member 2557 is transmission pins 2557a revolves.

  As illustrated, the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550 has substantially the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 2551a extending in the front-rear direction, the valve portion 2551b protruding radially from the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 2551a, and the tip of the valve portion 2551b. And a transparent disk-shaped rear wall portion 2551c attached to the rear side of the cylindrical portion 2551a and the valve portion 2551b. The movable valve 2551 can roll the gaming ball in a predetermined direction by the valve portion 2551b, and the gaming ball can not pass through the opening 2535 of the receiving space 2530 by the rear wall portion 2551c. Can be closed.

  The locking member 2553 of the receiving unit 2550 is formed such that the locking piece 2553 a protrudes rearward from a position eccentric to the axial center of the movable shaft 2552. In addition, the locking member 2553 is provided with a stopper piece 2553b which protrudes in the radial direction from a position rotated about an axis about 90 degrees with respect to the direction in which the locking piece 2553a is eccentric. The stopper piece 2553 b of the locking member 2553 is configured such that its tip end is positioned in the rotation restriction portion 2554 c formed in a U-shape of the unit base 2554 in the assembled state. By coming into contact with the circumferential end, the rotation range of the movable shaft 2552 (movable valve 2551) can be regulated. The stopper piece 2553 b of the locking member 2553 is formed to become thinner toward the tip as illustrated.

  The movable valve 2551 and the locking member 2553 of the receiving unit 2550 are substantially vertically suspended with the position of the locking piece 2553a of the locking member 2553 when the valve portion 2551b of the movable valve 2551 is substantially vertically raised. The movable shaft 2552 is fixed in a non-rotatable state to the front end and the rear end of the movable shaft 2552, respectively.

  A unit base 2554 of the receiving unit 2550 is formed on the lower side of the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a extending in the front-rear direction through which the movable shaft 2552 is inserted, and the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction In the form of a long hole, a slit 2554 b for sliding the slider 2555 in the left-right direction is mainly provided. In the unit base 2554, bearing bushes 2559 are respectively inserted into both ends of the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a, and the movable shaft 2552 can be rotatably supported via the bearing bushes 2559. . Further, two slits 2554 b of the unit base 2554 are formed at the same height and separated in the left-right direction.

  Further, the unit base 2554 is disposed at a position separated in the radial direction by a predetermined amount from the axial center of the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a (movable shaft 2552), extends rearward and is formed in a substantially U shape with the axial center side opened. It has the rotation restricting portion 2554c (see FIG. 138 etc.). In a state where the receiving unit 2550 is assembled, the stopper piece 2553b of the locking member 2553 is inserted and arranged inside the U-shape of the rotation restricting portion 2554c, and the movable portion of the rotation restricting portion 2554c is movable When the stopper piece 2553b abuts on the end in the circumferential direction centering on the axis of the shaft 2552, the rotation range of the locking member 2553 (movable valve 2551) can be restricted via the stopper piece 2553b. It has become.

  Further, the unit base 2554 is provided with a cylindrical support cylindrical portion 2554 d which extends forward on the upper side of the cylindrical shaft portion 2554 a than the cylindrical shaft portion 2554 a. The support cylindrical portion 2554 d of the unit base 2554 is for rotatably supporting a support pin 2566 described later by means of bearing bushes 2559 inserted at both ends. The unit base 2554 of the receiving unit 2550 is attached to the rear side of the center base 2520.

  The slider 2555 of the receiving unit 2550 is provided with a strip-shaped main body portion 2555c extending from the vertical direction center of the vertically extending groove 2555b to one side (left side in front view) from the vertical direction. The locking piece 2555a extends rearward from the position. Further, the slider 2555 includes cylindrical protrusions 2555 d which project forward from the front surface of the main body 2555 c extending in the left and right direction and are inserted in a slidable manner into the two slits 2554 b in the unit base 2554. The slider 2555 is slidably supported in the lateral direction between predetermined slide ranges guided by the slits 2554b by inserting the two protrusions 2555d into the two slits 2554b of the unit base 2554. ing.

  The two projections 2555d of the slider 2555 extend through the slits 2554b to the front side of the unit base 2554, and connect the tips of the projections 2555d extended to the front of the unit base 2554. As described above, the receiving plate 2560 is attached so as not to come out of the slit 2554 b.

  The slider 2555 is a plate-like detection piece 2555e extending downward from the lower surface between the locking piece 2555a and the groove 2555b in the main body 2555c, and the groove 2555b with the locking piece 2555a in the main body 2555c. And a rack gear 2555f formed on the upper surface of the opposite side. The detection piece 2555e of the slider 2555 is detected by the movable valve position detection sensor 2561 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2554. By detecting the detection piece 2555e, the slide position of the slider 2555 can be detected. It is possible to detect the rollable direction of the gaming ball by the movable valve 2551. The rack gear 2555f of the slider 2555 is engaged with a first gear portion 2562a of a first transmission gear 2562 described later, and transmits the movement of the slider 2555 to the movable upper decorative body 2565 or the movable lower decorative body 2567. Can be moved.

  In addition, the receiving unit 2550 is rotatably supported at a position above the slider 2555 on the rear side of the unit base 2554, and has a fan-shaped first gear portion 2562a that meshes with the rack gear 2555f of the slider 2555, and the first gear portion 2562a. The first transmission gear 2562 having a spur gear-shaped second gear portion 2562b smaller in diameter and integrally rotatable, and the second gear portion 2562b of the first transmission gear 2562 at the rear side of the unit base 2554 A second transmission gear 2563 in a spur gear shape rotatably supported, a driven gear portion 2564a meshing with the second transmission gear 2563, and a driven gear portion 2564a are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a in the unit base 2554 A cylindrical insertion portion 2564b rotatably inserted on the outer periphery, and a radial direction from the insertion portion 2564b Actuating piece 2564c extending long in a plate shape upward, slotted transmission slit 2564d formed at the tip of the actuating piece 2564c and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the radial direction, extending radially downward from the insertion portion 2564b And a driven transmission member 2564 having the two attachment portions 2564e which are exposed.

  Further, the receiving unit 2550 is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2564 d of the driven transmission member 2564 and is disposed at a different position above the sliding pin 2565 a and sliding pin 2565 a extending long backward, and extends backward. A movable upper decorative body 2565 disposed between the movable valve 2551 and the unit base 2554 and having a movable shaft fixing portion 2565 b projecting from the movable base 2554, and an axial fixing of the movable upper decorative body 2565 The front end side is fixed to the portion 2565b, and the support pin 2566 is inserted into the support cylindrical portion 2554d of the unit base 2554 and rotatably supported via the bearing bush 2559, and disposed below the movable upper decoration 2565 And the attachment portion 2564e of the driven transmission member 2564 is attached to the rear side, and the movable upper decoration in a predetermined character is attached And a, a movable lower ornamental body 2567 which is sterically mimics the site different from the 2565.

  Furthermore, the receiving unit 2550 has a plurality of openings 2568a through which the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a and the support cylindrical portion 2554d of the unit base 2554 can pass, and the external shape has a predetermined three-dimensional shape and a part is translucent. And a rear decorative body 2568 attached to the front side of the unit base 2554 behind the movable upper decorative body 2565 and the movable lower decorative body 2567, between the rear decorative body 2568 and the unit base 2554 A decoration substrate 2569 for arranging a plurality of LEDs on the front and mounting a rear decoration 2568 with light, a receiving drive motor 2558 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2554, a movable valve position detection sensor 2561, and a route detection sensor A relay board 2570 for relaying connection between the 2580 and the panel relay board 3040; There.

  The first transmission gear 2562 and the second transmission gear 2563 of the receiving unit 2550 are rotatably supported by a cylindrical shaft extending rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2554, and the first transmission gear 2562 The second gear portion 2562 b and the second transmission gear 2563 are accommodated in a recess recessed forward from the rear surface side of the unit base 2554. An opening which penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in a recess for housing the second transmission gear 2563 and the like in the unit base 2554, and a part of the second transmission gear 2563 is a front side of the unit base 2554 through the opening. It is supposed to be exposed to The second transmission gear 2563 is engaged with the driven gear portion 2564 a of the driven transmission member 2564 rotatably supported by the cylindrical shaft portion 2554 a at a portion exposed to the front side of the unit base 2554.

  In the receiving unit 2550, the movable upper decorative body 2565 is three-dimensionally shaped so as to imitate the head of a predetermined character along the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and the movable lower decorative body 2567 is a movable upper decorative body It is three-dimensionally shaped by imitating the arm of the same character as 2565. In addition, as illustrated, in the movable lower decorative body 2567, the arm is shaped in a state in which the arm is held. Further, the back decoration 2568 of the receiving unit 2550 is formed in a relief shape on the front side except for the head and arms of the same character as the movable upper decoration 2565 and the lower movable decoration 2567. Thus, when viewed from the front in the assembled state of the receiving unit 2550, the movable upper decorative body 2565, the movable lower decorative body 2567, and the rear decorative body 2568 form a full-length image of a predetermined character with a wrinkle The whole image of the predetermined character can be viewed from the player side through the transparent center base 2520 and the receiving space cover 2525.

  Next, the movement of the receiving unit 2550 in the center product 2500 will be described. First, the movement of the movable valve 2551 disposed in the receiving space 2530 will be described. When the link member 2557 is rotationally driven by the drive of the receiving drive motor 2558, the transmission pin 2557a of the link member 2557 revolves around the rotation axis of the receiving drive motor 2558 with a predetermined radius. The transmission pin 2557a of the link member 2557 is slidably inserted in a vertically extending groove 2555b of the slider 2555 supported slidably in the left and right direction, and the transmission pin 2557a is rotated to revolve. Since the relative position between the top and bottom and the left and right of the 2557a changes, the transmission pin 2557a slides vertically in the groove 2555b of the slider 2555 due to the revolution of the transmission pin 2557a It will slide in the left and right direction.

  When the slider 2555 slides in the left-right direction, the locking pieces 2555a of the slider 2555 also slide in the left-right direction together and slide in the left-right direction within the same range as the revolution diameter of the transmission pin 2557a . The locking piece 2555a of the slider 2555 is formed such that the approximate center of the sliding range in the left and right direction of the locking piece 2555a is located on a vertical line passing through the axial center of the movable shaft 2552 By sliding in, the locking piece 2555a moves to the left or right beyond the vertical line passing through the axial center of the movable shaft 2552.

  In this receiving unit 2550, the lower end side of the connecting spring 2556 is engaged with the engaging piece 2555a of the slider 2555, and the engaging member 2553 whose upper end is fixed to the rear end of the movable shaft 2552 When the slider 2555 (the locking piece 2555a) slides in the left-right direction, the locking piece 2553a of the locking member 2553 is pulled in the direction in which the slider 2555 slides through the connecting spring 2556. The locking member 2553 (movable shaft 2552) is rotated. The movable valve 2551 fixed to the front end of the movable shaft 2552 is also rotated by the driving of the receiving drive motor 2558.

  In the receiving unit 2550, since the locking member 2553 and the slider 2555 are elastically connected by the connecting spring 2556, the gaming ball entering the receiving space 2530 while the movable valve 2551 is rotating is of the receiving space 2530. Even if it is intended to be sandwiched between the inner wall and the valve portion 2551b of the movable valve 2551, the valve portion 2551b can be rotated in the direction of escaping from the gaming ball by the expansion and contraction of the connecting spring 2556. Therefore, even if the movable ball 2551 is rotating and the gaming ball can not enter into the receiving space 2530 by the valve portion 2551b, depending on the timing when the gaming ball flows down, the urging force of the connecting spring 2556 by the momentum of the gaming ball In addition to being able to push the valve portion 2551b against the to move the gaming ball into the receiving space 2530, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched at the entrance of the receiving space 2530, and clogging of the ball occurs. It is possible to prevent it.

  In this example, when the slider 2555 is slid leftward in the rear view, the movable shaft 2552 (movable valve 2551) is pivoted counterclockwise in the rear view (see FIG. 138A), In the receiving space 2530, the game ball can be rolled in the left direction in a front view by the movable valve 2551 (see FIG. 136). On the other hand, when the slider 2555 is slid rightward in rear view, the movable shaft 2552 (movable valve 2551) is rotated clockwise in rear view (see FIG. 138 (b)). The game ball can be rolled to the right in front view by the movable valve 2551 (see FIG. 137). Further, in this example, when the slider 2555 slides to the slide end in the right direction in rear view, the detection piece 2555e of the slider 2555 is detected by the movable valve position detection sensor 2561.

  By the way, the locking member 2553 fixed to the rear end of the movable shaft 2552 is provided with a stopper piece 2553b which can be brought into contact with the rotation restricting portion 2554c formed on the rear surface of the unit base 2554. The rotation range of the movable shaft 2552 (the movable valve 2551) can be restricted by contacting the end in the circumferential direction of the rotation restriction portion 2554c in which the piece 2553b is formed substantially in a U-shape. . Thereby, even if the game ball abuts on the valve portion 2551b of the movable valve 2551, the valve portion 2551b can be prevented from rotating downward, and the movable valve 2551 reliably turns the gaming ball in a predetermined direction. It can be moved. Further, as illustrated, the stopper piece 2553 b of the locking member 2553 is formed to become thinner toward the tip, and can exert an elastic force when in contact with the rotation restricting portion 2554 c. The impact generated by the game ball coming into contact with the valve portion 2551b of the movable valve 2551 can be mitigated by the elastic force of the stopper piece 2553b, and the valve portions 2551b and the like can be prevented from being damaged by the impact. It has become.

  Subsequently, the movement of the movable upper decorative body 2565 and the movable lower decorative body 2567 disposed behind the receiving space 2530 will be described. As described above, the receiving unit 2550 can slide the slider 2555 in the left-right direction by rotationally driving the receiving drive motor 2558. The receiving unit 2550 of this example is provided with a rack gear 2555f on the tip end side of the locking piece 2555a in the slider 2555, and has a first gear portion 2562a meshed with the rack gear 2555f by sliding the slider 2555 in the left and right direction. The transmission gear 2562 is configured to rotate.

  When the first transmission gear 2562 rotates, the second transmission gear 2563 meshed with the second gear portion 2562b of the first transmission gear 2562 rotates in the opposite direction, and further, the driven gear meshed with the second transmission gear 25563 The driven transmission member 2564 having the portion 2564 a is configured to rotate in the same direction as the first transmission gear 2562. A movable lower decorative body 2567 is attached to the front side of the driven transmission member 2564 so that the movable lower decorative body 2567 rotates in the same direction as the driven transmission member 2564 and the first transmission gear 2562. .

  On the other hand, a movable upper decoration rotatably supported via a support pin 2566 with respect to a support cylindrical portion 2554 d of the unit base 2554 by an elongated hole-shaped transmission slit 2564 d which extends in the radial direction in the driven transmission member 2564 A sliding pin 2565a extended rearward in the body 2565 is slidably inserted. The sliding pin 2565a of the movable upper decorative body 2565 is disposed between the rotation axis of the driven transmission member 2564 and the rotational axis of the movable upper decoration 2565, and the driven transmission member 2564 is a transmission slit 2564d. When it is rotated, the movable upper decorative body 2565 is rotated in the opposite direction to the driven transmission member 2564 through the support pin 2566 inserted into the transmission slit 2564 d.

  Therefore, when the receiving drive motor 2558 of the receiving unit 2550 is rotationally driven to slide the slider 2555 in the left-right direction, the movable upper decorative body 2565 and the movable lower decorative body 2567 can be rotated in different directions. It has become. As a result, when viewed from the front, the predetermined character can show the player such a movement as moving his eyebrow while tilting his head (a movable effect).

  In this example, when the slider 2555 is slid leftward in rear view, the movable upper decorative body 2565 is rotated clockwise in rear view and the movable lower decorative body 2567 is counterclockwise in rear view. It rotates in the direction (see FIG. 139 (a)). In addition, when the slider 2555 is slid rightward in rear view, the movable upper decorative body 2565 rotates counterclockwise in rear view and the movable lower decorative body 2567 rotates clockwise in rear view. (See FIG. 139 (b)).

  In addition, in the state of the position where the movable valve 2551 rolls the gaming ball leftward in a front view, the receiving unit 2550 of the center character 2500 is in a state where the movable decorative body 2565 stands substantially straight. In addition, the movable lower decorative body 2567 is in a state where its fold is positioned behind the route detection sensor 2580L on the left side (see FIG. 136). On the other hand, in the state where the movable valve 2551 rolls the gaming ball to the right in front view, the movable upper decorative body 2565 is inclined to the right, and the movable lower decorative body 2567 has its ridge on the right side It is in the state located behind the route detection sensor 2580R (see FIG. 137). Thus, the player can roll the game ball in the direction in which the game ball rolls not only by the direction of the rotational position of the valve portion 2551 b of the movable valve 2551 but also by the wrinkles of the movable lower decoration 2567 disposed behind the receiving space 2530. While being able to be made to recognize, it is possible for the player to be illusive as if the rolling destination of the game ball is determined by the wrinkles of the movable lower decoration 2567. .

  Subsequently, the movement of the gaming ball by the receiving unit 2550 in the receiving space 2530 of the center character 2500 will be described. In the receiving space 2530, the game ball is inserted into the game area 1100 so that the game ball enters between the center of the peripheral wall 2503 of the center character 2500 from the center in the horizontal direction and the upper right and the inner periphery of the game area 1100. It can be made to approach via the receiving approach channel 2545 by driving in. A rotatable movable valve 2551 having a valve portion 2551 b is disposed in the upper part of the receiving space 2530 in which the lower end of the receiving entrance passage 2545 is opened. The movable valve 2551 is stopped for a predetermined time (for example, about 17 seconds) in a mode (a mode illustrated in FIG. 137) in which the gaming ball is guided to the right route in the receiving space 2530. The game ball is stopped for a short time (about 3 seconds) in a mode (a mode shown in FIG. 136) in which the gaming ball is guided to the left route in the receiving space 2530. It turns so that it becomes an aspect by which a game ball is induced to the right route of. The movable valve 2551 repeatedly performs such an operation in the same pattern. Here, when the gaming balls are continuously fired, the number of gaming balls fired per minute is about 100, so the movable valve 2551 is induced to the right route in the receiving space 2530 If it stops for 17 seconds in a mode, a game ball of about 28-29 balls can be fired during this time. In addition, when the movable valve 2551 is stopped for 3 seconds in a mode in which the gaming ball is guided to the left route in the receiving space 2530, about 4 to 5 gaming balls can be fired during this period. Therefore, when the game ball is merely fired without aiming at the left side route or the right side route, the game ball is induced to the right side route with a higher possibility than the left side route. On the other hand, when the player launches the game ball aiming at the timing at which the movable valve 2551 is stopped for 3 seconds in a mode that the game ball is guided to the left route in the receiving space 2530, the game ball is the right route. The game ball is induced to the left route with a higher possibility.

  When the valve part 2551b of the movable valve 2551 rises substantially vertically (see FIG. 114 etc.), the center part product 2500 is in a state where the valve part 2551b is positioned at the lower end of the reception entrance passage 2545 The game ball can not enter from the passage 2545 into the receiving space 2530. Therefore, when the gaming ball reaches the movable valve 2551 in this state, it can not enter into the receiving space 2530 and is temporarily stopped at the lower end of the receiving entrance passage 2545.

  The game balls that are to roll either the left route or the right route in the receiving space 2530 by the valve portion 2551 b of the movable valve 2551 are provided in the respective routes of the gate 2575 (left gate By passing through 2575L and right gate 2575R), it is detected by the route detection sensors 2580L and 2580R, and it is detected which route (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) the game ball is actually rolling It can be done.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 140 etc., the two route detection sensors 2580 are arranged at substantially the center in the vertical direction of the lower space 2532 in the receiving space 2530 and apart from the center in the horizontal direction. Therefore, a space through which the game ball can pass is formed between the two route detection sensors 2580 and on the outer side in the left-right direction of each of the two route detection sensors 2580. Thus, when the game ball can not pass through the route detection sensor 2580 for some reason, the game ball can be made to flow down the side of the route detection sensor 2580 to the bottom portion 2533 and be discharged from the discharge port 2534. In the space 2530, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being stuck and clogging the ball.

  In this example, it is detected which of the two gates 2575 (left gate 2575L and right gate 2575R) arranged on the left and right the gaming ball has passed, and as will be described later, a large hit described later according to the passing destination. I try to make the form different. For example, when it is detected by the route detection sensor 2580R, it is determined to be a jackpot game mode (9 rounds) where payout of a fixed amount (the amount of winning balls obtainable in 9 rounds) can be expected, and the route detection sensor 2580L. When it is detected, the jackpot game mode (3 rounds, 6 rounds) in which only the amount of prize balls below a certain amount (the amount of prize balls that does not reach the amount of prize balls that can be earned in 9 rounds) is paid out and exceeds a certain amount The amount of prize balls (the amount of prize balls exceeding the amount of prize balls that can be acquired in nine rounds) is determined by lottery at any of the modes (12 rounds, 15 rounds) of the jackpot game to be paid out. In this way, the desired route detection sensor 2580 is made to aim for the game ball to be detected by measuring the hitting timing of the game ball according to the movement of the movable valve 2551 which operates periodically. It is possible to However, although the details will be described later, even if the player shoots the game ball at the timing when the game ball passes the left gate 2575L (detected by the route detection sensor 2580L), the game ball does not move the left gate 2575L. If one ball passes through the right gate 2575R before it passes, even if the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L after that, detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580L is invalidated ( Similarly, when one game ball passes through the left gate 2575L before the game ball passes the right gate 2575R, even if the game ball passes the right gate 2575R thereafter, the game by the route detection sensor 2580R Detection of the ball is invalidated). Therefore, if the player shoots the game ball by aiming the game ball to pass through the left gate 2575L, the possibility of the game ball passing through the left gate 2575L is higher than when the game ball is not aimed, but even a little If the timing deviates, it may happen that the game ball does not necessarily pass through the left gate 2575L but passes through the right gate 2575R.

  Here, the jackpot game mode in which a prize ball amount exceeding a certain amount can be paid out is a certain amount (for example, when nine rounds of jackpot games are executed like the 15 rounds jackpot game described later) It corresponds to the aspect of the jackpot game in which the winning balls exceeding the winning amount) are paid out. That is, in a pachinko gaming machine, an average value (average profit) of the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game based on a prescribed probability such as the probability of winning in the jackpot lottery and the probability that the high probability state continues. Or, the amount of prize balls to be paid out in the jackpot game executed based on one first jackpot (that is, the amount of prize balls paid out in one or more jackpot games executed until the continuation of the high probability state ends The average value of) is determined. The jackpot game mode in which the fixed amount of winning balls is paid out corresponds to a jackpot game mode in which the average profit calculated based on the prescribed probability can be expected to be provided to the player.

  Further, in this example, the discharge port 2534 for discharging the gaming ball from the receiving space 2530 is disposed in the lower right corner of the receiving space 2530 in a front view, so that it rolls in the left direction by the movable valve 2551 The time for staying in the receiving space 2530 is different between the game ball that has become and the game ball that is to roll to the right. Therefore, in the two game balls continuously driven into the game area 1100, the game ball driven first rolls to the left by the movable valve 2551, and the game ball driven later moves to the right by the movable valve 2551. When two game balls are hit at a timing where it rolls in the direction, the game balls hit later in the receiving space 2530 will catch up with the previously hit game balls, and the two game balls are substantially aligned. It is possible to discharge from the discharge port 2534 in a false state (see FIG. 140). As a result, the game balls discharged in a line from the receiving space 2530 are discharged in a state of being lined up upstream of the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. A ball can be received, and more game balls can be received into the big winning opening 2103.

  Specifically, for example, in a big hit game etc. where the big winning opening 2103 can be accepted, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2103 is performed by the elapsed time of the open state or the number of accepted game balls When a predetermined number of gaming balls are received in time, the special winning opening 2103 is closed. In this special winning opening 2103, there is a time lag between the game ball passing through the opening of the special winning opening 2103 and the detection by the count sensor 2122. If it is possible to enter the game ball into the big winning opening 2103, it becomes possible to win more game balls than a predetermined number, but in normal rolling of the game ball, the interval of the game balls is not reduced so much It was difficult to enter multiple game balls. However, as described above, since the game balls can be released to the large winning opening 2103 side in a state of being substantially aligned by the receiving space 2530 and the movable valve 2551, two gaming balls are It becomes possible to enter the special winning opening 2103, and it is possible to win more game balls than a predetermined number.

  Further, although the center character 2500 is not described in detail, a decorative member which is formed in a predetermined shape and which decorates the center character 2500 at an appropriate position, and a predetermined character along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are three-dimensionally And a decorative substrate having a plurality of LEDs on the rear side of the decorative member and the character body, so that the decorative member and the like can be appropriately decorated to emit light. There is. In the center character 2500, a decorative member for decorating the rear side of the stage 2510 is opaque, and the player unit side 4003 of the rear unit 3000 disposed on the rear side can be seen from the player in a normal state It is not supposed to.

  Further, in the center product 2500 of this example, the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 2503 on the right side of the approximate center in the left-right direction in a front view substantially follows the inner periphery of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the front component 1110A) When attached to the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed along the outer periphery of the right peripheral wall 2503 of the center character 2500. The game ball can be easily hit into the reception space 2530 through the reception entry path 2545 by right-handling, and the game ball is accepted with high probability in the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. It is supposed to be In addition, in a state where the center character 2500 is attached to the panel board 1210, an area of a predetermined width is formed on the outer periphery on the left side of the center character 2500 with the inner circumference of the game area 1100. .

[2-6. Overall configuration of back unit]
Subsequently, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the back unit in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the back unit in the game board as viewed from the rear. FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main components and seen from the rear is there.

  The back unit 3000 of this example is attached to the back side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220) and the front side is opened and the opening 3010b through which the display screen of the liquid crystal display 1900 faces the back wall 3010a The back box 3010 thus formed, the back front decoration unit 3100 disposed near the front end in the back box 3010, the back up rendering unit 3200 disposed in the back box 3010 above the opening 3010 b, and the inside of the back box 3010 The lower back rendering unit 3400 disposed below the opening 3010b, and the lower back right rendering unit disposed between the back rendering unit 3400 and the back front decoration unit 3100 in the lower right corner in front view in the back box 3010 Mainly equipped with 3600.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is a back surface below the opening 3010b at the back surface of the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and the decorative seal 3030 attached to the front of the lower edge and both left and right edges of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 A panel relay substrate 3040 attached to the lower right corner, a lamp drive substrate 3041 attached to the left of the opening 3010b on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and the lamp drive substrate 3041 from the rear side A motor drive board 3045 (see FIG. 188) is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the left and right direction at positions on the lower sides of the substrate cover 3042 attached to the rear surface and the lower side of the opening 3010b in the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 (see FIG. 188) Of the back box 3010 and the horizontally long motor drive board box 3043 in which the It includes a shield plate 3044 consisting mounted on the side upper metal plate, a.

  The panel relay board 3040 in the back unit 3000 is connected to the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010, and the general winning opening sensor 2123, the count sensor 2122, and the gate sensor 2302 provided on the main control board 4100 and the game board 4. It is for relaying the connection with the starting opening solenoid 2114, the attacker solenoid 2121 and the like.

  The lamp driving substrate 3041 in the back unit 3000 is based on a control signal (command) from the peripheral control substrate 4010, and the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430 provided on the door frame 5. Light emission of the LED mounted on each of the decoration substrates 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 324, 3266, 3320, 3426, 3536, 3546 etc. provided on the game board 4 To control the

  In addition, the motor drive board 3045 in the back unit 3000 is based on a control signal (command) from the peripheral control board 4010, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5, and each drive motor provided in the game board 3228, 3324, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508, etc., and for controlling the drive of each solenoid or the like.

  The back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 has a box shape whose front side is opened, and a substantially rectangular opening 3010 b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the back wall 3010 a. The opening 3010 b of the back box 3010 is smaller than the front view outline of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The back box 3010 is formed with a flange-like fixing portion 3010c extending outward from the outer periphery of the front end, and the fixing portion 3010c is to be fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220) . Although detailed description is omitted, in the back box 3010, mounting holes for mounting the units 3100, 3200, 3400, 3600, substrates and the like, mounting bosses, and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  Furthermore, the back box 3010 has a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d recessed in the outer periphery of the opening 3010b on the rear surface of the back wall 3010a and having a size substantially the same as the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The liquid crystal fixing portion 3010e formed on the left side and into which the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted and the liquid crystal fixing portion 3010e are formed on the opposite side (right side in back view) in the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d. And a lock mechanism mounting portion 3010 f to which the In the back box 3010, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d from the rear side, and the back surface in the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d of the back wall 3010a is a flat surface, The front surface of the display device 1900 abuts.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided with a lock mechanism 3050 for detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the back surface of the back wall 3010 a of the back box 3010. The lock mechanism 3050 of this example is slidably attached to the lock mechanism attachment portion 3010 f of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction, and when it is slid upward, the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is When the insertion slot that can be inserted from the side opens and the locking piece 3050 is slid upward after inserting the fixing piece 1902 from the insertion slot, the rear end of the insertion hole is closed and the fixing piece 1902 does not come off As a result, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked.

[2-7. Back front decoration unit]
Subsequently, the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147. FIG. 145 (a) is a front perspective view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit, and FIG. 145 (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit. Further, FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back front decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the back front decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 of this example has a predetermined logo formed along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 on the front side, and the overall shape of the front view is formed in a substantially L shape. The front end in the back box 3010 is attached along the left side and the lower side in a front view. This back front decoration unit 3100 is visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and mainly decorates the back side of the area in which the obstacle nail is planted in the game area 1100. doing.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 is disposed to the left of the front opening 3010 b in the back box 3010 and extends in the vertical direction as compared to the back front left decoration unit 3110, the back front left decoration unit 3110 and the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010 It has a back front lower decoration unit 3120 disposed on the lower side and extending in the left and right direction, and a function display unit 1180 attached to the lower front of the back front left decoration unit 3110. The back front left decoration unit 3110 and the back front lower decoration unit 3120 are logo lens members formed so that a predetermined logo along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is three-dimensionally shaped and partially translucent. 3111 and 3121, and a left unit base 3112 and a lower unit base 3122 which are attached to the back box 3010 while supporting the rear side of the logo lens members 3111 and 3121.

  The back front left decoration unit 3110 is disposed between the top of the logo lens member 3121 and the left unit base 3112 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front bottom left back decoration substrate 3113 and a bottom front left upper decoration substrate 3113 A back front left middle decoration substrate 3114 disposed between the logo lens member 3121 on the side and the left unit base 3112 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a logo lens member 3121 under the back front left middle decoration substrate 3114 And a left unit base 3112, and a back front left decorative substrate 3115 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The back left front decoration unit 3110 appropriately emits light from the logo lens member 3121 by causing the LEDs mounted on the back front upper left decoration substrate 3113, the back front left middle decoration substrate 3114, and the back front left decoration substrate 3115 to emit light as appropriate. It can be made to

  The back front lower decoration unit 3120 is disposed between the logo lens member 3121 and the lower unit base 3122 on the left side of the approximate center in the left-right direction, and the back front lower left decoration substrate 3123 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted A back front lower right decorative substrate 3124 is disposed between the lens member 3121 and the lower unit base 3122 and disposed substantially right from the center in the left-right direction and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front. The back front lower decoration unit 3120 can emit light and decorate the logo lens member 3121 by appropriately emitting the LEDs mounted on the back front lower left decoration substrate 3123 and the back front lower right decoration substrate 3124. ing.

  The lower unit base 3122 of the lower front decoration unit 3120 is received on the front side by the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 and receives the game ball guided and released from the induction path 2115a of the solenoid cover 2115 A second passage 3122a for guiding downward and a second passage 3122b for receiving and guiding downward the gaming ball received by the second starting opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 and discharged from the outlet 2115b of the solenoid cover 2115; A ball receiving portion 3122c which is received by the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 and receives the game balls discharged from the hook portion 2113a of the general receiving member 2113, and received by the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200 Receive game balls released from And a general passage 3122d for guiding downward Te.

  Further, the back front lower decoration unit 3120 detects a game ball rolling in the first passage 3122 a by detecting the reception of the game ball to the first start opening 2101, and the second start opening sensor 3131, and the second Second starting opening sensor 3132 for detecting the reception of gaming balls into second starting opening 2102 by detecting gaming balls rolling in passage 3122b, gaming balls received by ball receiving portion 3122c, and general passage A general winning opening sensor 3233 is provided to detect acceptance of the gaming balls into the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 by detecting gaming balls rolling in the 3122 d. The game ball received by the ball receiving unit 3122c and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3133 is discharged downward through the general winning opening sensor 3133.

  Furthermore, the back lower front decoration unit 3120 is attached to the lower unit base 3122 at a position corresponding to the rear side of the first starting opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and further includes a magnetic detection sensor 3134 capable of detecting magnetism. The magnetism detection sensor 3134 can detect magnetism acting in the vicinity of the attacker unit 2100, and can detect fraudulent acts using a magnet or the like. In this example, the magnetic detection sensor 3134 is also provided at the upper rear position of the function display unit 1180 in the back front left decoration unit 3110, and the gate portion 2301 of the gate unit 2300 and the center part 2500 It is possible to detect the magnetism acting in the vicinity of the warp inlet 2504 to prevent the fraudulent action.

  Also, the lower back decoration unit 3120 is attached to the front side of the lower unit base 3122 and appropriately closes the front side of the first passage 3122a, the second passage 3122b, and the general passage 3122d to prevent the game balls from falling off. A passage cover 3125 is provided.

  The function display unit 1180 in the back front decoration unit 3100 has a shallow box-like function display front cover having a plurality of through holes formed in a shape resembling a building and penetrating in the front-rear direction, A function display board 1191 inserted from the rear side into the function display front cover and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, a function display back cover that covers the rear surface of the function display board 1191, and is attached to the back side of the function display front cover; Is equipped. The LEDs mounted on the function display board 1191 are made to face the player through the through holes of the function display front cover 3141.

  Each LED mounted on the front surface of the function display board 1191 in the function display unit 1180 is, similarly to the above, the gaming state display 1183, the first special symbol memory display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special A symbol display 1186, a second special symbol storage indicator 1187, an ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188, an ordinary symbol indicator 1189, and a round indicator 1190 are used.

  Specifically, the gaming state indicator 1183 is made up of one LED, and is for displaying a gaming state that changes when the gaming ball is hit into the gaming area 1100. The first special symbol storage indicator 1184 is composed of two LEDs and is for displaying the number of reservations regarding the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101. The first special symbol display 1185 is composed of eight LEDs and is for displaying a first special lottery result, which is drawn by receiving the game ball to the first starting opening 2101, as a first special symbol. Further, the second special symbol display 1186 is composed of eight LEDs and is for displaying the second special lottery result, which is drawn by the reception of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102, as a second special symbol. Also, the second special symbol storage indicator 1187 consists of two LEDs and is for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102.

  Furthermore, the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is made up of four LEDs for displaying the number of reservations regarding passage of the gate portion 2301 by the gaming ball. In addition, the normal symbol display 1189 is made of one LED and is for displaying an ordinary lottery result selected by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2301 as an ordinary symbol. Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 is configured to display the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" and consists of two LEDs. It is.

[2-8. Back-up production unit]
Subsequently, the back-up effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 162. FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled into main units and viewed from the front, and FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect units disassembled into main units and viewed after FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the back upper center unit in the back up rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the back upper center unit in the back up rendering unit as viewed from the rear FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the upper center unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper center unit viewed from the back of a military officer. Moreover, FIG. 156 is explanatory drawing which shows detachment | desorption of the 2nd raising / lowering decoration body in a back upper center unit. Further, FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper side unit in the back up rendering unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the back up side unit in the back rendering unit disassembled and viewed from behind FIG. Further, FIG. 159 is a front view for explaining the movement of the back upper center unit in the back-up effect unit, FIG. 160 is a front view for explaining the movement of the back upper center unit following FIG. It is a front view explaining the movement of a back upper center unit following. Further, FIG. 162 is a front view illustrating the movement of the back upper side unit in the back up effect unit.

  The back-up effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached above the opening 3010 b between the back-front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010 and the back wall 3010 a of the back box 3010. The back-up rendering unit 3200 includes a back-up center unit 3210 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction, a back-up side unit 3300 disposed on the left and right sides of the back-up center unit 3210, and a back-up center unit 3210 and And a back upper lens member 3202 mounted so as to project forward from the front surface of the back upper side unit 3300.

  In addition, the back-up effect unit 3200 is slidable (lifted) to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the back-up center unit 3210, which will be described in detail later, and a second effect image can be displayed A liquid crystal display device 3252 is provided.

  First, the back-up center unit 3210 in the back-up effect unit 3200 will be described. The back upper center unit 3210 in this example is supported so as to be separated in the lateral direction on the front side of the back upper center base 3212 attached to a predetermined position in the back box 3010 and the back upper center base 3212 and to extend vertically. A pair of cylindrical first shafts 3214, a plate-like main body 3216a supported so as to be able to move up and down by the pair of first shafts 3214, mounting parts 3216b extending forward from both left and right ends of the main body 3216a And a first slide base 3216 having rack gears 3216c extending in the vertical direction at the left and right ends thereof.

  In addition, the back upper center unit 3210 is attached to the attachment portion 3216 b of the first slide base 3216, and a first raising and lowering decorative body 3218 three-dimensionally imitating a part of the face (above the upper jaw) in a predetermined character; A pair of pinion gears 3220 disposed on the rear side of the back upper center base 3212 and engaged with the rack gear 3216c of the first slide base 3216 and supported so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction on the rear side of the back upper center base 3212 A pair of transmission gears 3222 meshing with the respective pinion gears 3220, a coupling shaft 3224 coupling the transmission gears 3222 together so as to be integrally rotatable, and a drive gear 3226 meshing with the transmission gear 3222 on one side (right side in front view) And a back top first drive motor 3228 for driving the drive gear 3226 to rotate.

  In addition, the back upper center unit 3210 includes a center cover 3230 attached to the rear side of the back upper center base 3212. A pair of pinion gears 3220 and a connecting shaft 3224 are rotatably supported by the center cover 3230, respectively. Further, a back top first drive motor 3228 is attached to the back surface of the back top center cover 3230 via a motor bracket 3232.

  In addition, the back upper center unit 3210 is mounted on the back upper second drive motor 3234 mounted on the back surface of the center cover 3230 so that the rotation axis protrudes to the front surface of the center cover 3230 and the rotation axis of the back upper second drive motor 3234 A drive gear 3236 fixed thereto, a driven gear portion 3238a meshing with the drive gear 3236, and a transmission gear portion 3238b which is integrally rotated with the driven gear portion 3238a and has a larger diameter than that of the driven gear portion 3238a And a first connecting pin 3238c projecting forward from a position slightly inward of the transmission gear portion 3238b, around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the center cover 3230 between the center cover 3230 and the back upper center base 3212. First gear member 3238 rotatably supported and transmission of first gear member 3238 The operating gear portion 3240a which meshes with the air portion 3238b and has the same diameter as the transmission gear portion 3238b and has a plurality of gear teeth aligned in the circumferential direction, and the radius of revolution of the first connection pin 3238c slightly inside the operating gear portion 3240a And a second gear member 3240 rotatably supported by the center cover 3230 and having a second connection pin 3240 b projecting forward from the position of the same radius.

  The first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240 in the back upper center unit 3210 are rotatably supported at substantially the same height, and the transmission gear is substantially centered on the back upper center unit 3210 in the left-right direction. The portion 3238 b and the actuating gear portion 3240 a are disposed and supported by the center cover 3230 so as to mesh with each other. Further, in the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240, the respective first connection pins 3238c and the second connection pins 3240b are perpendicular to the center of the rotation centers of the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240. The transmission gear portion 3238 b and the operation gear portion 3240 a are meshed with each other so as to be symmetrical with respect to the line.

  Furthermore, in the back upper center unit 3210, the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b of the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240 are slidably inserted and penetrated in the front-rear direction and extended in the left-right direction. A drive slide 3242 having a pair of slits 3242a and supported slidably in the vertical direction between the back upper center base 3212 and the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240, and the left and right ends of the drive slide 3242 And a slide support member 3244 slidably supported in cooperation with the back upper center base 3212.

  Further, the back upper center unit 3210 is spaced apart in the lateral direction at the front side of the first slide base 3216 supported by the first shaft 3214 on the front surface of the back upper center unit 3210 and extends vertically. And a plate-like second slide base 3248 supported so as to be vertically movable by the pair of second shafts 3246, and releasably supported on the front side of the second slide base 3248. And a second lifting decoration 3250 three-dimensionally imitating a different part (lower jaw) of the face of the same character as the first lifting decoration 3218, and a second lifting A second liquid crystal display device 3252 attached to the decorative body 3250 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image toward the front side The back upper center decoration member 3254 mounted in the upper front center of the back upper center base 3212 and imitating a rotating light, and the upper front surface of the back upper center base 3212 support the upper ends of the first shaft 3214 and the second shaft 3246 And a shaft presser 3256.

  Furthermore, the back upper center unit 3210 has a plurality of gear teeth arranged in a row on the outer periphery of the fan-shaped front end and meshes with the driven gear portion 3238 a of the first gear member 3238 and is rotatable to a predetermined position on the front surface of the center cover 3230 An assist gear 3258 is supported, and an assist spring 3260 is biased to rotate the assist gear 3258 in a direction in which the drive slide 3242 ascends via the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240. .

  A back upper center base 3212 in the back upper center unit 3210 holds a shaft holding portion 3212 a holding the lower ends of the first shaft 3214 and the second shaft 3246 on the front side, and shaft pressing the upper ends of the first shaft 3214 and the second shaft 3246 A shaft support 3212 b supported in cooperation with 3256 and to which a shaft presser 3256 is attached, and a rack gear 3216 c of the first slide base 3216 supported elevatingly by the first shaft 3214 in the longitudinal direction It has an opening 3212c which passes through, and a notch 3212d which is disposed at the center in the left-right direction and which is notched upward in a rectangular shape from the lower end.

  In the back upper center base 3212, the rack gear 3216c of the first slide base 3216 faces rearward from the opening 3212c, and the pinion gear 3220 meshes with the rack gear 3216c through the opening 3212c. In addition, the back upper center base 3212 is configured such that a second slide base 3248 disposed on the front side and supported by being able to be lifted and lowered by the second shaft 3246 is attached to the drive slide 3242 disposed on the rear side ing.

  The first slide base 3216 in the back upper center unit 3210 includes a detection piece 3216 d extending upward from the upper end of the main portion 3216 a, in addition to the main portion 3216 a, the attachment portion 3216 b, and the rack gear 3216 c. The detection piece 3216d of the first slide base 3216 is detected by a first elevation detection sensor 3262 attached to the back upper center base 3212, whereby the elevation position of the first slide base 3216 (first elevation decoration 3218) It is possible to detect (the rise position).

  The first raising / lowering decorative body 3218 in the back upper center unit 3210 is not shown in detail but a member forming the front side is formed to have translucency, and a plurality of LEDs are formed on the front side inside A mounted back upper and lower front decorative substrate is provided. Thereby, the first raising and lowering decorative body can be made to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the back upper and middle front decoration substrate.

  In addition, the drive slide 3242 in the back upper center unit 3210 includes a detection piece 3242 b extending upward from a predetermined position on the upper side, and this second detection piece 3242 b is attached to the predetermined position on the back upper center base 3212. By detecting by the elevation detection sensor 3264, it is possible to detect the elevation position (rising position) of the drive slide 3242 (second elevation decorative body 3250).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 156, the second slide base 3248 in the back upper center unit 3210 extends from the left and right ends outward in the left and right direction and a plate shaped fixed piece 3248a which is spaced apart in the up and down direction; A fixing hole 3248b formed in a substantially central lower portion of the direction and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 3248c disposed adjacent to the fixing hole 3248b and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The second slide base 3248 is configured such that four fixing pieces 3248a are inserted into fixing grooves 3250a formed on the rear surface of the second lifting and lowering decorative body 3250, respectively, and the second lifting and lowering to the fixing holes 3248b. The fixing claw 3250b of the decorative body 3250 is inserted from the upper side, and the second lifting and lowering decorative body 3250 can be suspended and supported by the fixing piece 3248a and the fixing hole 3248b. In the second slide base 3248, the locking claw 3250c of the second lifting and lowering decorative body 3250 is elastically inserted into the locking hole 3248c. In the back upper center unit 3210, the second moving decoration 3250 is prevented from moving upward relative to the second slide base 3248 by inserting the locking claw 3250c into the locking hole 3248c. The second slide base 3248 and the second lifting decoration 3250 can not be separated (locked) from each other.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the second raising / lowering decorative body 3250 in the back upper center unit 3210 is formed in a shape that simulates the mouth of a predetermined character in a front view, and the second liquid crystal A display 3252 is attached. Further, the second lifting and lowering decorative body 3250 has, on the rear surface side, a fixing groove 3250a into which the fixing piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 can be inserted and a fixing claw 3250b insertable from above into the fixing hole 3248b of the second slide base 3248 And a locking claw 3250c elastically insertable into the locking hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248 from the rear side. The fixing groove 3250a of the second raising and lowering decorative body 3250 is formed in a substantially L-shaped groove in a side view rising upward from the bottom of the opening opened rearward and fixed in the fixing groove 3250a. When the fixed piece 3248a is relatively moved upward after the piece 3248a is inserted, the fixed piece 3248a does not come backward. When the fixing piece 3248a does not come backward from the fixing groove 3250a, the locking claw 3250c is elastically inserted into the locking hole 3248c, and the locking claw is inserted into the locking hole 3248c. By inserting 3250c, the second slide base 3248 is prevented from moving relatively downward with respect to the second up-and-down decorative body 3250. As a result, the second slide base 3248 and the second lifting and lowering decoration 3250 can be separated (locked) from each other, and the second lifting and lowering decoration is released by releasing the locking by the locking claw 3250c. When the second slide base is moved relatively downward with respect to 3250, the fixing piece 3248a comes back from the fixing groove 3250a, and the second lifting and lowering decorative body 3250 and the second slide base 3248 are separated from each other. be able to. That is, the second lifting and lowering decorative body 3250 can be detachably supported on the second slide base 3248.

  In addition, although the second raising and lowering decorative body 3250 is not shown, it is provided with a back upper, middle and rear decoration substrate on the front surface of which a plurality of LEDs are mounted outside the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in the inside. The second up-and-down decoration 3250 can be made to emit light and be decorated by the upper, middle, and rear decoration substrates.

  The back-up center decoration member 3254 in the back-up center unit 3210 is formed in a shape that simulates a rotary lamp in a front view. Although the back upper center decoration member 3254 is not shown in detail, it is formed in a shape imitating a rotary light and has a translucent surface member and a back opening of the surface member to close the back upper center base 3212. A base member to be attached, a reflector which is disposed between the base member and the surface member and which is conically inclined so as to be positioned rearward as it goes downward, and whose front surface is formed like a mirror surface; And a back upper middle upper decoration substrate in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in an arc shape facing upward. The back upper center decorative member 3254 is configured such that light from the LED mounted upward on the back upper middle upper decoration substrate is reflected forward by the reflector. In addition, the back upper center decoration member 3254 can perform light emission decoration such that light is swirled in the surface member by sequentially emitting LEDs arranged in a circular arc shape, A light emitting decoration similar to that of a rotating light can be made.

  Furthermore, the back upper center unit 3210 is attached to the back upper center side decoration substrate 3266 attached to the upper left and right corners at the front of the center cover 3230 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front, and to the back side of the center cover 3230, Back top first drive motor 3228, back top second drive motor 3234, back top middle side decoration substrate 3266, back of first raising and lowering decoration body 3218 front middle decoration substrate, and back of second raising and lowering decoration body 3250 middle back A second liquid crystal relay substrate 3270 for relaying the connection between the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the peripheral control substrate 4010, for relaying the connection between the decorative substrate etc., and the motor drive substrate and the lamp drive substrate. And have.

  Next, the upper rear side unit 3300 in the upper rear effect unit 3200 will be described. The back upper side unit 3300 in this example is configured to be substantially symmetrical in the left-right direction, and will be described with the same reference numerals. The back upper side unit 3300 has a shallow box shape open on the front side and is mounted in the back box 3010, and the back upper side base 3302 so that the rotation shaft protrudes to the front side of the back upper side base 3302. Back side drive motor 3304 (3304L, 3304R) attached to the rear side, spur gear drive gear 3306 fixed to the rotation shaft of the back side drive motor 3304, and a large diameter meshing with the drive gear 3306 A driven gear portion 3308a and a transmitting gear member 3308 rotatably supported on the front side of the back upper side base 3302 having a transmitting pin 3308b projecting forward from a position slightly smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the driven gear portion 3308a. And.

  Further, in the back upper side unit 3300, a guide groove 3310a, a guide groove 3310a extending in a predetermined direction through which the transmission pin 3308b of the transmission gear member 3308 is slidably inserted, and which penetrates in the front-rear direction are formed. The drive link member 3310 having a plate-like action piece 3310b extending in the extending direction of 3310a and a disk-like base 3310c formed on one end side of the action piece 3310b, and fixed to the front face of the base 3310c of the drive link member 3310 A cylindrical shaft 3312a, a connecting portion formed at the tip of an arm 3312b three-dimensionally formed in a predetermined shape and extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the shaft 3312a from the tip of the shaft 3312a The first movable decorative body 3312 having a 3312 c and the shaft 3312 a of the first movable decorative body 3312 can be rotated. And a, a decorative cover 3314 which covers the front surface of the disposed back on the side base 3302 between the first movable decorative body 3312 and the driving link member 3310 while lifting.

  Furthermore, the back upper side unit 3300 is rotatably supported at its predetermined position on the front surface of the decorative cover 3314 at one end on an axis extending in the front-rear direction and the other end extends a predetermined amount in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. The rod-like arm member 3316 and the other end of the arm member 3316 have the base end rotatably supported, and rotatably coupled to the connecting portion 3312 c of the first movable decorative body 3312 at a position halfway to the tip And a second movable decorative body 3318 having a three-dimensional predetermined external shape, and a back upper side decoration substrate disposed between the decoration cover 3314 and the back upper side base 3302 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface And 3320 and a back upper side lower side decoration substrate 3322.

  The drive link member 3310 of the back upper side unit 3300 is rotatably supported by the decorative cover 3314 via the shaft portion 3312 a of the first movable decorative body 3312. The drive link member 3310 includes a detection piece 3310 d extending outward from a predetermined position of the action piece 3310 b, and the back upper side rotation detection sensor 3324 has the detection piece 3310 d attached to the back upper side base 3302. Thus, the rotational position of the first movable decorative body 3312 or the second movable decorative body 3318 can be detected through the drive link member 3310 by being detected.

  In the upper back side unit 3300, the first movable decorative body 3312 is formed in a shape imitating the forearm of a predetermined character in a three-dimensional manner, and the second movable decorative body 3318 is a nozzle of a household cleaner. A predetermined character's hand is formed on a portion to be imitated and connected to the connecting portion 3312c of the first movable decorative body 3312, and the nozzle of the cleaner is formed by the first movable decorative body 3312 and the second movable decorative body 3318 The arm with the is to be formed. In addition, the arm member 3316 is formed in the shape which imitated the hose of the vacuum cleaner.

  Also, although the first movable decorative body 3312 of the back upper side unit 3300 is not shown in detail, the surface member has translucency, and the back upper side first decoration in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted inside A substrate is provided so that the first movable decorative body 3312 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. Moreover, although the detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the member of the surface has translucency, and the 2nd movable decoration 3318 is equipped with the back upper side 2nd decoration board by which several LED was mounted in the inside. The second movable decorative body 3318 can be appropriately decorated to emit light.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back-up effect unit 3200 will be described. In the back-up effect unit 3200 of this example, as shown in FIG. 159, in the normal state, the back-up center unit 3210 is at the rising position where the first lifting and lowering decoration 3218 and the second lifting and lowering decoration 3250 are rising ends. It is located at a retracted position where the first movable decorative body 3312 and the second movable decorative body 3318 respectively disposed on the left and right of the back upper side unit 3300 are apart from each other and the arms are open. ing. In this normal state, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 provided in the second raising and lowering decoration 3250 is partially visible from the lower side of the first raising and lowering decoration 3218.

  More specifically, in this normal state, the pinion gear 3220 meshes with the pinion gear 3220 near the lower end of the rack gear 3216c extending in the vertical direction in the first slide base 3216 of the back upper center unit 3210. Also, in a direction in which the first connecting pin 3238 c and the second connecting pin 3240 b of the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240 in the back upper center unit 3210 are separated from each other from the substantially rising end (top dead center) The first connection pin 3238 c and the second connection pin 3240 b are in contact with the outer end of the slit 3242 a of the drive slide 3242 respectively. Thereby, a downward force acts on the first connection pin 3238 c and the second connection pin 3240 b via the second slide base 3248 and the drive slide 3242 by the load of the second raising / lowering decorative body 3250 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Thus, even if the first connection pin 3238c and the second connection pin 3240b try to move away from each other, the first connection pin 3238c and the second connection pin 3240b abut on the outer end of the slit 3242a. One connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b can not move away from each other, and the state in which the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b stop rotating is maintained, and the back upper second drive A load is not applied to the motor 3234.

  On the other hand, in the normal state of the back upper side unit 3300, the transmission pin 3308b of the transmission gear member 3308 for rotating the drive link member 3310 extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide groove 3310a and rotates the transmission gear member 3308 It is located closer to the rotation center of the drive link member 3310 than the axis passing through the axis and is in contact with the proximal end of the guide groove 3310a. Thus, the load acting on the connecting portion 3312c side of the first movable decorative body 3312 causes a force to move the connecting portion 3312c relatively downward, acting on the first movable decorative body 3312, whereby the drive link member The force acting to rotate the transmission gear member 3308 acts on the action piece 3310b of the movement member 3310, and the force acts to revolve the transmission pin 3308b of the transmission gear member 3308 by the force. Since the pin 3308b is in contact with the proximal end of the guide groove 3310a, the transmission pin 3308b can not revolve and the rotation of the drive link member 3310 (first movable decorative body 3312) is blocked. Normal condition is maintained. Thus, in the normal state, no load is applied to the back and top side drive motor 3304.

  When the first gear member 3238 is rotationally driven to rotate clockwise in a front view by the back upper second drive motor 3234 from the normal state, the first gear member 3238 is The first connection pin 3238c starts to revolve clockwise in a front view, and the second connection pin 3240b of the second gear member 3240 rotates counterclockwise. The relative positions of the first connection pin 3238c and the second connection pin 3240b change with each other by revolving, so that they slide in the slit 3242a of the drive slide 3242 and at the same time the vertical position of the drive slide 3242 becomes It will change. In this example, when the drive slide 3242 (second raising and lowering decorative body 3250) slightly rises from the raised position until the first connection pin 3238c and the second connection pin 3240b reach the top dead center, and the top slide is exceeded. The drive slide 3242 will be lowered.

  Then, when the first connection pin 3238 c and the second connection pin 3240 b reach the bottom dead center, the drive slide 3242 (second raising and lowering decorative body 3250) is positioned at the lowest position and the back upper second drive motor 3234. Stop the rotational drive of In a state where the second raising and lowering decoration 3250 is located at the lowered position, as shown in FIG. 160, the head of a predetermined character composed of the first raising and lowering decoration 3218 and the second raising and lowering decoration 3250 has its mouth Of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be seen from the inside of the mouth to the player side.

  When the driving gear 3226 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction by the first back driving motor 3228 with the second raising / lowering decorative body 3250 of the back upper center unit 3210 positioned at the lowered position, the front view meshed with the driving gear 3226 As the transmission gear 3222 on the right side rotates, the transmission gear 3222 on the opposite side simultaneously rotates in the same direction simultaneously via the connection shaft 3224, and the pinion gears 3220 meshed with the respective transmission gears 3222 rotate. The first slide base 3216 (first raising and lowering decorative body 3218) slides downward from the raised position by the rack gear 3216c meshed with the first slide base 3216c. In the first slide base 3216, the first slide base 3216 slides smoothly without rattling since the first slide base 3216 is simultaneously moved up and down by the rack gear 3216c which is separated to the left and right.

  Then, when the first slide base 3216 reaches the lowering end, the back upper first drive motor 3228 is stopped, and the first raising / lowering decorative body 3218 is in the lowering position. In this state, the relative positional relationship between the first raising and lowering decorative body 3218 and the second raising and lowering decorative body 3250 is substantially the same as in the normal state, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is small from the mouth It becomes. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 161, the back upper center decoration member 3254 can be visually recognized from the player side on the upper side of the first elevation decoration 3218. In this state, the back upper center decoration member 3254 is By appropriately emitting the LEDs of the middle upper decorative substrate, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect such as a rotating light.

  In addition, in order to restore the normal state (state of the rising position), the first lifting and lowering decoration body 3218 and the second lifting and lowering decoration body 3250 may be returned to the lifting position by performing driving reverse to the above. it can. Further, in this example, due to its structure, it is not possible to place the first lifting and lowering decoration 3218 in the lowering position while the second lifting and lowering decoration 3250 is in the rising position.

  On the other hand, in the back-up side unit 3300 in the back-up effect unit 3200, as shown in FIG. 162A, in the normal state, the front end side (the connection portion 3312c side) of the first movable decorative body 3312 on the left and right is It is in a state of being away from each other, and a predetermined character is in a state of holding arms (nozzles) in both hands and spreading arms. In this normal state, the rear upper side drive motor 3304 of the rear upper side unit 3300 is driven to properly drive the drive gear 3306 (clockwise in front view, right direction in front view) When it is rotationally driven, the transmission gear member 3308 meshing with the drive gear 3306 is rotated, and the transmission pin 3308 b revolves around a predetermined radius.

  When the transmission pin 3308 b revolves, the relative position of the transmission pin 3308 b moves, so the transmission pin 3308 b slides in the guide groove 3310 a of the drive link member 3310 and is simultaneously pressed by the transmission pin 3308 b. The drive link member 3310 pivots so that the tip end side moves downward, and the first movable decorative body 3312 pivots together with the drive link member 3310.

  In the back upper side unit 3300, parallel links are formed by the first movable decorative body 3312, the second movable decorative body 3318, and the arm member 3316, and the front end side of the first movable decorative body 3312 (connecting portion 3312c side When the first movable decorative body 3312 is pivoted so as to move downward), the arm member 3316 is rotated in the same manner as the first movable decorative body 3312, while the second movable decorative body 3318 is directed in the same direction. It moves as if the position moves. Thereby, the 2nd movable decoration 3318 shown in Drawing 162 (b) approached each other from the state of a retreating position shown in Drawing 162 (a) in the 1st movable decoration 3312 and the 2nd movable decoration 3318 on either side. It will be in the state of the appearance position.

  In order to restore the first movable decorative body 3312, the second movable decorative body 3318, and the like to the normal state (state of the retracted position), the first movable decorative body 3312 and the second movable decorative body 3312 are The second movable decorative body 3318 or the like can be returned to the normal state.

  As described above, according to the back-up effect unit 3200 of this example, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is provided separately from the normal liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect image is displayed on two different display devices. The player can be presented with a completely different effect from the display effects so far, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, since the small second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be moved to the front of the large liquid crystal display device 1900, collaboration between the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the effect image of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is enjoyed It is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  In the back-up center unit 3210, the second lifting and lowering decorative body 3250 supporting the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is detachably supported to the second slide base 3248 which is driven to move up and down in the vertical direction. Therefore, even when a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second raising and lowering decorative body 3250) can be easily separated from the back upper center unit 3210 and replaced. The operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased by reducing the time and effort required for the pachinko machine 1, and when discarding the pachinko machine 1, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be easily removed, and the recyclability is enhanced. Pachinko machine 1 can be made friendly.

[2-9. Back down production unit]
Subsequently, the under-back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 163 to 180. FIG. 163 is a perspective view of the back down rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 164 is a perspective view of the back down rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the underside rendering unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the underside rendering unit disassembled for each main member and seen after FIG. Also, FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the lower back front unit in the lower back rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 168 is a perspective view of the lower back front unit in the lower back rendering unit as viewed from the rear FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the lower front unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front unit and the rear viewed. Further, FIG. 171 is a front view showing the lower back rendering unit in a normal state, and FIG. 172 is a front view showing the back lower front slider of the back lower front unit in the lower back rendering unit as it is partially raised. FIG. 173 is a front view showing a state in which the back and front slider of the back and front unit is raised to the rising end. Further, FIG. 174 is a front view showing the back lower back decoration in the back down rendering unit raised to the appearance position, and FIG. 175 is a state of FIG. 174 rotating the pointer member of the back back back decoration. It is a front view which shows the state made to be. Further, FIG. 176 is a front view showing the back bottom front slider of the back bottom front unit raised to the rising end and the back bottom back middle back with the decoration raised to the appearance position, and FIG. FIG. 178 is a front view showing the back and back side decoration in a state of being rotated to the appearance position, and FIG. 178 is a front view showing the back and back back and forth inside decoration in the state of FIG. FIG. 179 is a front view showing the back and front slider in the state of FIG. 178 in a state of being raised to the rising end. FIG. 180 is a front view showing the back lower front slider raised to the rising end in the state of FIG.

  The under-back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 of this example is mounted below the opening 3010 b between the back front decoration unit 3100 and the back wall 3010 a in the back box 3010.

  The lower back rendering unit 3400 is mounted in the back box 3010 and formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a substantially rectangular shape and the front view extends in the left-right direction, and a lower rotation unit base 3402 through which the rotation shaft is turned to the rear side. Back and rear side drive motor 3404 attached to a predetermined position (lower right corner in front view) of the front lower portion of back lower unit base 3402 so as to protrude and spur gear fixed to the rotation shaft of back and rear side drive motor 3404 Drive gear 3406, a small diameter first gear portion 3408a meshing with the drive gear 3406, and a second gear portion 3408b formed integrally on the rear surface of the first gear portion 3408a and having a diameter larger than the first gear portion 3408a And an intermediate gear 3408 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the lower back unit base 3402.

  In addition, the reverse-back effect unit 3400 has a transmission gear portion 3410a that meshes with the second gear portion 3408b of the intermediate gear 3408, and a first cam pin 3410b that protrudes rearward from a position slightly smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the transmission gear portion 3410a. A first cam gear 3410 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the lower unit base 3402, a driven gear portion 3412a engaged with the transmission gear portion 3410a of the first cam gear 3410 and having the same diameter as the transmission gear portion 3410a, a driven gear The second cam pin 3412b has a diameter slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the portion 3412a and protrudes backward from the same radius as the revolution radius of the first cam pin 3410b. It has the same height as the first cam gear 3410 on the rear surface of the lower unit base 3402 And a second cam gear 3412 rotatably supported. The first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 are supported on the rear surface side of the lower back unit base 3402 such that the centers of the axes connecting the respective rotation centers are substantially at the center of the lower back unit base 3402 in the left-right direction. It is done.

  In the reverse-back effect unit 3400, the first cam pin 3410b of the first cam gear 3410 is slidably inserted, and an elongated slit 3414a and a slit 3414a extending in a predetermined direction are formed and the slit 3414a extends. First link member having a strip-like operating piece 3414b extending to one side and a cylindrical shaft 3414c formed on the base end side extending long from the slit 3414a of the operating piece 3414b and extending in the front-rear direction 3414, a second cam pin 3412b of a second cam gear 3412 is slidably inserted, and an elongated slit 3416a and a slit 3416a extending in a predetermined direction are formed, and the slit 3416a is elongated and extends to one side in the extending direction of the slit 3416a. Strip plate-like action piece 3416 b and slit 3416 a of action piece 3416 b long A second link member 3416 having a cylindrical shaft portion 3416c extending in the front-rear direction are formed in the micro broth proximal end side, and a. The first link member 3414 includes a detection piece 3414 d extending in a plate shape in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the shaft portion 3414 c.

  Furthermore, the under-back effect unit 3400 has a pair of under-rear-side decorative bodies 3420 (3420L, 3420R) rotatably supported around axes extending in the front-rear direction near the left and right corners of the upper front of the under-back unit base ). The pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420 extend in a substantially arc shape along a surface extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis, and each is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape. More specifically, the lower back rear side decoration 3420 has a longitudinally extending support pin 3422 rotatably supported at a predetermined position of the lower back unit base 3402, and a support pin 3422 from the front end side of the support pin 3422. A translucent main body 3424 having a substantially arc shape extending along a plane extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis and having a three-dimensional predetermined shape, and a rear side of the decorative body 3424 A lens sheet (not shown) capable of diffusing light, and a back rear side decoration substrate 3426 disposed on the rear side of the lens sheet and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  The pair of back lower back side decorations 3420 are back at a position where the support pins 3422 are substantially symmetrical with respect to a vertical line passing through the center of the axis connecting the rotation centers of the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412. Shaft portions of the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 are supported at the rear end of the support pin 3422 which is rotatably supported by the lower unit base 3402 and extends backward through the back lower unit base 3402. 3414c and 3416c are respectively fixed. That is, the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 are rotatably supported by the lower back unit base 3402 via the support pins 3422 of the lower back rear side decoration 3420, respectively. In addition, when the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 are rotated (turned), the back lower back side decoration 3420 is also rotated. The support pins 3422 of the back bottom side decoration 3420 are rotatably supported by the back bottom unit base 3402 via the bushes 3428.

  In addition, the back-rear effect unit 3400 is a plate-like protection plate 3430 attached to the upper left and right corners on the front surface of the back-bottom unit base 3402 and in which part of the back surface of the back-rear side decoration 3420 can slide. And a lower back side rotation detection sensor 3432 attached to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the lower back unit base 3402 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3414d of the first link member 3414. In this example, by detecting the detection piece 3414d of the first link member 3414 by the back lower back side rotation detection sensor 3432, it is possible to detect the rotation position of the back lower back side decoration 3420. There is.

  Furthermore, the under-back effect unit 3400 supports the under-back and back-middle decorative body 3450 disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the under-back unit base 3402 and the back-back back and under back decorative member 3450 in the vertical direction. A front end is connected to a lower front surface of the lower back rear inner decorative body 3450 supported by a pair of guide shafts 3470 arranged in the left-right direction at the center of the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402 and a pair of guide shafts 3470 An arm portion 3472a whose base end extends to the outside (left side in front view) to one lateral outside (right side in front view) of the pair of guide shafts 3470, and a spur gear gear portion integrally formed on the base end side of the arm portion 3472a 3472b and a plate-shaped detection piece 3472c extending outward beyond the gear portion 3472b, and can be rotatably backed around the axial center of the gear portion 3472b An elevation arm member 3472 supported on the front of the knit base 3402, a drive gear 3474 engaged with the gear portion 3472b of the elevation arm member 3472 and disposed on the rear side of the lower unit base 3402 and a drive gear 3474 And a back and forth middle drive motor 3476 attached to the front side of the back unit base 3402 so as to be fixed and extend rearwardly through the back unit base 3402.

  In addition, the under-back effect unit 3400 is attached to the lower front of the under-back unit base 3402 and cooperates with the under-back unit base 3402 to hold a lower end of the guide shaft 3470 and a front surface of the under-back unit base 3402 Lower back-and-forth raising / lowering detection sensor 3480 attached to the predetermined position of the lift arm member 3472 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3472 c of the lift arm member 3472 and the gear portion 3472 b of the lift arm member 3472 rotate on the front of the back lower unit base 3402 An intermediate gear 3482 in the form of a spur gear which can be supported, an assist gear 3484 which is fan-shaped in mesh with the intermediate gear 3482 and rotatably supported on the front of the lower back unit base 3402 and lifts the assist gear 3484 The tip of the arm portion 3472a of the arm member 3472 moves upward Includes an assist spring 3486 for urging to rotate the direction.

  Furthermore, the underside effect unit 3400 is attached to the back side of the underside unit base 3402, and the underside back side drive motor 3404, the underside back side side rotation detection sensor 3432, the underside pointer drive motor 3460, the underside back middle Connection of drive motor 3476, back bottom back middle rise detection sensor 3480, back bottom front drive motor 3508, and back bottom front rise detection sensor 3544 and motor drive substrate 3045, back bottom side decoration board 3426, back bottom back middle A decoration substrate 3456, a back lower front side decoration substrate 3536, and a back lower relay substrate 3488 for relaying the connection between the back lower front middle decoration substrate 3546 and the lamp driving substrate 3041 are provided.

  A back long bottom rectangular base 3452a supported by a pair of guide shafts 3470 so as to be lifted and lowered by a pair of guide shafts 3470, and a support extending vertically upward from the upper side of the base 3452a. A plate-like slider base 3452 having 3452 b, a translucent decorative body 3454 attached to the front surface of the support portion 3452 b of the slider base 3452 and having a polygonal outer shape, and a decorative body 3454 And a support portion 3452 b of the slider base 3452 and capable of diffusing light (not shown), and a plurality of lens units disposed between the sheet lens and the support portion 3452 b of the slider base 3452 on the front surface The back and forth back and inside decoration board 3456 in which LED was mounted are provided.

  In addition, a pointer member 3458 which is disposed on the front of the main body 3454 and has a proximal end rotatably supported at the center of the main body 3454 and an outer shape formed in the shape of an arrow, An under-back pointer drive motor 3460 is mounted on a predetermined position of the slider base 3452 so as to rotationally drive the pointer member 3458 about its proximal end. Although not shown in detail, the lower back pointer driving motor 3460 is arranged such that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction, and a worm gear is fixed to the rotation axis, and further meshes with the worm gear. The rotational drive is transmitted via a plurality of gears such as spur gears, and the pointer member 3458 is rotated.

  In addition, the back bottom back middle decoration 3450 is a base 3452a of the slider base 3452, it can hold the tip of the arm portion 3472a of the raising and lowering arm member 3472 slidably in the left and right direction guide hole 3452c extending in the left and right direction Is equipped. The slider base 3452 and the lifting and lowering arm member 3472 are connected by inserting the end of the arm portion 3472 a of the lifting and lowering arm member 3472 into the guide hole 3452 c of the slider base 3452.

  The under-back effect unit 3400 is disposed on the front side relative to the under-back rear side decoration 3420, the under-back back inner decoration 3450, the lift arm member 3472, the drive gear 3474 and the like, and is attached to the front of the under-back unit base 3402 A back lower front unit 3500 is further provided. The lower back front unit 3500 is attached to the front of the lower back unit base 3402 and is disposed at a pair of slits 3502a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the front-rear direction at the center in the left-right direction The back bottom front base 3502 having the contact portion 3502 b, and the front face of the back bottom front base 3502 is slidably supported in the vertical direction by a pair of slits 3502 a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape in a vertically long shape A rack gear 3504a formed to extend in the vertical direction on both left and right side surfaces, and a back lower front slider 3504 having a guide hole 3504b extending in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front and rear direction at the center in the left and right direction; It is attached to the upper front of the three-dimensional imitation of a predetermined character along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 A subplantar before in ornamental body 3506 having light resistance, and a.

  The back and front slider 3504 of the back and front unit 3500 extends laterally outward from the rear end of the rack gear 3504a at the left and right ends and extends in the vertical direction. A cylindrical guide boss inserted into the slit 3502a of the back base 3502 and a detection piece 3504e extending further outward in the left and right direction from the lower end of one guide piece 3504d and one (right in front) guide piece 3504d And 3504 f. In addition, in the back and front slider 3504, a plurality of through holes penetrating in the front and back direction are formed at a portion to which the back and front back inner decoration 3506 is attached. The back support front slider 3504 is supported slidably in the vertical direction by the slit 3502 a by inserting the guide boss 3504 f into the slit 3502 a of the back support front base 3502 via the bush 3507.

  In addition, the back bottom front unit 3500 is mounted so that the rotation axis penetrates the back bottom front base 3502 and protrudes forward in the vicinity of one end (right side in front view) of the back face of the back bottom front base 3502 It is rotatably supported on the front of the back lower front base 3502 by meshing with the drive gear 3510 in the form of a spur gear fixed to the back lower front drive motor 3508 and the rotation shaft of the back lower front drive motor 3508, and the drive gear 3510 Intermediate gear 3512 meshes with rack gear 3504a of one of the back lower front sliders 3504 slidably supported by the intermediate gear 3512 and the back lower front base 3502 (right side in front view) and can be rotated to the front of the back lower front base 3502 And an operating gear 3514 supported by the

  Further, the back front unit 3500 meshes with the other rack gear 3504 a of the back front slider 3504 slidably supported by the back front base 3502 and rotatably supported on the front surface of the back front base 3502. Driven gear 3516, a transmission gear 3518 engaged with the driven gear 3516 and rotatably supported on the front surface of the back lower front base 3502, a transmission gear 3518 meshed with the transmission gear 3518, and formed of the back lower front base 3502 An assist gear 3520 rotatably supported on the front surface, and an assist spring 3522 biasing the assist gear 3520 so that the back lower slider 3504 slides upward is provided. Although not shown in detail, the transmission gear 3518 has a large diameter first gear portion meshing with the driven gear 3516, and a small diameter second gear portion rotating integrally with the first gear portion and meshing with the assist gear 3520. And have.

  Also, the back lower front unit 3500 is slidably supported in the vertical direction by the guide holes 3504 b on the front surface of the back lower front slider 3504, and is a pair of right and left extending upper and lower ends disposed on both left and right sides across the center in the left and right directions. A long hole 3524a, a locking portion 3524b formed at a predetermined position on the rear surface, and a guide hole 3504b of the rear lower front slider 3504 can be projected backward from the lower end of the rear surface and the rear front base 3502 The lower end is locked by the vertically long movable slider 3524 having a projection 3524c which can be abutted from below with respect to the contact portion 3502b, and the locking portion 3524b of the movable slider 3524 and the back slider 3504 is locked The driving spring 352, whose upper end is locked to the portion 3504c, urges the movable slider 3524 in the direction of the upper side of the back lower front slider 3504. It has a, and.

  Further, the back and front unit 3500 is disposed on both sides of the movable slider 3524 between the back and front inner decoration 3506 and the back and front slider 3504 so as to be slidable into one guide hole 3504 b of the movable slider 3524. It has a slide pin 3532 inserted, is rotatably supported by the back and front slider 3504 at a position outside the slide pin 3532 in the left and right direction, and its tip end side is laterally outward from the back and front slider 3504 It has a pair of back lower front side decorations 3530 whose extension appearance is formed in a wing shape. The back underside front side decoration is provided with a light transmitting decorative main body 3534 having a sliding pin 3532 on the base end side and an appearance formed like a wing, and light is disposed on the rear side of the decorative main body 3534 A diffuse sheet lens (not shown) and a back lower front side decoration substrate 3536 disposed on the rear side of the sheet lens and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  Further, the back lower front unit 3500 is capable of coming into contact with the left and right guide pieces 3504 d of the back lower front slider 3504 and is rotatably supported at a predetermined position on the front top of the back lower front base 3502. A roller press 3542 that prevents the 3540 from coming off the back bottom front base 3502, and a back bottom elevation sensor that is attached to a predetermined position on the front face of the back bottom front base 3502 and can detect the detection piece 3504e of the back bottom front slider 3504 A back-and-front and inside decorative substrate 3546 is mounted on the top of the back surface of the back-bottom front slider 3504 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The LEDs of the back bottom front inside decoration substrate 3546 are provided at the positions corresponding to the through holes of the back bottom front slider 3504, and light emitting decoration of the back bottom front inside decoration 3506 disposed on the front side through the through holes. It can be done. In addition, the code | symbol 3548 in the figure is a cable presser for pressing down the flexible flat cable (FFC) which connects the decoration board 3546 for back bottom front, and the back bottom relay board 3488.

  Next, the movement of the lower back rendering unit 3400 in this example will be described. Under normal conditions, as shown in FIG. 171, a pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420 spaced apart in the lateral direction and extending in an arc shape are directed in the direction in which their respective tips are separated from each other. It is in a rotated state. In this state, the lower back rear side decoration 3420 is positioned to the left and right outside of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (in the retracted position), and the left lower back rear decoration 3420 functions as a center. It is hidden behind the object 2500 and the back front decoration unit 3100 and hardly visible from the player side.

  In addition, the back bottom back decoration unit 3450 in the back bottom rendering unit 3400 is lowered downward and hidden behind the back bottom front unit 3500 (in the retracted position), and in this state the liquid crystal display It is located lower than the front of the device 1900 and hardly visible to the player.

  Further, the back lower front inner decoration 3506 and the pair of back lower front side decorations 3530 of the back lower front unit 3500 in the lower back rendering unit 3400 are respectively located at the falling end, and the pair of back lower front side decorations are The distal end side of the 3530 is lower than the proximal end side. In this state, each of the back lower front inner decoration 3506 and the pair of back lower front side decorations 3530 is positioned lower than the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (in the retracted position), It is almost invisible from the person's side.

  More specifically, in the normal state of the underside rendering unit 3400, the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 for rotating the left and right underside back side decoration 3420 are respectively relative to the rotation axis. The action pieces 3414 b and 3416 b are in the rotational position so as to extend obliquely upward. In this state, the first cam pins 3410 b and the second cam pins 3412 b of the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 inserted into the slits 3414 a and 3416 a of the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 have While being at the top dead center, the first cam pin 3410 b and the second cam pin 3412 b are in contact with the distal end of the slits 3414 a and 3416 a.

  In this normal state, even if the force that causes the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 to rotate due to the weight of the lower back rear side decoration 3420 acts on the first cam pin 3410 b and the second cam pin 3412 b, The first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b act to move the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b toward the distal end side of the slits 3414a and 3416a, so the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b are the tips of the slits 3414a and 3416a. Since it abuts on the side end, revolution of the first cam pin 3410 b and the second cam pin 3412 b is prevented. As a result, the back bottom back side decoration 3420 can be maintained in a normal state without applying a load to the back bottom back side drive motor 3404. In the normal state, the detection piece 3414d of the first link member 3414 is in a state detected by the back lower back side rotation detection sensor 3432.

  Further, in the back and back back and in back decoration 3450 in the normal state, the tip of the arm portion 3472 a of the lifting and lowering arm member 3472 slidably connected to the guide hole 3452 c of the slider base 3452 in the back and back back and back decoration 3450 Is extended obliquely downward from the rotation center. In this example, in this state, the biasing force of the assist spring 3486 acts on the lift arm member 3472 in a direction in which the tip end side of the arm portion 3472a is lifted. In the normal state, the detection piece 3472c of the lift arm member 3472 is in a state where it is detected by the back lower back middle rise detection sensor 3480.

  Furthermore, in the back bottom front unit 3500 in the normal state, the back bottom front slider 3504 is positioned at the lowering end, and the movable slider 3524 supported by the back bottom front slider 3504 so as to be capable of lifting is a driving spring 3526 It is located at a position relatively raised with respect to the back and front slider 3504 by the biasing force. In this state, the pair of long holes 3524a of the movable slider 3524 are located above the rotation center of the back lower front side decoration 3530, and the sliding of the back lower front side decoration 3530 inserted in the long hole 3524a By the pin 3532, the front end side of the back lower front side decoration 3530 is in a state of being lowered downward.

  From this normal state, when the drive gear 3510 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction in front view) by the back lower front drive motor 3508 of the back lower front unit 3500, rotation is performed via the intermediate gear 3512. The back lower front slider 3504 is slid upward by the rack gear 3504a which is transmitted to 3514 and engaged with the operation gear 3514. Since the positional relationship between the back lower front slider 3504 and the movable slider 3524 does not change even if the back lower front slider 3504 ascends, the tip side of the pair of back lower front side decorative bodies 3530 is lowered as in the normal state. In this state, the whole is lifted with the back and front slider 3504 (see FIG. 172).

  When the back lower front slider 3504 ascends to a certain extent, the projection 3524 c of the movable slider 3524 supported by the back lower front slider 3504 abuts on the contact portion 3502 b of the back lower front base 3502 to prevent the movable slider 3524 from rising. Will be Then, when the back bottom front drive motor 3508 is driven so that the back bottom front slider 3504 is further raised in a state where the movable slider 3524 is prevented from rising by the abutment portion 3502b of the back bottom front base 3502, the back bottom front The slider 3504 is further raised against the biasing force of the drive spring 3526. As a result, the relative position between the back lower front slider 3504 and the movable slider 3524 changes in the vertical direction, and the long hole 3524 a of the movable slider 3524 moves downward of the rotation center of the back lower front side decoration 3530 By doing this, the back lower front side decoration 3530 is pivoted in the direction in which the tip end side rises (see FIG. 173).

  When the back bottom front slider 3504 of the back bottom front unit 3500 rises to the rising end, as shown in FIG. 173, the pair of back bottom front side decorations 3530 pivots to a position where the tip side extends obliquely upward. A predetermined character imitated by the back and front back decoration 3506 is in a state in which the wings are spread. In this state, the back lower front inner decoration 3506 and the pair of back lower front side decorations 3530 are moved from the lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the front (state of appearance position), and can be sufficiently viewed from the player. become able to. In addition, by performing reverse driving to the above, it is possible to restore the back-to-back front middle decoration 3506 and the pair of back-to-back front side decorations 3530 to a normal state.

  On the other hand, when the drive gear 3474 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction in front view) by the drive motor 3476 from the normal state, the lifting arm member 3472 is engaged with the drive gear 3474 by the gear portion 3472 b. However, the tip end side of the arm portion 3472a is turned so as to be lifted, and it is pushed by the tip end of the arm portion 3472a so that the back decoration 3450 can be raised. Then, in a state where the back bottom back middle decoration 3450 is positioned at the rising end, a state where the decoration main body 3454 of the back bottom back middle decoration 3450 is positioned from the lower side to the front side than the liquid crystal display device 1900 State) and can be viewed by the player (see FIG. 174).

  The back bottom rear middle decoration 3450 is placed on the front of the main body 3454 when the back bottom pointer drive motor 3460 is appropriately rotated and driven in the state of rising to the rising end (the state of the appearance position). An arrow-shaped pointer member 3458 can be rotated like a clock hand (see FIG. 175). In addition, by performing the drive reverse to the above, it is possible to restore the back-and-back middle decoration 3450 to a normal state.

  In addition, when the back lower front slider 3504 of the back lower front unit 3500 is raised to the rising end (appearing position) in the state where the back decoration back 3450 is raised to the rising end (state of the appearance position), A back-to-back front inside decoration 3506 and a pair of back-to-front front side decorations 3530 are positioned on the front side of the back-to-back decoration 3450 so as to hide the back-back back-to-back decoration 3450 ( See Figure 176).

  Furthermore, when the drive gear 3406 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction in front view) by the lower back side drive motor 3404 from the normal state, the first cam gear 3410 moves in the same direction via the intermediate gear 3408. Simultaneously with the rotation, the second cam gear 3412 rotates in the reverse direction. In this example, the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 rotate such that the first cam pins 3410 b and the second cam pins 3412 b of the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 respectively revolve in a direction away from each other. .

  Then, the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 rotate respectively, whereby the first cam pin 3410 b and the second cam pin 3412 b located at the top dead center revolve in the direction of the bottom dead center. The first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b slide in the slits 3414a and 3416a, and are pushed by the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b so that the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 respectively function the action piece 3414b. , 3416b in the downward direction, and the left and right back lower side decoration 3420 rotate in the same direction as the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416, respectively.

  Then, by stopping the rotation of the back lower back side drive motor 3404 so that the tips of the left and right back lower back side decoration 3420 abut each other, a pair of back lower back side decorations formed in a substantially arc shape Body 3420 is now in a state of ringing together (see FIG. 177). In this state, the pair of back lower back side decorations 3420 are moved from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the front (the state of the appearance position), and can be sufficiently viewed by the player. In addition, by performing the drive reverse to the above, the back and bottom back side decoration 3420 can be returned to the normal state.

  In the under-back effect unit 3400 of this example, the under-back back-and-back decorative body 3450 is raised and the back-back back-side decoration body 3420 is pivoted to be positioned at the ring-shaped appearance position. When placed on the back side, the inside of the pair of back and back side decorations 3420 becomes like being buried by the back and back inside decoration 3450, and it becomes like the appearance of a large decoration. (See Figure 178). As a result, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In the state in which the back decoration 3450 is raised to the appearance position first, the back decoration 3420 may be turned to the appearance position in the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible to perform such a movable effect that the decorative body gradually increases in size.

  Also, with the pair of back side back side decoration 3420 and the back side back middle back decoration 3450 being positioned at the appearance position, the back side front slider 3504 is raised to their front side, back side back middle A decorative body 3506 and a back lower front side decorative body 3530 may be made to appear, and an annular back lower back side decorative body 3420 located on the back side of the back lower front inner decorative body 3506 and the back lower front side decorative body 3530 As a result, the back lower front middle decoration 3506 and the back lower front side decoration 3530 can be made to stand out (see FIG. 179). In addition, in this case, the back, bottom, back, and inside decoration 3450 may be in the state of the retracted position which is the normal state (see FIG. 180).

  As described above, according to the back down rendering unit 3400 of this example, a variety of movable effects can be performed, and the player can be entertained and can not easily get bored, and the interest for the player's game decreases. Can be suppressed.

[2-10. Jackpot mode determination effect unit]
Next, the back lower right rendering unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 181 to 185. FIG. 181 is a front view of the back lower right rendering unit, and FIG. 182 is a front view of the jackpot determination effect device that constitutes the back lower right rendering unit. Further, FIG. 183 is a plan view of the jackpot mode determination effect device, and FIG. 184 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in FIG. Further, FIG. 185 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 182, and shows the flow of gaming balls.

  The lower right lower rendering unit 3600 of the lower unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached from the lower right corner to the right side of the opening 3010 b in a front view of the lower box 3010. The back lower right rendering unit 3600 is provided with a jackpot mode determining rendering device 3610 to which the gaming ball having passed the left gate 2575L is led. The jackpot mode determination effect device 3610 determines which one of 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds and 15 rounds of jackpot games to be performed, and also displays this determined moment as an effect image It functions, and the left gate passage ball passage 3620, the clune 3630, the stage 3640 formed between the left gate passage ball passage 3620 and the clune 3630, the left gate passage ball discharge passage 3650, and the big hit aspect determination A gate 3660, a jackpot determination gate detection sensor 3665, and a mini liquid crystal display 3670 are provided. The clune 3630 and the stage 3640 are housed in the case body 3615, and the case body 3615, the left gate passage ball passage 3620, the clune 3630, the stage 3640 and the left gate passage ball discharge passage 3650 are all made of transparent resin. It is done.

  The left gate passage ball passage 3620 is a passage through which the game ball having passed the left gate 2575L can roll, and the depth direction passage 3621 for guiding the game ball having passed the left gate 2575L backward as viewed from the player It has a height direction passage 3622 which communicates with the direction passage 3621 and guides the gaming balls rolled on the depth direction passage 3621 downward. The gaming balls guided to the height direction passage 3622 are released to the stage 3640. The gaming balls released to the stage 3640 drop into the clone 3630 immediately or after rolling left and right on the stage 3640. Only one hole 3632 is formed in the clone 3630, and the game ball can roll around the hole 3632. Between the stage 3640 and the hole 3632, a weir plate 3634 is provided upright so that the gaming ball dropped from the clone 3630 does not immediately fall from the hole 3632.

  The gaming balls dropped from the stage 3640 to the clone 3630 roll around the holes 3632 and drop from the holes 3632 when the momentum of the rolling disappears. A jackpot mode determination gate 3660 and a jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 for detecting that the gaming ball has passed through the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 are provided immediately below the hole 3632. The jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 is activated based on the game ball having passed the left gate 2575L. Then, when the game ball is detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 when the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 is activated, out of the 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds and 15 rounds of jackpot games It is determined which is to be performed. The jackpot determination gate detection sensor 3665 is not activated, such as when the condition device is not operating or when the gaming ball has not yet been detected by the route detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580R) although the condition device has been activated Sometimes, even if the game ball passes the jackpot mode decision gate 3660, the decision of the jackpot game mode (determination of which of the 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds and 15 rounds of jackpot games to execute) is It does not happen.

  The mini liquid crystal display 3670 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the clune 3630 so that the effect image displayed in the display area of the mini liquid crystal display 3670 and the mode in which the gaming ball falls the clune 3630 can be viewed simultaneously. ing. Although not shown, a mini liquid crystal display control device for controlling the display effect displayed on the display area of the mini liquid crystal display 3670 is disposed behind the mini liquid crystal display 3670. Although details will be described later, in the mini liquid crystal display 3670, for example, 15 rounds of jackpot games are expected to be executed based on the fact that the game ball passes the left gate 2575 and is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L. Display effects are performed. Then, based on the game ball passing through the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 and being detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, any of 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds and 15 rounds of jackpot games will be executed It will be decided.

  As described above, when the gaming ball driven toward the game area 1100 is guided to the left route (the route toward the left gate 2575L), the gaming ball passes the left gate passage ball passage 3620, the clone 3630 and the stage 3640. After rolling, it passes through the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 and is detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, and a jackpot game to be executed is determined. Therefore, until the game ball led to the left route passes the jackpot determination gate 3660 in order to secure the execution time of the display effect in the mini liquid crystal display 3670 for the left gate passage ball passage 3620, the clone 3630 and the stage 3640. Function as a delay means for delaying the time of

  However, if it takes time for the game ball led to the left route to pass through the jackpot mode determination gate 3660, between the game ball passing through the left gate 2575L and the jackpot mode determination gate 3660, Another game ball may be led to the right route (route toward the right gate 2575R). Therefore, although details will be described later, when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L, the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580R is invalidated even if the game ball passes the right gate 2575R. . Thereby, another game ball is led to the right route and passes the right gate 2575R while the game ball passes the left gate 2575L and passes the jackpot determination gate 3660. It becomes possible to prevent being determined to be a game.

[2-11. Liquid Crystal Display Device]
Subsequently, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. This liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from the left and right sides as shown in FIG. 119 and FIG. 120 etc., and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing pieces 1902 It is supposed to be.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010 d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010 a of the back box 3010, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 protrudes from the right side in front view After the two fixing pieces 1902 are inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing parts 3010 e on the left side of the back box 3010 in the back view, the opposite fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the locking mechanism 3050. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3050 downward and closing the insertion port.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 118 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 accommodating the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 188) and the like and a lower portion of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By appropriately rotating the volume 1912 in the direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the lower speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3, etc. It has become.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light brightness white LED as a backlight.

[2-12. Moveable production on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 186 and FIG. FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back-up effect unit. Further, FIG. 187 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the lower back rendering unit. In the gaming board 4 of this example, as shown in FIG. 114 and the like, in the normal state, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the player side through the window 2501 It is supposed to be.

  In addition, in the gaming board 4, in the normal state, the first raising and lowering decorative body 3218 and the second raising and lowering decorative body 3250 in the back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1900 are on the player side. It is visible from the In the back-up effect unit 3200, in the normal state, the lower part of the second lifting and lowering decorative body 3250 is disposed so as to slightly overlap the upper front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this normal state, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 provided in the second raising and lowering decoration 3250 is partially visible from the lower side of the first raising and lowering decoration 3218.

  As shown in FIG. 114 and the like, in the normal state, the pair of back lower back side decorations 3420 in the back lower rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are on the left and right outside of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the back front decoration unit. It is located behind the receiving unit 2550 of the center character 2500 and the back lower right rendering unit 3600, and can not be seen from the player side. Also, in the normal state, the back bottom back middle decoration 3450 in the back bottom rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, and the back bottom front middle decoration 3506 and the back bottom front side decoration 3530 are lower than the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is located on the rear side of the decoration member that decorates the rear side of the stage 2510 in the center character 2500 and is invisible from the player side.

  When the game board 4 of this example is moved from the normal state, for example, by driving the back upper second drive motor 3234 of the back upper effect unit 3200 to the lowest lowered position shown in FIG. 186, As shown in the figure, the second lifting and lowering decorative body 3250 is positioned at the upper front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the entire display screen of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is on the player side below the first lifting and lowering decoration body 3218. It will be visible from In this state, the head of a predetermined character composed of the first raising and lowering decorative body 3218 and the second raising and lowering decorative body 3250 is in a state where its mouth is widely opened and the second liquid crystal display from the inside of the mouth The entire device 3252 can be seen by the player.

  Further, from the normal state, a pair of back rear side decoration bodies 3420 are driven by driving the back bottom back side drive motor 3404, the back bottom back middle drive motor 3476, and the back bottom front drive motor 3508 in the back bottom rendering unit 3400. When the back lower back middle decoration 3450, and the back lower front middle decoration 3506 and the back lower front side decoration 3530 are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, they are formed in a substantially arc shape on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It seems that the pair of back and back side decorations 3420 are in a state of being coalesced into a ring, and the inside of the pair of back and back side decorations 3420 is buried by the raised back and back inside and outside decoration 3450. In addition, on the front side of a pair of back-rear back side decoration 3420 and back-back back middle-back decoration 3450, a pair of back-back front side decorations from the left and right sides of back-back front back decoration 3506 3530 is positioned in a state of out extending obliquely upward (see Figure 187). As a result, on the front face of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a predetermined character whose back is a large semicircular background member is in a state in which the wings are spread.

[3. Various substrates]
Subsequently, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As illustrated, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main substrate 4000 and a group of the peripheral control substrate 4010, and various control is shared by these two groups. The group of main substrates 4000 is configured to include a main control substrate 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game), and a payout control substrate 4110 that controls payout of gaming balls and the like. In addition, the group of peripheral control boards 4010 has a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100 and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 188, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e") built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . In addition to its built-in ROM 4100 d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100 d”) and main control built-in RAM 4100 e, main control MPU 4100 a monitors a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and prevents fraud. The function of etc. is also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is a first starting opening sensor 3131 for detecting gaming balls received to the first starting opening 2101, and a second starting opening sensor for detecting gaming balls received to the second starting opening 2102. 3132 and a detection signal from a general winning opening sensor 3133 for detecting gaming balls received to the general winning opening 2201 are respectively input through the main control I / O port 4100 b, a gate sensor 2302, a general winning opening sensor 2123 , Detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 3134 attached to the count sensor 2122, the route detection sensor 2580, and the back unit 3000 via the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. Input and so on.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, whereby the starting port solenoid 2114, the attacker solenoid via the panel relay board 3040. The first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display through the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3040, and the function display board 1191 1186, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the ordinary symbol indicator 1189, the ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188, the game state indicator 1183, the round indicator 1190 or the like, or the like Do.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used as the first start opening sensor 3131, the second start opening sensor 3132, the gate sensor 2302, and the count sensor 2122. A contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 2123 3133. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2301, the first starting opening sensor 3131, the second starting opening sensor 3132, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2302 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with a long lifetime are used as the first start opening sensor 3131, the second start opening sensor 3132, and the gate sensor 2302. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball is frequently entered, so the detection of the game ball by the count sensor 2122 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch with a long lifetime is also used as the count sensor 2122. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 2123 and 3133 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches whose lifetime is shorter than that of the proximity switch are used as the general winning opening sensors 2123 and 3133.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. To Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness not shown). Although the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the detailed description thereof will be described later, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. Described)) BC0 (see 乙 169). The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e by the capacitor BC0 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 851 and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. The blackout notice signal is also input to the main control MPU 4100a through the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 or the like through a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Disbursement control board]
As shown in FIG. 188, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming balls performs payout control by the payout control unit 4111 which performs various control related to payout and the firing solenoid 654, and An emission control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and an award ball tank 720 , A ball rail 731 and a ball removing switch 860b for discharging the gaming balls in the winning ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball releasing operation.

[3-2A. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 188, the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. An external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the payout control MPU 4111a are operating normally. And a payout control input circuit 4111 e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are inputted. The payout motor drive circuit 4111 d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740. And. In addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”), the payout control MPU 4111 a is for preventing fraud. The function etc. are also built in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 4100 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port 4111b in a serial system, or the main control board In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c from 4100 being input through the payout control I / O port 4111 b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 may be input, or the ball out switch 750 The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input through the prize ball relay substrate 754 or the like.

  A ball out switch 750 for detecting presence or absence of gaming balls in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a gaming ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e via the winning ball relay substrate 754 of the winning ball device 740 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the award ball device 740 is firstly transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the award ball device 740 and the award ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 4111 e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 which detects whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full is stored in the gaming ball, the handle device relay board 192 first, and the main side relay terminal It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e through the plate 880 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111 b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED indicator. A signal for displaying on 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The serial number is transmitted to the main control board 4100, and the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game arcade (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100 Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 4110), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, announcing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the winning ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, at the entrance of the distribution space 741b in communication with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 When Informs that it is difficult to rotate the payout rotating body 748) by meshing with the technical ball in the vicinity of the entrance, and indicates that it is a "counting switch error" when the number "3" is displayed (specifically, And, based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, notifying that the counting sensor 751 has a problem), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, the payout Informing that the number of retries for the operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that it is “full” (specifically, from the full detection sensor 550 Based on the detection signal, a notification is issued indicating that the storage space 546 of the fal cover unit 540 is full with the stored gaming balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (payout control Informing that the electrical connection is broken anywhere in the range from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number “9” is displayed, it indicates “in stock” (specifically, Informing that the number of balls of the game balls not yet paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are, first, the rental ball unit substrate 366, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874 It is input to the CR unit 6 via the interface. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the gaming ball to be lent according to the ball rental request signal to the payout control board 4110 in a serial system via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received by the port 4111 b and input to the payout control MPU 4111 a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of lent gaming balls, and a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number indicator 365c is a CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the plate 874, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the ball unit substrate 366, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 188, the emission control unit 4120 for performing emission control by the emission solenoid 654 and ball transmission control by the ball transmission solenoid 585 is a emission control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches regarding emission are input. 4120a, an oscillating circuit 4120b outputting a clock signal at fixed time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 based on the clock signal, and the firing A launch solenoid drive circuit 4120 d outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e outputs the drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the launch reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit 4120 c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120 b so that 100 gaming balls per minute can be shot toward the gaming area 1100 and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d. At the same time, the ball sending reference pulse generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit 4120 e.

  A detection signal from a touch sensor 516 for detecting whether the handle main body 504 is touched by a palm or finger and a detection stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the player is forced to stop the launch of the game ball by the intention of the player. Is input to the emission control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay substrate 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880 and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input as a CR connection signal to the emission control input circuit 4120 a and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120 c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 which electrically adjusts the strength to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the handle main body 504 first receives the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal board 880 Are input to the emission solenoid drive circuit 4120 d.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d is based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 to drive the driving current for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 with the launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle body 504. Is output to the firing solenoid 654 when it is input. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120 e receives a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal board 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is inputted. The ball feed member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 by outputting, and the constant current is triggered when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is finished. The game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball striking device 650 side by stopping the output of the ball. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 4110 is provided with a capacitor BC1 (see) 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . Due to the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 188, the peripheral control board 4010 performs peripheral control based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display 1900 or the like based on control data from the peripheral control 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[3-3 A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 188, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control in the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects to which the sound source IC 4140c refers are stored.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from main control board 4100, each decoration board of game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the lamp drive board 3041, or the game board A motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various rendering units provided in 4 In order to transmit to the drive substrate 3045 or to output a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 Door-side drive composed of door-side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal The light emission data is transmitted from the frame I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 through the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the liquid crystal display 1900 or the second liquid crystal display A control signal (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the device 3252 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and a control signal for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d ( The sound command is output to the sound source IC 4140 c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various rendering units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140 a through a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is done. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 A peripheral control MPU 4140 a is input through the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and is provided to the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 It controls so that music and sound effects matched to various effects flow from the lower speaker 821, and the door frame 5 through the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the door frame base board 194. Control is performed such that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the provided speakers 130, 222, 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control substrate 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control substrate box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4140 a, peripheral control unit 4140 is an external watchdog timer not shown (hereinafter “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT in combination to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 kg (k for the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time)). B) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side on / off blink command, game board side on / off blink command, movable body drive command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3041 or motor drive board 3045 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 , And a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 are door frames via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 based on the received light on / off signal based on the received door frame side light on / off command. Output to the LED of each decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided in 5, or based on the received game board side light blink command, the lighting signal or blinking signal is It outputs to LED of each decoration board 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3124, 3115, 3123, 324, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546 grade | etc., With which the game board 4 was equipped. In addition, a panel relay substrate 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 is a dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 through the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received drive command of the movable body. It outputs to 414, each drive motor 3228, 3324, 3304, 4360, 3476, 3508 grade | etc., With which the game board 4 was equipped, each solenoid, etc. FIG.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the tray unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It is input through the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and the lamp drive board 3041 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the motor drive board 3045, etc. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 via the lamp drive board 3041 or the motor drive board 3045 attached from the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 through 882 or the rear surface of the back box 3010 Therefore, control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers disposed on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 disposed above the gaming window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. Sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2-channel stereo signal, a 4-channel stereo signal, a 2.1-channel surround signal or a 4.1-channel surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added, etc.) to the lower bass speaker 821 Therefore, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before.

[Measures to prevent abnormal noise generation]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various sound facilities, and equipment requiring power such as LEDs and sensors, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes the side speakers 130, the upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of the left and right side decoration units, and the lower speakers 821 (FIG. 67) in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is connected to the bass speaker (FIG. 89) and connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided on the game board 4 to amplify the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and output it to each speaker An amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit) is provided.

  Also, on the door frame base substrate 194, the wires that connect various acoustic equipment, LEDs, sensors, etc. with the payout control substrate 4110, the peripheral control substrate 4010, etc. It is connected to the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 of the main body frame 3 (FIG. 67, FIG. 89). In addition, the door frame base substrate 194 is covered by the door frame base substrate cover 195 on the rear side (FIG. 23).

  In addition, at the location (rear side) where the door frame base substrate cover 195 is disposed, the game ball paid out from the winning ball unit 700 or into the game area 1100 despite being fired by the ball striking device 650. A far cover unit 540 (a molded article of transparent polycarbonate) for guiding the game balls (fall balls) not reached to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided close to each other (FIG. 23).

  In the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, since game balls (metals) pass at a high speed while in contact with the passage wall, electrostatic charge is accumulated in the polycarbonate of this part, and may reach 10 several kV Some (3-4kV at most even if you feel pain due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, unlike metals, the charges accumulated in the resin, even if grounded, are only removed from the very periphery, and most of them remain.

  Then, the digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 in proximity to this may malfunction due to electrostatic induction due to this charge. In this case, an abnormal audio signal continuing for a certain period is input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal by the digital amplifier circuit is extremely amplified and exceeds the proper amplification width (when it becomes an excessive AC voltage). Occur. In such a case, for example, a cracked sound such as a rattle may be generated from the speaker, or the sound reproduced by the speaker may be a loud unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound may be generated), which may make the player uncomfortable. It will be felt. In addition, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Although the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, it is usually absent on the output side.

  Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is difficult to hear, the output tends to be set larger.

  The embodiment described below detects whether an audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-described abnormal audio signal, and is an abnormal audio signal. The present invention relates to an invention related to an abnormal sound signal blocking substrate (described later) which blocks an abnormal sound signal so as not to be input to the lower speaker 821.

  As for voice output, as described above, peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc., and receives various commands from main control board 4100. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d is output to the sound source IC 4140 c (FIG. 188).

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and is provided at the lower portion of the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the door frame base board 194 etc. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 821 and the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 provided in the door frame 5 (see FIGS. 188 and 190).

[Abnormal voice signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 and 191. FIG. 190 is a block diagram of the door frame base substrate 194, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884, and the lower speaker 821. FIG. 191 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884.

  As shown in FIG. 190, the door frame base substrate 194 provided in the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 provided in the main body frame 3 are connected by the wiring 196 and the periphery from the door frame base substrate 194 A +24 V voltage and a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base substrate 194, are output to the side relay terminal board 882. It is supposed to be transmitted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 190, in the main body frame 3, an abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal The plate 882 and the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 are connected by the speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by the lower speaker harness 819.

  In FIG. 191, from the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884, the ground GND, +24 V voltage, the woofer + signal and the woofer which are the audio signals for the lower speaker 821 outputted from the door frame base board 194. The signal is relayed and output through the speaker protection harness 883 to the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884.

  Further, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821, are output from the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 to the lower speaker 821 and supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. It is done. As described above, the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 through the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821.

  By the way, as for the arrangement place of the abnormal sound signal interception board 884 in main part frame 3, it is desirable that it is a place which is hard to receive the influence of static electricity noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 is disposed at a location distant from the far cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. As described above, by disposing the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 in a portion that is less susceptible to the influence of electrostatic noise, input of an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 can be stably suppressed.

[Circuit of abnormal sound signal blocking board]
The abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884 detects whether the sound signal supplied to the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal sound signal, and is an abnormal sound signal. The audio signal is blocked so as not to be input to the lower speaker 821.

  As shown in FIG. 191, the abnormal speech signal blocking substrate 884 detects an abnormal speech signal and outputs an abnormal detection signal from the abnormal speech signal detection circuit 885 from the abnormal speech signal detection circuit 885. An abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 is provided to cut off the supply of the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 when the output abnormality detection signal is received.

  The +24 V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 through the +24 V supply line 886 in the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884. Also, the ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884.

  The woofer + signal which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is branched into two at the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, one of which is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other is It is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

  Also, the woofer signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two at the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, and one is relayed at the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 through the woofer signal line 889. , And is connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal voice signal detection circuit]
The abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifying bridge circuit formed by connecting four diodes SD1 to SD4 in a bridge form, a resistor SR1 (47 k.OMEGA.) Disposed in the subsequent stage of the rectifying bridge circuit, and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in this embodiment, An infrared LED mainly composed of a capacitance of 47 μF), a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are built in).

  The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the other woofer + signal out of two is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. . The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other woofer signal of the two branched is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

  Furthermore, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to constitute a rectification bridge circuit. The cathode terminal of the diode SD2 is connected to a + voltage line 890 for supplying the positive voltage rectified by the rectification bridge circuit to the rear stage, while the anode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the rectifier bridge to the rear stage. The circuit is connected to a 0V line 891 which supplies 0V whose negative portion has been cut and the voltage is substantially 0V.

  Then, in the subsequent stage of the rectification bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the-terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is 0V line 891. It is connected.

  That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer signal rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit (+ voltage waveform in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0 V as the connection point) are electrolyzed via the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged in the period from 0 V of the waveform of the + voltage to the peak voltage of the mountain, and the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the waveform of + voltage to 0 V The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is designed to discharge. The time constant of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

  One end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the + voltage line 890 at a stage subsequent to the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the + voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, and also connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 whose one end is connected to the connection point of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, ripples of the waveform of the positive voltage are removed and smoothed by the capacitor SC2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890 after the connection point of the capacitor SC2 of the + voltage line 890, and a smoothed woofer signal, that is, + voltage is applied after rectification. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistors SR2 and SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

  One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to a connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6 The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. Further, one end of a resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0 V line 891.

  That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 appearing based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

  On the other hand, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the + voltage line 890 at the latter stage of the connection point of the + voltage line 890 to the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0 V line 891.

  That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 mainly includes the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the transistor STR3, and the relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

  In abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of photocoupler SPC1, and the other is connected to the 8th terminal (coil + input) of relay SRL1. It is done. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistors SR8 and SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

  The base terminal of the relay operation transistor STR3 is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9, and one end of the capacitor SC3 whose other end is connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the 1st terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the 3rd terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  Further, the fourth terminal (the other of the A contacts) of the relay SRL 1 is connected to the ground line 887. Furthermore, the fifth terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. Are connected to an external lower speaker 821.

  Furthermore, varistor SZNR1 for induced current bypass by self-induction function is connected in parallel between the eighth terminal (coil + input) of relay SRL1 and the first terminal (coil-input) of relay SRL1, and relay serial number 5 of relay SRL1. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  Incidentally, since the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC 1, no electrical noise enters the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 directly. It is supposed to be.

  Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal cut-off substrate 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal voice signal is input] <abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage with different peak amplitude) is input, in the rectification bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, in the case of the woofer + signal, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conduct. In FIG. 191, current flows from the top to the bottom to the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged in the period from 0 V of the waveform of the + voltage to the peak voltage of the mountain.

  When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different peak amplitudes) is input, the rise in voltage due to the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on, and remains off.

  Then, during a period from the peak voltage of the peak of the waveform of the positive voltage to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

  In the case of the woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are turned on, and a current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the rise in voltage due to the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on, and remains off.

  Then, during a period from the peak voltage of the peak of the waveform of the + voltage to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

  As described above, when a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different peak amplitudes) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 is maintained in the OFF state. Therefore, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 also maintain the off state, and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 does not substantially turn on.

<Abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895, the photocoupler SPC1 is maintained in the off state, and the transistor STR3 is also maintained in the off state. Also, the relay SRL1 is in the inactive state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in the non-excitation state, and the non-operation B contact (the contact is closed) between the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1, and the non-operation between the third terminal and the fourth terminal. A contact (contact is open). Therefore, the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL 1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal continues for a predetermined period of time] [Operation when an abnormal audio signal is input due to a fixed DC voltage] <abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal (for example, a constant voltage such as +24 V, +18 V, +1.5 V, etc.) due to a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, in the rectification bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conducts, and charging current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 191, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

  When an abnormal audio signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, a rise in voltage of the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to an increase in charge accumulated in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 with the passage of time is applied. It will approach a constant voltage and reach the base terminal voltage that operates the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (voltage appearing at the connection point of the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4) The current flows through the resistor SR5, the zener diode SZD1, the resistor SR6, and the resistor SR7, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the transistor STR2 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is pulled down to the 0 V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal described in claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing to the infrared LED.

<Abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point of the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor SC3.

  When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the 1st terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside relay SRL1 between the No. terminal and the terminal is energized, and relay SRL1 operates.

  Therefore, the coil of relay SRL1 is in the excited state, and the B contact between the fifth and sixth terminals of relay SRL1 in the operating state (the contact is open), and between the third and fourth terminals in the operating state. A contact (contact closed). Therefore, the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 are switched to the disconnection state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is interrupted in the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

  The third and fourth terminals of relay SRL1 are brought into conduction, the third terminal of relay SRL1 is pulled to ground, and the collector terminal of transistor STR3 connected to the third terminal of relay SRL1 is grounded. The transistor STR3 is turned off.

  On the other hand, the 1st terminal of the relay connected in parallel to the 3rd terminal of relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the 8th terminal, the 1st terminal, the 3rd terminal, the 4th terminal and the ground line 887 The current flows to the conductive state, and the conductive state of the coil is maintained. Thus, the woofer + signal remains disconnected from the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1.

  As described above, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal (photocoupler Turns on). When the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 receives the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photo coupler is turned on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821. Shut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the application of the fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

  In the above embodiment, when abnormal sound is input, the energization state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the woofer + signal is maintained by blocking the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1, Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority given to preventing damage to the speakers. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal sound signal can be grasped by a person in charge or the sound output stop state is confirmed, the operation state of the relay SRL 1 is canceled by turning on the game machine again. It is possible to return to the normal initial state.

[Operation when an abnormal audio signal is input due to excessive AC voltage] <abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when the audio signal is extremely amplified and an excessive AC voltage exceeding the proper amplification width is input, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, The diode SD2 and the diode SD3 become conductive, and charging current flows from the top to the bottom of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 191, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged in the period from 0V to the peak voltage of the + voltage waveform. Be done.

  Also, for example, in the case of the woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are turned on, and the charging current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. During the period up to the peak voltage, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely high compared to the peak voltage of the normal audio signal, even if the width of the mountain waveform is the same for the normal waveform and the abnormal waveform, the resistance SR1 The charging current rapidly flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the through, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is rapidly charged.

  Therefore, the charge stored in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 rapidly increases. Due to this rapid charge increase, the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises to reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  The operation of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operation when an abnormal sound signal by the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, I will explain briefly.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, the transistor STR2 is turned on, and when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. In abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895, when photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, transistor STR3 is turned on and transistor STR3 is turned on, whereby relay SRL1 is activated and terminals 5 and 6 of relay SRL1 are cut off. In the state, the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is interrupted at the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the generation of an abnormal sound due to an abnormal sound signal of an excessive AC voltage that is extremely amplified and exceeds an appropriate amplification width. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from making unpleasant sounds.

[3-4. Liquid crystal control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 188, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in the peripheral control substrate 4010 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and various processing programs A screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a liquid crystal control ROM 4150b for storing various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for displaying and controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above The character ROM 4150 d stores various data, and the character RAM 4150 e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to The drawing control of the two liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a operates normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b is, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control substrate 4010, A plurality of nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e is defined in advance as the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as the schedule data progresses.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b and output to the VDP 4150 c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the head screen data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays the data on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 The drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the VDP 4150c does not receive screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150 c adopts a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

  The character ROM 4150 d stores a large amount of sprite data, and the capacity thereof is large. As the capacity of the character ROM 4150 d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150 d can not be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150 d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150 e having a high access speed, and sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150 e. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150 d in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit integrated on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, in the case of displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, data for drawing each person is referred to as "sprite". Thus, in the case where a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. In these sprites, the position to be arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap are set, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device It is drawn to 3252.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and sequentially intersect with the one direction along the pixels as viewed from the front and from left to right. It is driven by a sub-scan that repeatedly performs the main scan in the direction of When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning, And sequentially output to pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shift to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, the next line Based on the drawing data of a minute, the image is output as pixels in one line sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning.

[3-5. Control processing on main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (in particular, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing an example of processing upon power failure. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the starting hole winning process. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the change start process. FIG. 198 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 199 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process during variation.

  Further, FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation processing. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game mode determination processing, which is one of the jackpot game preparation processing. FIG. 202 is an example of a table used for jackpot game mode determination processing when the jackpot flag is ON. FIG. 203 is an example of a table used for jackpot game mode determination processing when the game ball passes the right gate at the time of jackpot winning of the normal type. FIG. 204 is an example of a table used for jackpot game mode determination processing when the game ball passes the left gate at the time of jackpot winning of the normal type. The timer interrupt process is executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in the present embodiment).

[About main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 192, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is it a set value at the time of a power failure) or not. For example, it executes processing (return processing at power failure) to return to the state at the time of power failure according to the backup data stored in RAM, clears the RAM if backup data is abnormal, and performs device setting around CPU (normal initialization , Setting of interrupt timing, etc.).

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current gaming state is stored as backup data in the RAM. Further, if the RAM clear switch 624a instructing to clear the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on process is turned on, the RAM is cleared and the normal initialization is performed. Further, in the power-on process, when the backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and the normal initialization is performed.

  Further, in the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to a transmittable state to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initialization is performed is also executed. The power on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress of the game such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the gaming state when the power is shut off. The backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed or the like, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is stored again. When the supply is started, the power-on process is performed.

  When the power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each game process. At the start of the loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a power failure advance signal is detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used by the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply substrate. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from the external power supply is converted to a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply substrate. It is supplied to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply substrate falls below a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply substrate to the main control substrate 4100 is stopped. Will be sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects a power failure notification signal in step S2, the power off occurrence processing is executed (step S4).

  In the power-off process, when the power supply voltage (24 V in this embodiment) supplied to the power substrate after power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is in a state before power failure. In order to start from the above, the state at the time of the occurrence of a power failure is stored as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Although the process contents will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power-off process is not an interrupt process but a branch process executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the detection of the power failure notice signal. It is incorporated in the main processing (main control processing).

  By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number updating process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). The random numbers updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

[About power off process]
Next, as shown in FIG. 193, the power failure occurrence process is a process that is executed when a power failure advance signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt processing is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the RAM before the power failure is held at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets, in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM, a specified value indicating that the processing upon power failure has been performed (step S4c). When the above process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares to stop power supply. It should be noted that in this process, in the case where the process at the time of a power failure has been started by the power supply voltage becoming unstable due to a power failure or the like for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as "instant power failure") Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, in the above process, it may not be possible to recover from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the processing is being performed normally, but the processing upon power failure occurs and the update is not performed. As a result, even when the power failure occurs, processing is initiated by a momentary power failure, and even if an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when power is turned on.

[About timer interrupt processing]
Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 while the main process is being executed, as shown in FIG. After executing the register save process (step S10), the control MPU 4100a executes the process from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring a detection signal of the above-described switch (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number updating process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. The random number will be described later, but the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command instructing payout of a game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  In addition, in the special control process of step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol display 1185 or 1186 based on the progressing state of the game, or the special electric character (that is, the attacker solenoid 2121). The opening / closing member 2106 for opening / closing the special winning opening 2103 is controlled, and processing for changing the opening / closing state of the special winning opening 2103 is executed. In the normal control process of step S14, the normal symbol is varied based on the progressing state of the game, and the ordinary motorized part (that is, a pair of movable pieces 2105 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2102 by the starting opening solenoid 2344) is controlled. Then, the process of changing the open / close state of the second start port 2102 is executed.

  In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the gaming state to the outside (for example, a management computer etc.) of the pachinko machine 1, a drive signal is output to a special view start storage indicator (not shown) To perform the process, etc. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting a rendering command to the surrounding control unit 4140 is executed. Further, in the command transmission processing, processing of transmitting the power on command set in the power on processing (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processes from step S11 to step S17 are executed, the register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process is ended.

  Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 in the above-described random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the jackpot determination random number used in the determination (whether it is the jackpot determination or the jackpot lottery) whether to generate the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot gaming state in the jackpot determination Whether to perform high expectation effects such as reach effect when it is judged that it is not a big hit (loss) in big hit lottery random number for big hit symbol used to decide the stop symbol of special symbol when it is decided to generate Reach determination random number used for determination (reach determination) about whether or not, and a variation display pattern random number used to determine the variation display pattern (variation time etc.) of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 1185, 1186 (Random time for change time), Opening condition of the big winning opening 2103 in the jackpot game (special bonus game) Used for random number for round determination used to determine (number of rounds etc.), determination as to whether or not the pair of movable pieces 2105 for opening and closing the second starting port 2102 should be controlled to be open (normal lottery judgment) There are random hits for ordinary hit judgment, etc.

  In addition, the jackpot symbol random number is also used to determine the jackpot state type (such as whether to operate the probability variation function or the time saving function) performed when it is determined that the jackpot was won.

  Among these random numbers, in random number update processing 1, the jackpot determination random number, jackpot random number, round determination random number, and whether the pair of movable pieces 2105 are controlled to be open or not in connection with generation of jackpot gaming state Update the random number for the standard symbol judgment that is involved. That is, the random number used for determination regarding generation | occurrence | production of a big hit game state and controlling a pair of movable piece 2105 to an open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined | prescribed timing. By doing this, the probability in a predetermined period with each random number (probability of determining that the jackpot gaming state is to be generated, and probability of determining that the pair of movable pieces 2105 are controlled to be in the open state) can be made constant. The player can be prevented from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number updating process 2, the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, and the reach determination random number regardless of the regular lottery, and the variation display pattern random number and the like are updated.

  Although not shown in FIG. 194, in the timer interruption process, regardless of the gaming state, the receiving unit 2550 (more specifically, the movable valve 2551 fixed to the front end of the movable shaft 2552) is periodically rotated. Also, drive control processing of the receiving drive motor 2558 to be performed is performed.

[About special control processing]
Next, special control processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process.

  In the special control process, first, first and second starting opening winning process (step S110) is performed. In this first and second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, for example. Then, after the first and second starting-opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process according to the state of the processing flag is selectively selected among the plurality of processes (step S120 to step S230) shown in the figure. Will do.

  More specifically, when the first and second starting opening winning processing (step S110) is finished, it is first determined whether the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 ((0) YES in step S120) and the fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In this variation start process (step S130), the processing flag is updated to "1" after the setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol, etc. is performed based on the result of the lottery for the winning of the big hit etc. .

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether the process flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 (the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator After the variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) is started in any of 1186 and the variation time from displaying to stopping display is determined, the processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the processing during variation (step S180) is executed. In this fluctuation processing, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and based on the timeout, the special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 is special Stop the fluctuation display of the symbol. After that, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the change start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to "3". On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot has been lost (loss), the processing selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the variation start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the jackpot game preparation processing (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game preparation process, the condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game is operated to perform processing for determining the mode of the jackpot game and the mode (for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game determined) ), And further operates the character continuous operating device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, and updates the processing flag to “4”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  If the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), it is determined that the processing flag is 4 and the jackpot game processing (step S210) is executed. In this jackpot game process, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled based on the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S 607). In addition, when the jackpot game ends, after the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device and the bonus product continuous actuation device, etc. is performed, the processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the variation start process (step S130) is performed again.

  Thus, the special control process is ended when any of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, and step S210 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag.

[About the first and second starting opening winning process]
Next, the first and second starting opening winning process (the process of step S110) will be described based on FIG. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second starting opening winning process.

  In the first and second starting hole winning processing (step S110), the processing related to the determination as to whether or not the game ball has been won in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 is generally considered On the condition that it is determined that there has been a process of updating the holding status of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

  Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3132. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 3132, it is determined that there is a winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102 (YES in step S201), The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (random number for big hit judgment, big hit symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the second provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) A determination is made as to whether the value of the hold number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbols) obtained by the game ball winning in the second start port 2102 as the second start pending storage process (step S203). The random numbers and the like are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) in association with the special symbol types and the order of holding. Next, 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM as a hold history update process (step S204).

  In the process of step 203, a winning notice command is set to indicate that the game ball has been won in the second starting opening 2102 (more precisely, the type of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.). The set prize notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like makes a hold display on the second start port 2102 side through control by the peripheral control unit 4140, this can be updated promptly.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 3132 is not output in the process of step S201, or the value of the second hold number counter becomes the upper limit value in the process of step S202. If it is determined that the value is 4 then, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 3131. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 3131, it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting opening 2101 (YES in step S205), and the next The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, jackpot symbols, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit A determination is made as to whether the value is less than four. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (big hit determination random numbers, big hit random numbers for the first start reservation storage process (step S207), obtained by the game ball winning in the first start opening 2101. Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM as a hold history update process (step S208).

  Also in the processing of step 207, a winning notice command indicating that there is a winning of the gaming ball in the first starting opening 2101 (more precisely, the kind of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.) is set, and thus The set prize notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, even when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like makes a hold display on the first starting opening 2101 side through control by the peripheral control unit 4140, this can be updated promptly.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that there is no winning of the gaming ball in the first starting opening 2101 or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that 4 has been reached, the first and second starting opening winning processes are ended at this time.

  As will be described later, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102, a big hit is made together with a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, etc. A game mode determination random number (for example, a round number determination random number) is not acquired. Therefore, the jackpot game mode determination random number is not obtained in this way, and the opening mode in the large winning opening 2103 remains undecided (midway step of a series of lottery processes according to the execution of the jackpot game). A game will be advanced by determining a fluctuation pattern, a stop pattern, etc. In addition, about the random number for jackpot game mode determination, it is acquired when the game ball passes gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) after the stop of the special symbol, and the below-mentioned jackpot determined at that time It will be provided to the jackpot game mode determination processing under the form (see FIG. 201).

  In this embodiment, after the winning process (step S201 to step S204) to the second starting port 2102 is performed, the winning process (step S205 to step S208) to the first starting port 2101 is performed. There is. However, instead of this, after the winning process for the first starting port 2101 is performed, the winning process for the second starting port 2102 may be performed.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a may execute an advance determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may transmit a command indicating the result of the advance determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a prize notification command. The advance determination process is performed prior to a lottery using random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, determination of a jackpot lottery, a probability variation lottery, and a variation display pattern described later), and a process of determining the lottery result in advance It is. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the advance determination table. The preceding determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the advance determination process, the random number and the advance determination table are compared to determine the lottery result (such as the jackpot success or failure, the jackpot type, and the variation display pattern) when the lottery using the random number is performed. (A judgment performed prior to the lottery in this manner is also referred to as a "pre-reading judgment"). The peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received winning notification command (preceding determination result) before a lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect may be Also referred to as

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the contents of the advance determination table are the same as the contents of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

[About change start process]
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 197 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is "0", the main control MPU 4100a first determines the values of the two hold number counters corresponding to the special symbol displays 1185 and 1186 (first start storage It is determined whether the number and the second start memory number) are both "0" (step S301). Here, the values in the two pending number counters corresponding to the special symbol displays 1185 and 1186 refer to the storage areas (the special symbol retention storage means 4214 and 4224 pertaining to the first start storage and the second start storage). Therefore, if the value of the number-of-holds counter is “0” in this step S301 (YES), the variation processing of the first special symbol and the variation processing of the second special symbol are performed. It is determined that none of the start conditions is satisfied, and the variation start process is ended when the processing flag is updated to “1” in the process of step S318.

  On the other hand, if neither the first starting memory number nor the second starting memory number is "0" (NO in step S301), it is determined that the starting condition is satisfied, and execution of the jackpot lottery held on hold In order to update the order to be applied, the shift processing in the special symbol holding storage means 4214 and 4224 is performed (step S302 to step S310).

  Incidentally, four storage areas are provided in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage means 4224, respectively. In each of these storage areas, a jackpot judgment random number storage area in which a jackpot judgment random number is stored, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach judgment random number, a variation display pattern random number and the like are stored in a jackpot symbol random number storage area. An area and an area are provided, respectively.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a appropriately manipulates the random numbers stored in the storage means 4214 and 4224 as shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area when the special symbol changes. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game is performed when the big win is won in the first special symbol side lottery process and when the big win is won in the second special symbol side lottery process. There is no difference in the expected value of the benefit (such as the number of awardable balls obtainable) given to the

  In the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, the lottery of the first special symbol is always performed later, and the lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 2102 (lottery of the second special symbol) The random numbers stored in the storage means 4214 and 4224 are manipulated so as to be all digested first.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 197, at the time of the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, the second special symbol display 1186 which is the side to be preferentially digested as the process of step S302. It is determined whether the value of the number-of-holds counter (second starting memory number) corresponding to is "0", that is, whether a random number is not stored in the storage area of the second special symbol holding storage means 4224. And as a result, when it is judged that the random number is stored in the storage area of the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 (NO in step S302), the random number regarding the second special symbol is read out from the same storage area It acquires (step S303). That is, as described later, the random number read out in this way (random number for big hit judgment, big hit symbol random number, reach judgment random number, fluctuation display pattern random number), the process for drawing a big hit Processing for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2106, processing for setting the opening / closing member 2106, etc. The second starting game can be advanced with the ball winning.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100 a updates various random numbers stored in each of the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas in order to update the digesting order of the second special symbol side lottery (variation), The data is shifted to the first storage area (step S304). As a result, at least the storage area is freed, and new start information (pending) on the second special symbol can be stored in the freed storage area.

  Then, after that, the main control MPU 4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "1" to indicate that the second special symbol side game (the second starting game) is in a progressing state (step S305). ). Furthermore, the pending number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is decremented by “1” in order to update the pending number for the second special symbol side lottery (variation) (step S306). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 1187 so that the number of reservations for the second special symbol side lottery (variation) updated in this way is also reflected in the lighting mode of the second special symbol memory display 1187 Is done. The special symbol variation flag thus set to "1" is reset when the processing flag is updated to "0", for example, after the variation start process is completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 197, in the process of step S302, when it is determined that the random number is not stored in the storage area of the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 (YES in step S302), A random number relating to the first special symbol is read out from the storage area of one special symbol hold storage means 4214 and acquired (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random number read out in this way, the process concerning the setting of the variation pattern of the special symbol, the process concerning the setting of the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2106, the setting of the gaming state As a result of being provided to such processing, etc., the first start game can be advanced, triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2101.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a changes the random numbers stored in the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas so as to update the digestion order for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side. Each is shifted to the first storage area (step S308). As a result, at least the storage area is freed, and new start information (pending) for the first special symbol can be stored in the freed storage area.

  Then, after that, the main control MPU 4100a sets "2" to the special symbol variation flag so that it is shown that the game on the first special symbol side (the first starting game) is in progress (step S309) ). Furthermore, the pending number counter corresponding to the first special symbol is decremented by “1” to update the pending number for the first special symbol side lottery (variation) (step S310). At this time, drive control for lighting the lamp 1184 so that the number of reservations for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side updated in this way is also reflected in the lighting mode of the first special symbol memory display 1184 Is done. In addition, similarly, for the special symbol variation flag set to "2" in this way, after the variation start processing is completed, for example, the special symbol variation flag is reset when the processing flag is updated to "0".

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether it is a probability variation state with high probability (step S312), and if it is not a probability variation state (NO in step S312) Jackpot determination table, that is, a table in which the probability of becoming a jackpot is set low is selected, while in the case of a probability fluctuation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of probability fluctuation operation, ie, a probability that jackpot is Select the table set high. In this example, the probability of becoming a big hit is set to 1/320 when probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, normal time), and the probability of becoming a jackpot when probability fluctuation is activated (that is, high probability) is 10 It is set to / 320.

  After any table is selected in the process of step S313 or step S314, the jackpot determination random number for any special symbol acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307 based on the table is a big hit. It is determined whether or not it is a random number (big hit value) corresponding to (step S315). And, if it is the jackpot value (YES in step S315), the jackpot is a probability based on the jackpot symbol random number for any special symbol similarly acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307. A determination is made as to whether it is of the type for operating the variable function or the time saving function (the state type related to the gaming state) (step S316). As a result, the flag corresponding to the jackpot state type determined in the process of step S316 is turned on (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318. The jackpot symbol random number is, for example, a random number from 0 to 9, and if the jackpot symbol random number acquired from the inside is 7, for example, the jackpot flag of the specific type is turned on in step S317.

  However, the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment leaves the lottery for the mode (the number of rounds) of the jackpot game as a process not yet performed in the process of step S316. And although it mentions later, about the same lottery, after the special symbol (identification symbol) is stopped and displayed, the game ball passes through the gate 2575 and it is in the unexecuted state until the random number for big hit game mode determination is acquired at least. By maintaining the jackpot, part of the lottery processing (for example, the lottery for the number of rounds) in the series of lottery processing (game lottery for the progress of the game) for execution of the jackpot game has not been performed yet Under the middle stage, the special symbol's fluctuation is started and stopped.

  In such a configuration, until the special symbol is stopped based on the jackpot (special hit), the lottery process for the jackpot game mode (for example, the number of rounds) that can affect the profit itself that the player can enjoy. This is left unexecuted without being performed. That is, in this case, even if the special symbol is stopped based on the jackpot winning, a series of lottery processing (game lottery for the progression of the game) for execution of the jackpot game is not completed and the halfway processing stage (after winning It will be maintained in the state where execution of a game is made impossible after winning by not having determined the execution mode of a game yet. In addition, since the game ball is newly launched by the player and can be maintained until the game ball is accepted by the gate 2575, such a halfway processing step as the game lottery is based on the jackpot winning. Even after the special symbol is stopped, until the jackpot game is started, for example, the expectation display of the result of the above-mentioned game lottery under the fact that the information is not exposed by the round indicator 1190 etc. In this way, it is possible to preferably maintain the game fun until the jackpot game is actually executed.

  On the other hand, if the random number obtained is not a jackpot value (NO in step S315), the process proceeds to step S318, the processing flag is updated to "1", and the fluctuation start process is ended. When the process flag is updated to [1] in step S318, the process of step S301 is not performed unless the process flag is updated to [0]. In this case, the start condition is not established and the start condition is not established. .

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of which lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, as described above as a jackpot symbol random number, for example, a random number width of 0 to 9 A random number value to be generated is prepared, and in the process of step S303 or step S307, one of these random number values is acquired as the value of the jackpot symbol random number. Then, the acquired random number value is subjected to the process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot state type for operating the probability variation function or the time saving function in the process of step S316.

  However, in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S607) described later, 15 rounds of big hit games in which opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 is repeated over the largest number of rounds in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and middle number rounds of opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 in a predetermined opening and closing pattern (In this embodiment, the 9 round jackpot game repeated over 9 rounds, and the 3 round jackpot game, 6 round jackpot game and 12 round jackpot game of repeating opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 over the non-maximum number of rounds in a predetermined opening and closing pattern It is decided to decide on one of them.

  The predetermined opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing member 2106 means that a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) elapses after the opening and closing member 2106 is opened from the closed state, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) The game ball is a pattern of returning the open / close member 2106 to the closed state when any of the conditions of winning the special winning opening 2103 is satisfied. Therefore, as the number of rounds in which the opening / closing member 2106 is repeatedly executed in the predetermined opening / closing pattern is large, the player can substantially obtain a large number of prize balls (about 1750 in the present embodiment) as a bonus. . In the jackpot game mode determination process in the present embodiment, a lottery of the number of rounds repeatedly executed in the jackpot game is performed, but a plurality of prize balls which can be obtained by the player are different. It is not limited to this as long as it is determined to be one of the jackpot gaming modes. For example, instead of a jackpot game mode repeatedly performed over a plurality of rounds in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, the opening / closing member 2106 is opened one time, but as a jackpot game embodiment opening the opening / closing member 2106 for a long time It is also good.

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, a variation pattern setting process will be described in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the lottery (step S315) or the like for the jackpot hit. FIG. 198 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  As shown in FIG. 198, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is "1", the main control MPU 4100a first sets the big hit flag "ON" as the process of step S401. It is determined whether or not As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is "ON" (YES in step S401), the jackpot fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed to set the fluctuation pattern when the jackpot is won. The operation is performed (step S402).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S401 that the jackpot flag is not "ON", it is next determined whether or not reach effect is to be performed as the process of step S403. As a result, when it is determined that reach effect is to be performed (YES in step S403), reach loss fluctuation pattern table setting processing is performed so that the fluctuation pattern of reach effect is set although it is a loss (step S404) .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S403 that the reach effect is not performed, the non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the loss effect is performed without performing the reach effect as the process of step S405 next. I do.

  In addition, the table set in the non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process is prepared in a form corresponding to each of a plurality of gaming states, for example, in the normal gaming state, the number of reservations is a predetermined value or more At some point, shortening variation is performed.

  Then, when the selection table relating to the variation pattern is set in the process of any of step S402, step S404, and step S405, the main control MPU 4100a next selects the set selection table as the process of step S410. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol based on. Next, in the process of step S411, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol determined in this way is set as a rendering command, and a winning information command (such as a winning for a big hit) is set.

  Furthermore, the value of the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined above is set in the timer (step S412), and the special view LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When this special view LED operation flag is set to ON, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol is based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variable display of the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the display 1186 is started. After that, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended.

  By the way, the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 194 as a rendering command set in the process of step S411. . Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big hit lottery is shown based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the win information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. Display effects will be performed.

[About processing during fluctuation]
Next, the during-variation process (step S180) executed when the process flag is "2" will be described. FIG. 199 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process during variation.

  As shown in FIG. 199, in the process during variation (step S180), the main control MPU 4100a first sets the variation time set in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 198) as the process of step S501. It is determined whether the time is up. If the fluctuation time set in the timer has not timed up (NO in step S501), the fluctuation processing is ended.

  If the fluctuation time set in the timer has timed up (YES in step S501), the special view LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When the special view LED operation flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol is displayed based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The fluctuation display (the fluctuation of the special symbol) concerning the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the display 1186 is ended. In addition, when the display effect for the big hit lottery is being performed in the liquid crystal display device 1900, in order to end this, a determination stop command indicating that the effect result in the display effect is to be determined and displayed. Is set (step S503). The decision stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display result in the same display effect is determined and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  Next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S504). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to "3" as it is in the processing stage in which the special symbol has been variably stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot has been won (step S505) , End the processing during the change. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not ON but lost due to jackpot (NO in step S504), it is determined that the special symbol is in the processing stage in which the special symbol is fluctuatingly stopped as it is indicated that the jackpot was dropped Is updated to “0” (step S 508), and the processing during variation is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next change concerning the special symbol is performed on the condition that the processing is carried out in the step S130 for the reserve digest.

[About the jackpot game preparation process]
Next, the jackpot game preparation processing (step S200) executed when the processing flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation process.

  As shown in FIG. 200, in the jackpot game preparation process (step S200), the main control MPU 4100a first starts operation of the condition device as one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game (step S604). . When the time saving function is operating (YES in step S605), the operation of the time saving function is stopped based on the start of operation of the condition device (step S606), and the jackpot game mode determining process (step S607) is performed. Do. If it is determined in step S605 that the time saving function is not activated (NO in step S605), the process skips step S606 and proceeds to the jackpot game mode determination process of step S607. Although not illustrated in FIG. 200, when the condition device operates, the route detection sensor 2580R and the route detection sensor 2580L are validated based on this.

  The jackpot game mode determination process executed in step S608 is one process of the jackpot game preparation process, and the jackpot game mode determination process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game mode determination process, and FIG. 202 is an example of a table used in the jackpot game mode determination process.

  As shown in FIG. 201, in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S607), the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the route detection sensor 2580R has detected it (step S6071). When a game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580R (YES in step S6071), the presence or absence of detection by the route detection sensor 2580L is not determined even if the game ball passes the left gate 2575L thereafter. That is, when the gaming ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580R with the condition device activated (YES in step S6071), even if the gaming ball passes the left gate 2575L, the detection of the gaming ball by the route detection sensor 2580L Will be invalidated. On the other hand, the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580R is invalidated when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L, even if activated by the operation of the condition device. Specifically, when the gaming ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L (YES in step S6075) under the condition device being activated, even if the gaming ball passes the right gate 2575R thereafter, the detection by the route detection sensor 2580R The presence or absence of is not determined. That is, when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L while the condition device is activated (YES in step S6075), even if the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R, the game ball detection by the route detection sensor 2580R Will be invalidated.

  Also, when passage of the gaming ball to the right gate 2575R is detected by the route detection sensor 2580R in step S6071 (YES in step S6071), the jackpot flag in the flag ON state, ie, the jackpot flag turned on in step S317 is specified It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot flag of the type (step S6072). Here, if the jackpot flag of the specific type is ON (YES in step S6072), the jackpot gaming mode is determined with reference to the column of the right gate in the table of FIG. 202 (step S6073). That is, the "15" round will be determined as the jackpot game mode with the "100%" lottery probability. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6072 that the jackpot flag of the specific type is not ON (that is, the jackpot flag of the normal type is ON) (NO in step S6072), the jackpot gaming mode is referred to the table of FIG. It is determined (step S6074). That is, the "9" round will be determined as a jackpot game mode with a lottery probability of "100%".

  In addition, if no gaming ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580R in step S6071 (NO in step S6071), it is determined whether or not the game ball has been detected by the route detection sensor 2580L (step S6075). Then, when the gaming ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L in step S6075 (YES in step S6075), whether the jackpot flag in the flag ON state, ie, the jackpot flag turned on in step S317, is the jackpot flag of the specific type It is determined whether or not it is (step S6076). Here, if the jackpot flag of the specific type is ON (YES in step S 6076), “15” round is determined as the jackpot game mode with reference to the left gate column of the table in FIG. 202 (step S 6077) . That is, the "15" round will be determined as the jackpot game mode with the "100%" lottery probability. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6076 that the jackpot flag of the specific type is not ON (ie, the jackpot flag of the normal type is ON) (NO in step S6076), the table of FIG. Then, one of the a, b and c patterns is selected as the lottery pattern (step S6078). Then, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the jackpot mode determination gate 3660, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor (step S6079). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has been detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor (YES in step S6079), the lottery pattern determined in step 6078 with reference to the table of FIG. 204 (b) ( Based on any one of the a pattern, b pattern and c pattern, it is determined to be a jackpot game of any of 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds and 15 rounds (step S 6080).

  Specifically explaining the process of step S6080, when the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 is a pattern, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), 3 rounds of big hit games with a probability of 25%, It is decided that the jackpot game of 6 rounds with the probability of 25%, the jackpot game of 12 rounds with the probability of 25%, and the jackpot game of 15 rounds with the probability of 25%. In addition, when the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 is the b pattern, the jackpot game of 3 rounds with a probability of 40%, the jackpot game of 6 rounds with a probability of 30%, the jackpot game of 12 rounds with a probability of 25%, It is decided to be a jackpot game of 15 rounds each with a probability of 5%. Furthermore, when the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 is c pattern, 3 rounds of jackpot games with 5% probability, 6 rounds of jackpot games with 25% probability, 12 rounds of jackpot games with 30% probability, It is decided to be a jackpot game of 15 rounds with a probability of 40%, respectively.

  However, as can be seen by referring to the table of FIG. 203, the table of FIG. 204 (a) and the table of FIG. 204 (b), when the gaming ball passes the right gate 2575R (the gaming ball is When the game ball passes the left gate 2575L (when it is detected) (when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L), although the mode of the jackpot game to be executed is different, it is paid out during the jackpot game The expected value of the winning amount is the same (not necessarily limited to being exactly the same, including ones that are equivalent within the scope of not impairing the game characteristics).

  If the mode (the number of rounds in this example) of the jackpot game is determined in step S6073, step S6074, step S6077 or step S6078, the process proceeds to step S6081 to start operation of the bonus continuous actuation device. Then, it is determined whether the probability changing function is in operation based on the fact that the bonus product continuous operation device is in operation (step S6082). If it is determined in step S6082 that the probability changing function is in operation (YES in step S6082), the probability changing function is stopped in step S6083, and the process proceeds to step S6084. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6082 that the probability variation function is not operating (NO in step S6082), step S6032 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S6084.

  In step S6084, the main control MPU 4100a sets the operation mode of the big winning opening 2103 based on the jackpot game mode determined in the process of step S6073, step S6074, step S6077 or step S6080. With the operation mode of the big winning opening 2103, for example, in addition to the maximum number of rounds of the round game in which the big winning opening 2103 is repeatedly opened in the big hit game, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 in each round game The opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 in the big hit game is set, such as the upper limit number (for example, 9), and the opening / closing operation time limit of the opening / closing member 2106 in each round game (step S6084). Next, a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started, a round information command in which the determined number of rounds is indicated, a jackpot in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is already being performed, etc. (Step S6085).

  Although described later, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the big hit start command and the round information command set in this way are transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side, the display effect during the big hit game can be selectively made executable as the effect associated with the determined number of rounds.

  As described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, even if the condition device is activated, the following process is performed unless passage of the game ball to the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) is detected. The jackpot game is not executed until the passage of the game ball to the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) is detected.

  In step S6086, the jackpot start interval presentation command is set, and then the jackpot start interval presentation timer is set, for example, to 8 seconds (step S6087), and the jackpot game mode determination process is ended. The jackpot start interval effect is a display effect to be performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 between the activation of the character continuous actuation device and the start of the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106, for example, Is a display effect or the like indicating that is to be started.

  When the jackpot game mode determination process in step S607 is completed, the process proceeds to step S609, where it is determined whether the jackpot start interval effect set in step S6087 is timed up, and the time is up (YES in step S609) The processing flag is updated to "4" (step S610) on the assumption that the jackpot start interval effect has ended (step S610), and the fluctuation processing is ended.

[About the jackpot game processing]
Next, the jackpot gaming process (step S210) executed when the processing flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot gaming process.

  As shown in FIG. 205, in the big hit game process (step S210), the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the big winning opening 2103 is open as the process of step S801. If it is open (YES in step S801), then as the processing of step S802, the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 (the elapsed time after opening) is set in the processing of step S803 (see FIG. 201). It is determined whether the open / close operation time limit has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the open / close operation limit time has elapsed (YES in step S802), the special winning opening 2103 is closed by closing the open / close member 2106 (step S804).

  However, even if it is determined that the set open / close operation restriction time has not yet elapsed in the process of step S802 (NO in step S802), the same applies after the special winning opening 2103 is opened. When the number of gaming balls entering the special winning opening 2103 is equal to or more than the upper limit number (for example, nine) set in the process of step S803 (YES in step S803), the above step S804 The process is switched to and the big winning opening 2103 is closed. On the other hand, if the set open / close operation restriction time has not yet passed (NO in step S802), and the number of gaming balls entering the special winning opening 2103 has not yet reached the upper limit number, (NO in step S 803), the big hit game processing is ended while maintaining the big winning opening 2103 in the open state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S801 that the special winning opening 2103 is not being opened, the number of times the opening of the special winning opening 2103 by the opening / closing member 2106 (the number of round games) is the above-mentioned step S803 (FIG. 201). It is determined whether or not the maximum number of rounds set in the process of reference) has been reached (step S805). Then, if it has not reached (NO in step S805), the open / close member 2106 is operated to open the big winning opening 2103 (step S806), and the big hit game processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the jackpot is stopped by stopping the operation of the bonus continuous actuation device (a hit with the operation of the condition device) The operation of the opening / closing member 2106 performed on the condition that the player has been elected is switched to a state in which the operation (big hit game) is disabled. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing of step S807 to step S812, for example, the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) separately from the jackpot flag in the processing of step S317 (see FIG. 197). The jackpot game processing is ended after setting the gaming state after the jackpot game based on the jackpot type of the jackpot, which is the execution trigger of the jackpot game stored in the. Here, the winning type refers to whether or not it is a winning type that operates the probability variation function or the time saving function.

  When it is determined in the process of step S805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds (YES in step S805), first, the big hit flag and the big hit game in progress flag are respectively turned off ( Step S807), it decides the winning class of the big hit which is made the execution opportunity of the said big hit game (step S808, step S810). Here, in the process of step S 808, it is determined whether or not the winning type for operating the probability variation function (for example, the jackpot symbol random number is 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9). As a result, when it is determined that it is not a winning type for operating the probability variation function, the process proceeds to the above-described step S811 without activating either the probability variation function or the time saving function. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S808 that it is a winning type for activating the probability variation function, the probability variation function is activated (step S809) and the time saving function is activated (step S810). Next, the process proceeds to step S811. Step S811 is processing to stop the operation of the condition device. When the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S811), when the processing flag is set to "0" (step S812), the big hit game processing is ended.

  According to such a big hit game processing, until it is determined that the round game has reached the maximum round number in the process of step 805, the big winning opening 2103 is an opening mode according to the type of the big hit (step S802 , Step S803, and step S805), the game is repeatedly opened, and consequently, the player can obtain a prize ball according to the type of the jackpot.

[4. Game content]
The game contents in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration relating to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 189 and the like. In addition, about the functional structure which concerns on payout of a game ball, it abbreviate | omits. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game control, effect control, and the like are embodied by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a. In this main control board 4100, when the detection signal of the game ball is input from the gate sensor 2302, the ordinary random number generation means 4200 for generating a predetermined ordinary random number which is a lottery result for the ordinary symbol, and the generated ordinary random number In the main control board 4100, an ordinary symbol hold storage unit 4202 temporarily stored according to the conditions of the above and an ordinary symbol variation pattern corresponding to an ordinary random number executed after being stored by the ordinary symbol hold storage unit 4202 The normal symbol display control means for changing and displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 which is selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in 4206 and the normal symbol display control means 4206 for displaying the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 The start opening opening / closing control means 4208 which drives the start opening solenoid 2114 to expand the pair of movable pieces 2105 when the random number (normal lottery result) is “normal hit”, and is stored and stored in the normal symbol storage means 4202 An ordinary symbol storage number display control means 4210 for displaying on the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 as the number of ordinary drawing random numbers as the storage number is provided.

  The normal symbol holding storage unit 4202 described above has a predetermined number (for example, four) of the normal random numbers generated in response to the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate sensor 2302 while the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display control unit 4206 ) And hold the execution of the stored random number until the variable display of the symbol is possible.

  In addition, on the main control board 4100, the first predetermined lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first starting opening sensor 3131 by the start winning to the first starting opening 2101 A first special random number generation means 4212 for generating a special random number, and a first special symbol hold storage means 4214 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated in the first special random number generation means 4212 according to a predetermined condition; A predetermined special symbol variation display pattern previously stored in the ROM of the main control board 4100, corresponding to the first special random number corresponding to the first special random number stored on the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and executed. The first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 selected from the table and the first special symbol variation selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 The first special symbol display control means 4218 for variably displaying the first special symbol of the first special symbol display 1185 based on the turn, and the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 A first special symbol storage number display control means 4220 to be displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 as the storage number is provided. Although not shown in FIG. 189, the main control board 4100 is further provided with a first jackpot symbol random number generation means and a second jackpot symbol random number generation means. If the first special lottery result is a jackpot, the random number generated by the first jackpot symbol random number generation means is acquired, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined. Similarly, when the second special lottery result is a jackpot, the random number generated by the second jackpot symbol random number generation means is acquired, and the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined.

  Furthermore, on the main control board 4100, a second predetermined special lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start opening sensor 3132 by the start winning to the second start opening 2102 A second special random number generation means 4222 for generating a special random number, and a second special symbol hold storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generation means 4222 according to a predetermined condition; A predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100 with a second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special random number stored on the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 and executed The second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4226 selected from the table and the second special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4226 The second special symbol display control means 4228 for variably displaying the second special symbol of the second special symbol display 1186 based on the number of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 A second special symbol storage number display control means 4230 is displayed on the second special symbol storage display 1187 as the storage number.

  The first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 are new special symbols such as the first and second special symbols being changed display by the first and second special symbol display control means 4218, 4228 The first special random number and the second special random number triggered by the detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 3131 and the second starting opening sensor 3132 can not be changed and displayed in predetermined numbers (for example, four each) ) And hold the execution of the first special random number and the second special random number stored until the variable display of the special symbol becomes possible.

  In addition, on the main control board 4100, the first special random number and the second special random number held by the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224, the start winning prize to the starting openings 2101, 2102 The system is provided with a priority reserve digesting means 4231 for giving priority to the second special random number (timing) rather than timing, and the second reserve random number according to the priority reserve digesting means 4231 relates to the second starting port 2102 Holding of the lottery results is prioritized and executed (digested).

  In addition, the first special random number (first special lottery result) and the second special random number (second An advantageous gaming state generation means 4232 for generating an advantageous gaming state which is advantageous for the player based on the special lottery result), and an opening / closing member 2106 for closing the special winning opening 2103 based on an instruction from A special winning opening / closing control means 4234 is provided to drive and control the attachment solenoid 2121 so as to open and close in a predetermined pattern.

  In addition, according to the first special random number and the second special random number (the first special symbol fluctuation pattern and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern) in which the advantageous gaming state is generated by the advantageous gaming state generation means 4232 in the main control board 4100, It further comprises fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table. The variation pattern table changing means 4236 changes, for example, to a variation pattern table (for example, a high probability variation pattern table) which is selected with a high probability that the variation pattern generated by the advantageous gaming state is higher than the normal variation pattern table Change to a variation pattern table (for example, a time reduction variation pattern table) with a time variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being shorter than a normal variation pattern table (so-called definite variation) (so-called, short time) The probability of occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is higher than normal, and it is changed to a variation pattern table (for example, a probability variation time variation pattern table) having a short variation time of a special symbol (so-called probability variation / time shortening).

  In this example, in the advantageous game state generation means 4232, a detection signal from the route detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580R) is input, and according to the detection signal from the route detection sensor 2580, It is possible to decide the jackpot form.

  Furthermore, in the main control board 4100, a normal symbol variation pattern, a first symbol variation pattern, a second symbol variation pattern, and a first special symbol storage according to the normal random number, the first special random number, and the second special random number, Command generation means 4238 for generating commands for predetermined control such as rendering commands based on the second special symbol storage etc., and command transmission means 4240 for transmitting commands generated by the command generation means 4238 to the peripheral control unit 4140 And have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is transparent by the player rotating the handle device 500 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. The game ball is started to be launched into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged on the front of the panel 1200. The game balls driven into the upper part in the game area 1100 flow down in the game area 1100 on the upper left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and can be hit harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted at a suitable position in the front of the game panel 1200 with a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball is in contact with the obstacle nails to allow the game balls to flow down. While the speed is suppressed, various motions are given to the game ball and the motions can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall 2503 of the center character 2500, the plurality of obstacle nails or the inclined upper surface of the peripheral wall 2503 causes the center The user is guided to the area on the left side of the character 2500. In addition, when the gaming ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2503 of the center character 2500, it enters the receiving space 2530 through the receiving entry passage 2545. After being sent, it is discharged into the game area 1100 on the upstream side of the big winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 disposed downstream of the gate unit 2301 and the stage 2510 via the guide passage 2540.

  Then, when the gaming ball which has flowed down the area on the left side of the center prize 2500 in the gaming area 1100 enters and passes through the gate portion 2301 of the gate unit 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor 2302, the main based on the detection signal In the control board 4100, the normal random number generation means 4200 generates an ordinary random number as an ordinary lottery result. Then, based on the ordinary random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), Normal symbols extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) elapse and based on normal random numbers (normal lottery results) are stop displayed (normal symbol indicator 1189 emits either red or green) . The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table in the normal symbol variation pattern selection unit 4204.

  Specifically, in the case where the drawn ordinary random number is a "normal hit" random number, stop display is carried out with a normal symbol that suggests a hit (normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the drawn ordinary random number is a "normal loss" random number In this case, the stop display is made with a normal symbol that suggests a loss (normal symbol display 1189 emits light in red). Then, when the normal symbol indicating a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 closing the second start opening 2102 is expanded for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), The game ball can be awarded to the second starting opening 2102.

  The variation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second starting opening 2102 may be changed according to a special random number (special lottery result) described later, for example, a special random number (special When “short time per minute (including normal short time per, high probability short per time, etc.)” is extracted as a lottery result), the fluctuation time or the spread time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern in the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 can be easily changed by selecting it after replacing it with a different table.

  By the way, in this example, when passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2302 while the normal symbol is being changed and displayed in the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol during the change is stopped and the normal generated and extracted earlier Until the result of the random number is determined, the normal random number (including the normal pattern variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2302 is temporarily stored in the normal pattern holding storage means 4202 and the display thereof The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of reservations) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 1188. This ordinary symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit indicates the number of memories, and in this example, it is possible to store and display up to four. ing. When the number of memories exceeds four, the normal random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2302 is discarded.

  In addition, the game ball which has been driven into the game area 1100 and flowed down the left side of the center character 2500 is moved to the center side of the game area 1100 below the center character 2500 by the shelves 2202 and 2203 of the front side unit 2200 It is supposed to be Then, when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 2104, 2201 arranged below the center character 2500 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 2123, 3133, the main control board 4100 is based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the winning ball device 740 according to the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are , To be dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  If the game ball driven into the game area 1100 does not win in any of the general winning opening 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103, the game is played. It is provided at the center lower end in the left-right direction of the area 1100 and is discharged from the out port 1232 (1151) to the rear lower side of the game board 4. In addition, even if the game balls are won in any of the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103, the winning balls are returned to the gaming area 1100. It is discharged to the rear lower side of the game board 4 without being hit.

  By the way, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2504 opened on the left side of the center character 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500. More specifically, the gaming ball entering the warp entrance 2504 is supplied from the warp exit 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510, and is the site that is mainly the lowest after rolling the first stage 2511 in the left-right direction. It is discharged forward from the Then, the gaming balls released forward from the first stage 2511 are supplied to the second stage 2512 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2511 and are the most after rolling the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction. It is released forward from the lowered central area.

  The gaming balls released forward from the second stage 2512 are supplied to the third stage 2513 disposed on the front and lower side of the second stage 2512 and become lowest after rolling the third stage 2513 in the left-right direction Released backwards from the The gaming ball released from the third stage 2513 is the fourth stage arranged between the third stage 2513 and the first stage 2511 below the third stages 2513 on the left and right sides of the second stage 2512. After being supplied to 2514 and rolling the fourth stage 2514 in the left-right direction, the fourth stage 2514 is discharged downward from the drop hole 2514a. Furthermore, the gaming ball discharged downward from the drop hole 2514a of the fourth stage 2514 is supplied to the fifth stage 2515 disposed immediately below the fourth stage 2514, and after rolling the fifth stage 2515 in the left-right direction The lowermost portion of the left and right sides of the center of the left and right direction is discharged forward and is returned to the inside of the game area 1100.

  When the gaming ball rolling on this stage 2510 enters the first chance entrance 2516 of the first stage 2511 or the second chance entrance 2517 of the second stage 2512, it is from the chance exit 2518 opened immediately above the first start opening 2101. It is released into the game area 1100 and can be received to the first starting opening 2101 with high probability. Then, when the gaming ball is received by the first starting opening 2101 and detected by the first starting opening sensor 3131, a predetermined number (for example, three) of gaming balls from the winning ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 etc. Is to be dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 are arranged in the vertical direction, the gaming balls released from the stage 2510 have a high probability of being the first Since it is likely to be accepted by the starting opening 2101 etc. and the gaming ball is released from the stage 2510 when the second starting opening 2102 is acceptable, not only the first starting opening 2101 The second starting port 2102 can also have a sense of expectation regarding the reception of the game ball and can enhance the interest.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game ball is driven to flow down the right side of the center character 2500, the game ball to the upstream side of the big winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 Is released, so that when the big winning opening 2103 is acceptable, it is possible to have the gaming ball be accepted to the big winning opening 2103 with high probability. Therefore, in the gaming state where the special winning opening 2103 can be received, the game ball can be hit so that the game ball rolls in the receiving space 2530. In other words, in the gaming state where the special winning opening 2103 can be received, it is possible to cause the special winning opening 2103 to be accepted with high probability through the receiving space 2530 simply by striking the gaming ball harder than a predetermined amount. It is supposed to be.

  By the way, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 of the gate member 2400 and is detected by the gate sensor 2302 and a "normal hit" is drawn as a normal lottery result, as described above, the second starting opening 2102 is closed. When the pair of movable pieces 2105 is expanded for a predetermined time and becomes possible to win, and the game ball is received by the second start opening 2102 and detected by the second start opening sensor 3132 when the winning becomes possible, main control A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 301 from the winning ball device 740 via the substrate 4100 and the like.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, and is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3131 and the second starting opening sensor 3132, the first starting The first special random number generation means 4212 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number in the mouth 2101, and the second start random number 2102 generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number by the second special random number generation means 4222. It will be. Then, after the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started based on the extracted special random number, The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as the special lottery result.

  In the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode that suggests a "big hit", the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern A special advantage gaming state (for example, a jackpot game) is generated, and in the meantime, by winning the gaming ball to the large winning opening 2103, more gaming balls can be acquired. It should be noted that, when one game ball wins the big winning opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740. However, even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner that suggests a "big hit", a big hit game does not occur immediately, but a condition device that becomes a condition required for a big hit game to be activated is activated. Then, based on the jackpot game mode being determined, execution of the jackpot game in the determined jackpot game mode is started. In addition, the jackpot game mode is a jackpot game mode of 9 rounds when the game ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580R during the effective period in which the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580R) is activated. It is determined. Also, during the valid period, when the gaming ball is detected in the route detection sensor 2580L, the jackpot determination gate detection sensor 3665 is activated, and when the gaming ball is detected in the jackpot determination gate detection sensor 3665, The jackpot game mode of 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds or 15 rounds is determined based on.

  It should be noted that the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 is not activated when the gaming ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580R before it is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L when the condition device is activated, and the game is played When a sphere is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L before it is detected by the route detection sensor 2580R, it is validated based on this. Then, when the passage of the gaming ball to the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 is detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 during the period when the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 is activated, the jackpot mode is based on this. The activation of the determination gate detection sensor 3665 ends.

  In addition, also in these 1st starting opening 2101 and 2nd starting opening 2102, the 1st special symbol indicator 1185 and the 2nd special symbol display as well as the fluctuation indication of the normal design by passage of the game sphere to gate component 2400 The game ball wins on the starting opening 2101 and 2102 when the special symbol can not be changed and displayed during the special symbol changing display in the bowl 1186 or the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state etc., and the first starting opening sensor While being detected by 3131 and the second starting opening sensor 3132, it is extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 3131 and the second starting opening sensor 3132 until the variation display of the special symbol becomes possible. We store the first special random number and the second special random number in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 and hold the display It is, has a number of the stored special random numbers, to be displayed in the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 or the second special symbol memory indicator 1187.

  Each of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 consists of two LEDs, and the combination of the light-emitting states of the light-off, light-on, and blinking LEDs indicates the number of memories. In this example, up to four of each are stored and displayed. When the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random numbers are discarded. In addition, the second special random number stored (held) by the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 by the priority hold and digest unit 4231 has priority over the first special random number stored by the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 Are to be carried out (digested). That is, withholding of the lottery result relating to the second starting port 2102 and the third starting port 2415 is executed (digested) in preference to holding of the lottery result relating to the first starting port 2101.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number or the second special random number special random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting opening sensor 3131 and the second starting opening sensor 3132 is selected as the first special symbol variation pattern selection The special random numbers are “losing” and “big hit” by collating with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a special symbol fluctuation pattern table) determined in advance by means 4216 or second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 4226 While being judged as which, it is judged also about the stop symbol of a special symbol. In addition, the random number determination table is also configured to determine "perhaps with a certain time variation", "perhaps with a certain variation", "per time variation", "a certain probability during a short time" and the like.

  Then, the first special random number and the second special random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 (special drawing result), the "big hit" In the case, as described above, the main control board 4100 activates the condition device that is one condition for executing the jackpot game. The advantageous game state generation means 4232 executes a big hit game advantageous to the player, and a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, or predetermined A round game of opening and closing patterns (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) in which the opening and closing member 2106 is closed when any number of (for example, nine) game balls satisfy the winning condition in the large winning opening 2103 Are repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if 3 rounds are determined as a jackpot game mode, "3 times", if 6 rounds are determined, "6 times", if 9 rounds are determined, "9 times", 12 rounds are determined. By repeating the round game "12 times" if it is determined, and "15 times" if 15 rounds are determined, it is possible to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the extracted first special random number and second special random number are “big hit”, the main control board 4100 plays the gate 2575 based on the activation of the condition device. It is possible to accept the detection signal of the gaming ball from the route detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580R) when the ball passes, and from which route detection sensor 2580L, 2580R the detection signal is sent first, As described above, any one of a plurality of jackpot forms having different processing structures, etc., for determining the number of rounds of the "big hit" game is determined.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special random number and the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the third starting opening 2415 (In accordance with the special lottery result), the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 are variably displayed, and in the liquid crystal display 1900 and the second liquid crystal display 3252 Also, the effect image corresponding to the special random number (special lottery result) is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, the variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows). When the stop display is performed and all the symbol rows are finally stop displayed, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the stopped display symbols is suggested to the player. That is, according to the special lottery result by the starting winning combination, after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed, the effect image to be stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed. In addition, since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like are larger than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol displays 1185 and 1186, the player generally displays on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. It will pay attention to the symbol that was made.

  As one of the effect images on which a plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed, a combination of symbols stopped and displayed with one fluctuating symbol row displayed is displayed such that a specific condition (reach) is satisfied. As a special lottery result in which the "reach effect image" is displayed, there are "reach per reach" and "reach lost". In addition, there is also a "reach development effect image" which is displayed so as to be connected to the "reach effect image" and emphasizes and displays the remaining symbol rows variably displayed after reach display. Further, on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, not only the effect display related to the start winning, but also the "big hit game effect image" displayed during the "big hit" game can be displayed.

  The variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 189). The variation display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like is controlled by the periphery control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the command according to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the periphery control unit 4140. It has become. In this way, the peripheral control unit 4140 controls the variation display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like to which the player pays particular attention. Therefore, some of the lottery results transmitted from the main control board 4100 For one command, a plurality of fluctuation patterns of symbols can be prepared in advance to increase the fluctuation patterns of symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. The "big hit game effect image" and the like displayed in the "big hit" game and the like are also controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. As a result, the display pattern of the effect image to be displayed can be increased without increasing the load of the arithmetic processing on the main control board 4100, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining to the player and less likely to get bored. It has become.

  Further, in the peripheral control unit 4140, in addition to the control of the effect image, each drive motor 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 provided in the front unit 2000 or the rear unit 3000 based on the command related to the lottery result. , And each solenoid etc. is appropriately operated, and each decoration substrate 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 324, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, provided on the game board 4 The LEDs mounted on the 3690, 3692, etc. are made to emit light as appropriate, so that the player can be entertained by the movable effect and the light emission effect.

  By the way, if the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot, as described above, in the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186, it indicates that it is a "big hit" When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode, and then the gaming ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R while the condition device is activated, and the gaming ball is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L and 2580R, (When the game ball passes the left gate 2575L, in addition to the detection of the route detection sensor 2580L and when it is further detected by the jackpot determination gate detection sensor 3665), the jackpot game is started. However, the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment are different in the role to be played from the special symbol lottery in the conventional pachinko machine as follows.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game characteristics from when the predetermined start condition is established (NO in step S301) to when the jackpot game is started will be summarized.

  Processing in which a judgment on a jackpot is made if a predetermined start condition is satisfied (NO in step S301) based on the start winning to the first start opening 1502 or the start winning to the second start opening 1506 (NO in step S301) Step S315), the process of determining the type of benefit when a big hit game is played (step S316, step S607), and the result of the judgment about whether or not to play a big hit game is indicated on the variable display of the symbol A series of processes related to the special symbol game in which the execution of each process is sequentially permitted such as the process of performing such control (step S150, step S180), and so on (NO in step S301, the processing flag is "0 The process until it is updated to "" is started.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the gates 2575L and 2575R capable of receiving the game balls driven into the game area 1100 are prepared separately from the starting openings 1502 and 1506, When the start condition is satisfied, of the processes (step S316 and step S607) for determining the type of benefit when the jackpot game is performed, the execution mode determination process in which the execution mode when the jackpot game is performed is determined In step S607, a series of processes relating to the game of the special symbol is performed so that the process is not performed yet.

  That is, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is a lottery type for a jackpot game such as "reliable type jackpot form" and "a pounding type jackpot type" described later with respect to one result such as "jackpot". It is not yet decided which of the plurality of jackpots to be adopted in the processing in which judgment on the jackpot is made after either of the two different jackpots is adopted alternatively. I will make a decision on the matter. As a result, when the jackpot is won, the condition control is operated after symbol control is performed so that the jackpot symbol combination appears, and then the detection of the gaming ball by the route detection sensor 2580L and the route detection sensor 2580R is performed. Activate the game according to which of the two gates 2575L and 2575R the game ball has passed, and proceed with the game under "reliable type jackpot form" and "shocked type jackpot form", which will be described later. It is decided to decide what to do.

  However, even if the detection of the gaming ball by the route detection sensor 2580L and the route detection sensor 2580R is enabled, the operation mode of the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550 is simply directed to the gaming area 1100 Basically, such gaming balls are more likely to be guided to the right route than the left route. That is, when the jackpot is won, the pachinko machine 1 basically makes the game proceed with a relief type jackpot and is a stability-oriented player who wants to obtain a certain amount of prize balls. It is a game machine for players. And for such a stability-oriented player, since the launched gaming ball is basically guided to the right route, both the "reliable type jackpot form" and the "jacket type jackpot form" are provided. It is possible to eliminate the annoyance of having to select either the relief type or the pounding type each time a possible state is achieved (the jackpot is won).

  However, even if the player desires stability intention, if he wants to change the game, he does not proceed with the game based on the “reliable type jackpot form”, but the “jacket type of throbbing type” In some cases, it is desirable to advance the game under the There are also cases where a player who is originally speculative-oriented plays a game with such a gaming machine. Even in these cases, it is not simply a simple game in which one of the relief type and the pounding type is selected each time the jackpot is won, but the game ball is induced to the left route as little The game characteristic that the game ball must be fired aiming at a chance will be added.

  Here, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment detects that the game ball has passed through the right gate 2575R during a period in which the detection of the game ball by the route detection sensor 2580L or the route detection sensor 2580R is activated. When detected by the sensor 2580R, the game under the "reliable type jackpot form" is advanced. In the game under the "reliable type jackpot form", first, based on the jackpot type (value for jackpot symbol random number) which has already been determined (step S316) when executing the jackpot game, A lottery process in which the execution mode is determined is performed.

  For example, in the process of step S316, when it is determined that the jackpot of the specific type is not determined, it is shown in FIG. 203 based on the jackpot game mode determination random number acquired when detected by the route detection sensor 2580R. By referring to the table, the "9" round will be determined as the jackpot gaming mode with a lottery probability of "100%". However, as described above, in the process of step S316 that has already been processed, it may be determined that it is a jackpot of a specific type with a probability of "10%" based on the jackpot symbol random number, as a result When the flag indicating that is set to ON in the process of step S317, the right gate of the table shown in FIG. 202 is obtained based on the jackpot gaming mode determination random number acquired when detected by the route detection sensor 2580R. The “15” round is determined as the jackpot game mode with the “100%” lottery probability by referring to the column of “4”.

  As described above, the game under the "reliable type jackpot form" is a jackpot game in which the payout of a certain amount or more of prize balls is guaranteed such that the round game is repeated at least nine times. It is supposed to be started.

  On the other hand, when it is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L that the game ball has passed the left gate 2575L during the period when the detection of the game balls by the route detection sensor 2580L or the route detection sensor 2580R is activated, Advance the game under the jackpot form. Also in the game under this "big hit form of pounding type", first, when executing the big hit game, its execution mode based on the type (win kind) of the big hit that has already been determined (step S316) Perform a lottery process that is decided.

  However, the processing structure concerning the progress of such a game is different from the case of the “reliable type jackpot form”, and for example, when it is determined in the process of step S316 that it is not a jackpot of a specific type, route detection Using the jackpot game mode determination random number acquired when the passage of the game ball to the left gate 2575L is detected by the sensor 2580L, referring to the table of FIG. Decide on one. Then, when the passage of the gaming ball to the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 is detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, based on the determined lottery pattern (any one of the a pattern to the c pattern), Referring to FIG. 204 (b), processing is performed in which "15" round or "3" round is determined as a jackpot game mode. On the other hand, in the process of step S316 that has already been processed, when it is determined that the jackpot of the specific type is "10%" based on the jackpot symbol random number (in the process of step S317 When the flag indicating that is turned ON), the left gate column of the table shown in FIG. 202 is based on the jackpot game mode determination random number acquired when detected by the route detection sensor 2580L. By referring to the "100%" lottery probability, the "15" round is determined as the jackpot game mode.

  As described above, in the game under the "rapid jackpot form of throbbing type", the "3" round (the smallest payout is not made even if the payout of a certain amount of payout balls is guaranteed in the "reliable type jackpot form" A game type risk is given as a game mode in which only balls are obtained as a jackpot game mode, or the probability that "15" round is determined as a jackpot game mode is increased, etc. Compared to the case of the jackpot form, the processing structure according to the game lottery when the jackpot is won is different although it is possible to execute either from the jackpot of one jackpot.

  Note that the processing structure under the “reliable type big hit form” is the processing of steps S6072 to S6074 shown in FIG. The processing structure under the "big hit form of pounding type" is the processing of steps S6076-S6080 shown in FIG. Of each process.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R are both shown in FIG. 136 while being provided intentionally in the receiving unit 2550. Basically, the gaming ball is made easier to pass through the right gate 2575R than the left gate 2575L by the movable valve 2551 for guiding the gaming ball received in the receiving unit 2550 to the left gate 2575L. Therefore, as a player, although it will be in a state where it is possible to grant both "relief type jackpot form" and "shock type jackpot form", basically, a certain amount of balls are secured mainly The game will be advanced under the “reliable type jackpot form” that can be done.

  However, as described above, basically, the movable valve 2551 according to this embodiment is a mode (a mode of FIG. 137) in which the game ball is easily guided to the right route than the left route in the reception space 2530. When the game ball is fired at a specific timing that periodically visits, the game ball is pivoted to a mode in which the game ball is more easily guided to the left route than the right route in the receiving space 2530 (a mode of FIG. 136) .

  The movable valve 2551 in the present embodiment is maintained for a predetermined time (17 seconds) in a mode (a mode of FIG. 137) in which gaming balls are easily guided to the right route than the left route in the reception space 2530. Then, it rotates and is maintained for only a short time (3 seconds) in a mode (a mode of FIG. 136) in which gaming balls are easily guided to the left side route than the right side route in the receiving space 2530. Then, when such a short time has elapsed, the movable valve 2551 pivots again, and the mode of FIG. 137 is obtained. The movable valve 2551 repeatedly performs such a pivoting operation in the same pattern.

  Note that, in the case where 100 game balls are fired in one minute when the game balls are fired continuously, the game balls are more easily induced to the left route than the right route in the receiving space 2530. Preferably (for the embodiment of FIG. 136), at least about 2 seconds is maintained. About three balls of game balls can be fired during this two seconds, but considering the range of time lag that occurs from the game balls being fired to reaching the movable valve 2551, the game balls are In order to be able to induce game balls to the left route with a fairly high probability when the player aims to be guided to the left route and the game balls are fired, at least 2 seconds or more Preferably, the movable valve 2551 is maintained in the mode of FIG. In addition, in order to absorb the above-mentioned gap time and ensure that the gaming ball is guided to the left gate 2575L, the movable valve 2551 may be maintained in the mode of FIG. 136 for three seconds or more. preferable. However, the game ball is guided to the right route rather than the left route in the receiving space 2530 for the time when the game ball is easily guided to the left route than the right route in the receiving space 2530 (the embodiment in FIG. 136) It is necessary to be shorter than the time maintained in the easy to carry out mode (the mode in FIG. 137).

  On the other hand, the time during which game balls are easily guided to the right route rather than the left route in the receiving space 2530 (the embodiment in FIG. 137) is at least the left route than the right route in the receiving space 2530. It is essential that the game ball be maintained for a longer period of time than the time in which the game ball is easily induced (the embodiment of FIG. 136), and it is preferable that at least about 10 seconds be maintained. Since game balls of about 16 balls can be fired during this 10 seconds, the game balls are more easily induced to the left route than the right route in the receiving space 2530 (the embodiment of FIG. 136). If the game time is, for example, 2 seconds, if the game ball is just fired without aiming at either the right route or the left route, the game ball is induced on the right route and the game ball is induced on the left route. The ratio with the case (the ratio between the case where it is determined as the "relief type jackpot form" and the case where it is determined as the "jacket type of pounding type") is approximately 17: 3. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball is easily guided to the left route than the right route in the receiving space 2530 (the mode of FIG. 136) and maintained for a predetermined time (3 seconds). Because the game ball is maintained for a short time (17 seconds) in a mode (the mode of FIG. 137) in which gaming balls are easily induced to the right route rather than the left route in the case, The ratio with the case where the gaming ball is induced (the ratio when it is determined to be the "reliable type jackpot type" to the "when it is determined to be the pounding type jackpot type") is approximately 17 to 3.

  However, the game ball is mainly induced to the right route when the game ball is just fired without aiming at either the right route or the left route, and when the game ball is launched to aim the left route, it is better than the right route. Based on the viewpoint that gaming balls are easily induced to the left route, the time maintained in the mode (embodiment of FIG. 137) in which gaming balls are easily induced to the right route than the left route in the receiving space 2530 (10 seconds or more) The time during which game balls are easily induced to the left route rather than the right route in the receiving space 2530 (the time in which game balls of 16 to 17 balls or more are guided to the right route) It is preferable to set it as about 3 seconds (time in which four to five gaming balls are guided to the left route). Then, when the game ball is just fired without aiming at either the right route or the left route, the game proceeds under the "reliable type jackpot form" with a probability of about 80% or more. However, when the game ball is launched aiming at the left route (targeting the timing at which the movable valve 2551 is maintained in the mode of FIG. 136), the game ball is induced to the left route rather than the right route. It becomes easier, and there is a high probability that the game will progress under the “jacket form of throbbing type”.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although the gaming ball is basically guided to the right route rather than the left route, the operation timing of the movable valve 2551 that allows the guidance of the gaming ball to the left route. If it is desired to proceed with the game under the “jackpot form of pounding type” by daring to have periodicity in the left side route in the receiving space 2530 by adjusting the firing timing of the gaming balls It is intended to provide a technically intrusive game aiming to roll the game ball to the (left gate 2575L). As a result, when the game ball passes the left gate 2575L and then the game ball is detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, a round lottery process is performed as a game under the "jackpot form of pounding type". Will be done.

  According to such a configuration, if the game ball is merely fired toward the game area 1100, the game is performed on the right gate 2575R (right route) rather than the left gate 2575L (left route) in the receiving unit 2550. Since the ball is easily induced, the stability-oriented player who wishes to obtain a certain amount of winning balls when the jackpot game is executed reduces the inconvenience of having to select the right route or the left route each time. can do. Also, from the time when the game ball is induced to the right route while being aware of the risk that only a small amount of winning balls can be obtained than when the game ball is induced to the right route when the jackpot game is executed For a speculative player who wants to play a game that can earn a large amount of balls, it is not merely merely selecting the right route or the left route in the receiving unit 2550, but taking advantage of fewer chances to the left The game ball is aimed to be induced to the route and the game ball will be fired.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the condition device is activated in the drawing of whether to activate the condition device performed based on the reception of the game ball to the starting openings 2101 and 2102. Even if is determined, when the game ball passes the left gate 2575L, the average of "50%" and "3" round (game mode that can get only the least amount of balls) is determined as the jackpot game mode on average It has become so. In addition to this, based on the jackpot symbol random number, when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the specific type with a probability of "10%", which of the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R the game ball has passed Regardless, since "15" round (the game mode that can get the most balls out) is decided as a jackpot game mode, when it is a jackpot of a specific type, it is possible to make the left gate 2575L pass the game ball well Even if there is no such case, such gaming risk is avoided, and it is possible to suppress that the game interest is lowered by paying out at least a predetermined amount or more.

  In this example, when the jackpot flag of the specific type is ON, as can be understood by referring to the table of FIG. 202, the lottery probability is selected for the jackpot game of 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 9 rounds and 12 rounds. The jackpot game of 15 rounds is made to be lottery with 0, and 100% probability, but it is not limited to this, for example, when the jackpot flag of a specific type is ON, a specific jackpot game (without lottery) In this example, the jackpot game of 15 rounds may be determined.

  In addition, when the jackpot of the normal type is won, in the jackpot form when the game ball passes the right gate 2575R, 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds and 15 as can be understood by referring to the table in FIG. For the jackpot game of the round, the lottery probability is set to 0, and the jackpot game of 9 rounds is drawn with 100% probability, but it is not limited thereto. For example, the jackpot flag of a specific type is not ON and right When the game ball passes through the gate 2575R, it is decided that the average profit calculated based on the prescribed probability is determined to be a jackpot game (9 rounds of jackpot games in this example), without lottery, as a prize ball. May be

  In addition, during the period when detection of the game ball with such route detection sensor 2580L or route detection sensor 2580R is validated, route detection sensor 2580L or route detection sensor by the game ball passing either gate 2575L and 2575R It is continued until 2580R detects a game ball. Therefore, the player can prolong the timing at which the game ball should be fired toward the game area 1100 (the receiving unit 2550) in relation to the periodic operation by the movable valve 2551. However, when at least one game ball is hit toward the receiving unit 2550, the game ball passes either of the gates 2575L and 2575R, and the "reliable type jackpot" and "the pounding type jackpot" The processing according to the game progress according to either is performed, and the jackpot game according to the result of the process will be started by extension.

  Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot, the function that the gates 2575L and 2575R should perform according to the type of the jackpot It is different.

  More specifically, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is the jackpot, the specific type only if the jackpot symbol random number acquired of the jackpot symbol random numbers 0 to 9 is 7 It is judged that it is a big hit normally when it is judged that it is a big hit and the big hit symbol random numbers other than 7 among 0-9 are acquired. Thus, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, it is judged with high probability that it is a regular type big hit, so the gates 2575L, 2575R (more specifically, the route detection sensor 2580L, 2580R) and the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 (more specifically, the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665) always functions as a member for determining the execution mode of the jackpot game. That is, step S6074 and step S6080 executed by the main control MPU 4100a are respectively the right gate 2575R (route detection sensor 2580R) and the left gate 2575L (route detection sensor 2580L) and the big hit mode determination gate 3660 (big hit mode determination gate detection sensor) 3665) will always serve as a functionalizing means that functions as a member that determines the execution mode of the jackpot game.

  However, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is the specific type jackpot, when the gaming ball passes the gates 2575L and 2575R, the execution mode of the jackpot game is referred to the table of FIG. Although the lottery to be determined is performed, this lottery is only a formal lottery in which the execution mode of the jackpot is predetermined. In other words, since 15 predetermined rounds of jackpot games are executed based on the fact that the game ball passes the gates 2575L and 2575R, the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, route detection) The sensors 2580L and 2580R) function as an execution trigger for the jackpot game. That is, since it is always determined NO in steps S6072 and S6076, the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, the route detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) always perform the big hit game execution mode in steps S6074 and S6080. Although it functions as a member to be determined, YES is determined in steps S6072 and S6076 only when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a specific type jackpot, gate 2575L, 2575R (more detailed The route detection sensor 2580L (2580R) functions as a member that determines the execution mode of the jackpot game. Therefore, right gate 2575R (route detection sensor 2580R) and left gate 2575L (route detection sensor 2580L) which function as a member which always determines the execution mode of the big hit game are executed by the main control MPU 4100a, respectively. ) As a function changing means for changing the function so as to function as a member to determine the execution mode of the jackpot game only when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a specific type jackpot Will play a role.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball rolls to either the route detection sensor 2580L side route or the route detection sensor 2580R side route by the receiving unit 2550, the rolling route is grasped As can be done, at least until the end of the jackpot game, the ball route indication member 2590 on the side where the gaming balls roll is turned on.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot of the “reliable type jackpot form” or the “jacket type jackpot form” is generated by the game balls driven into the game area 1100 by the player. The processing according to the game progress according to the form is executed, and the jackpot game according to the result of the processing is started.

[Display Effects Displayed on Mini LCD]
When the game according to the "big hit type of pounding type" is started, an expected rendering using the back lower right rendering unit 3600 is executed. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the game area 1100, the case of being determined as the "reliable type big hit form" and "the pounding type of pounding type" Is approximately 17 to 3). Therefore, when the condition device is activated by winning the jackpot lottery, although the condition can be determined as either "relief type jackpot form" or "shocked type jackpot form", mainly "relief type" The jackpot form will be determined. Thus, in the case where most of the condition devices are determined to be the "relief type jackpot form" when operated, despite the fact that the "jacket form of the pounding type" has been determined, it is indeed a non-maximum amount per hit. When the display effect is performed as if it is determined to be (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of jackpots), it may be awakening and the interest may decrease.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the condition device is activated, the "big hit form of the pounding type" which is determined relatively less in most of the "reliable type big hit forms" is determined. In the case of the mini liquid crystal display 3670, the probability to be determined per maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpot) is determined to non-maximum amount per round (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of jackpot). Although it is lower than the probability of being displayed, as the effect mode to be displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670, the display effect of the A pattern that evokes the maximum amount per c is more than the display effect of the C pattern that evokes the non maximum amount. It is made to be displayed with high probability. Thus, although the probability determined per maximum amount is lower than the probability determined per non-maximum amount, the maximum amount for the player who sees the presentation mode displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 It is possible to be aware of the player as if the degree of expectation that the jackpot game of the hit is performed is higher than the possibility that the jackpot game of the non-maximum amount will be played. As a result, when the condition device is activated and the jackpot game of about 9 rounds is executed, when the "biggest form of pounding type" is determined, the probability internally determined to be the maximum per winning amount is non-maximum Although the probability per unit is lower than the probability determined, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the jackpot game per maximum amount, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  As described above, when the passage detection of the game ball to the left gate 2575L is detected by the route detection sensor 2580 (YES in step S6075) and it is the big hit of the normal type (NO in step S6076), the table of FIG. , And is determined as one of the lottery patterns among the a pattern, the b pattern and the c pattern (step S6078). This information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a command from the main control board 4100. Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 receives a command indicating whether any of the a pattern, b pattern and c pattern is determined to be the lottery pattern (more specifically, the display effect displayed on the display area of the mini liquid crystal display 3670 The mini liquid crystal display control device) controls the display effect displayed on the display area of the mini liquid crystal display 3670 based on the command.

  In the display area of the mini liquid crystal display 3670, any one of the A pattern, the B pattern and the C pattern is displayed as a display effect pattern based on the lottery pattern determined among the a pattern, b pattern and c pattern. It is determined that the rendering pattern is displayed (see FIG. 206). Here, FIG. 206 is a table for determining the display effect pattern displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 based on the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 which is the processing of the main control MPU 4100a. The determination of the display effect pattern displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 may be performed by the main control MPU 4100a, but from the viewpoint of reducing the load on the main control substrate 4100, it is performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a Is preferred.

  As shown in FIG. 207, all of the A pattern, B pattern and C pattern have a large dragon 5000 that recalls non-maximum amount hits (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds big hits) as characters, and a maximum amount per roll ( It is a display effect pattern in which a small dragon 5100 for reminding of 15 rounds of jackpots is displayed. The A pattern is that most of all dragons are 5100, and the number of great dragons is only 12.5% of the total (2 of the 16 dragons are two large dragons), which is more than the non-maximum amount per hit. It is a display effect pattern with the highest expectation determined per quantity. The pattern B is a display effect pattern in which the ratio of the large dragon 5000 to the small dragon 5100 is approximately 1 to 1, and following the A pattern, it is a display effect pattern with high expectation to be determined per maximum amount rather than non maximum amount per unit is there. The C pattern is a display effect pattern in which a small dragon 5100 is displayed at a ratio of approximately two large dragons 5000 to one, and a display effect having the lowest expectation that is determined to be the largest per unit than the non maximum It is a pattern.

  As shown in the table of FIG. 206, when the lottery pattern determined in step S6078, which is the process of the main control MPU 4100a, is a pattern, it is determined to be A pattern with a probability of 30% and B with a probability of 60%. The pattern is determined, and the C pattern is determined with a probability of 10%. When the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 is the b pattern, the pattern A is determined with a probability of 40%, the pattern B is determined with a probability of 50%, and the pattern C is determined with a probability of 10%. Ru. . When the lottery pattern determined in step S6078 is c pattern, it is determined to be A pattern with a probability of 70% and is determined to be B pattern with a probability of 30% and is not determined to be C pattern .

  In this manner, when the display effect pattern of any of the A pattern, the B pattern, and the C pattern is determined, the determined display effect pattern is displayed in the display area of the mini liquid crystal display 3670. FIG. 208 is an example showing an aspect of the display effect displayed on the display area of the mini liquid crystal display 3670. As shown in FIG. 208, at the center of the mini liquid crystal display 3670, there is a frame display area 3670a surrounded by a frame, and toward the frame display area 3670a (see the arrow in FIG. 208) The dragon 5100 is scrolled in turn one by one.

  However, the large dragon 5000 and the small dragon 5100 are not scrolled at a constant speed, and if the small dragon 5100, they will be displayed back quickly even if they are about to be displayed in the frame display area 3670a due to their lightness. Passage display of the frame display area 3670a or the like is performed. Also, if it is a large dragon 5000, it will attack toward the small dragon 5100 displayed in the frame display area 3670a because it is strong.

  As described above, as to whether the jackpot game to be executed is the jackpot among the 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds and 15 rounds, the passage of the gaming ball to the jackpot determination gate 3660 is the jackpot determination gate as described above It is determined based on the detection by the detection sensor 3665 (all refer to FIG. 181 to FIG. 185) (see step S 6080). Here, with regard to information on which of the jackpots of the determined jackpot game modes of 3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds and 15 rounds, the peripheral control unit 4140 is issued as a command from the main control board 4100. Will be sent.

  When it is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L that the game ball shot toward the game area 1100 by the player has passed through the left gate 25757L, as described above, any of the a to c patterns is selected as the lottery pattern. It is determined. Then, prior to the passage of the gaming ball to the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, the character (Oryu 5000 or Koryu 5100) is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a. Here, when the determined lottery pattern is the a pattern or the b pattern, control is performed so that the large dragon 5000 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a. When the determined lottery pattern is the c pattern, control is performed so that the small dragon 5100 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a. That is, based on the determined lottery pattern, display control is performed on the characters stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a.

  In addition, the display effect in which the large dragon 5000 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a is a determined effect of the a pattern or the b pattern (a determined effect of not being the c pattern). In addition, the display effect in which the small dragon 5100 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a is the c pattern determination effect (determination effect that neither a pattern nor b pattern is performed).

  Therefore, when the small dragon 5100 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a (when it is the c pattern), it has a higher probability than the probability determined to the non maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds) Perform display effects to give the player a sense of expectation, such as being determined at the maximum amount (15 rounds of big wins) (see FIG. 204 (b)), from the stage where the big wins to be executed have not yet been determined It becomes possible.

  In addition, when Oryu 5000 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a (when it is a pattern or b pattern), the non-maximum amount per shot (3 times the probability determined for the maximum amount per shot (15 rounds) Although the probability determined in round, six rounds, and twelve rounds of jackpots) is higher, it is not determined to be determined in non-maximum amount per round. In particular, even if the large dragon 5000 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a, it is not determined that the lottery pattern is the b pattern by this alone, and the possibility of the a pattern is also left. While it is possible to perform a c pattern determination performance such that the dragon 5100 is stopped and displayed, it is possible to avoid a display effect that gives a discouragement to the player.

  As described above, display control is performed for characters stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a based on the determined lottery pattern, but the large dragon 5000 and the small dragon 5100 are scrolled at a constant speed. In the case of the small dragon 5100, the back display or the rapid display of the frame display area 3670a is performed, and in the case of the large dragon 5000, the small dragon 5100 attacks the small dragon 5100 displayed in the frame display area 3670a Display effects are performed. Therefore, even if the character displayed in the frame display area 3670a is any of the large dragon 5000 and the small dragon 5100, giving an unnaturalness to the player is alleviated.

  Then, after the large dragon 5000 or the small dragon 5100 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a, it is not illustrated when it is detected by the large hitting mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 that the gaming ball has passed the large hitting mode determination gate 3660. A character with a rifle appears, and a display effect (a confrontation effect) is performed in which the character (Oryu 5000 or Koryu 5100) stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a faces the character with a rifle. As described above, the jackpot executed out of three rounds, six rounds, twelve rounds and fifteen rounds based on detection that the gaming ball has passed through the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 Since the game is determined, display control of the above-mentioned confrontation effect is performed based on this determination.

  Specifically, if the jackpot game to be executed is the maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpot), the character holding the rifle is displayed as the character (Oryu 5000 or Oryu 5100) stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a There will be a matchmaking effect such as winning. After that, the jackpot game of the maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpots) is executed.

  In addition, if the jackpot game to be executed is non-maximum amount hit (3 round, 6 round, 12 round jackpot), the character with the rifle is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a (Oryu 5000 or small It is a confrontation production that defeats the dragon 5100). And then, the jackpot game (non-maximum amount per shot (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds) determined based on the fact that the game ball passed through the hit mode determination gate 3660 was detected by the big hit mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 A big hit game) is played.

  It should be noted that in the case of the Great Dragon 5000, the degree of expectation for the character with the rifle to win is low, and in the case of the small dragon 5100, the character with the rifle wins with a higher probability than in the case of the Great Dragon 5000. Therefore, when the character stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a is the Oryu 5000, the non-maximum amount per winning (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds winning) is determined rather than the maximum amount per hitting (15 rounds big winning) If the player recalls that the possibility of being played is high and the character stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a is the small dragon 5100, it is possible that the maximum amount of hits has been determined rather than the non-maximum amount of hits. It will remind the player that it is high. In addition, even if the character holding the rifle loses the character (Oryu 5000 or Koryu 5100) stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a, the reverse victory is performed thereafter and the finalized display of the maximum amount is performed. May be

  In the present embodiment, prior to passage of the game ball to the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, the character (Oryu 5000 or Koryu 5100) is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a. However, after the game ball passes the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 (that is, after the jackpot game to be executed is internally determined), the character (Oryu 5000 or Oryu 5100) in the frame display area 3670a May be stopped and displayed. However, the effect that allows the lottery pattern to be determined (display effect that the small dragon 5100 or the large dragon 5000 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a) is executed from the stage where the jackpot to be executed is not yet determined. Prior to the passage of the game ball to the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, the character (Oryu 5000 or Oryu 5100) is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a. It is preferable to do so.

  Thus, between the passage of the gaming ball to the left gate 2575L being detected by the route detection sensor 2580L and the passage of the gaming ball to the big hit aspect determination gate 3660 being detected by the big hit aspect determination gate detection sensor 3665 The mini liquid crystal display 3670 scrolls and displays one of the display effect patterns A pattern, B pattern and C pattern, and the large dragon 5000 or small dragon 5100 is stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a. Thereafter, based on the passage of the gaming ball to the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 being detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, a character (Oryu 5000 or Oryu 5100) stopped and displayed in the frame display area 3670a, Play with the character with the rifle. Then, a display effect indicating a mode of the jackpot game determined based on the detection of the passage of the gaming ball to the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665 is performed.

  As described above, in the mini liquid crystal display 3670, since the above-described display effects are performed, among the A pattern, the B pattern, and the C pattern, the C pattern having a relatively high proportion of the large dragon 5000 with respect to the whole is the mini liquid crystal display When displayed on the container 3670, it is possible to give the player an impression of high expectation that the jackpot game of the non-maximum amount (3 round, 6 round, 12 round jackpots) is determined. As a result, when the condition device is activated by winning the jackpot lottery and most of them are determined to be the "reliable type jackpot form", the "non-maximal type" is determined when "the pounding type of pounding type" is determined. It is possible to make the player aware that the jackpot of the maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpots) is more likely to be executed than the jackpot of quantities, and thus it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement. As a result, although most of the jackpot lottery wins and the conditional device is activated, most of them are determined to be the "reliable type jackpot form", despite being determined to be "the pounding type of pounding type". It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by the display effect as if determined to be a jackpot per non-maximum amount.

  In addition, as shown in the table in FIG. 206, the probability of being determined as a C pattern having a greater number of 5000 major dragons than a small dragon 5100 is extremely low, and a majority of A or B patterns are displayed. Become. The C pattern is a pattern or b pattern (Fig. 204 (b (b)) with a high probability that the non-maximum amount per (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds jackpot) is determined rather than the jackpot per maximum amount (15 rounds jackpot) Even if it is the table of), it is made to be determined only with a probability of 10%. Therefore, in the mini liquid crystal display 3670, it is determined that the pattern a or b has a high probability that the non-maximum amount per charge (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds contribution) is determined rather than the maximum amount per charge (15 rounds per jack) Even if they are played, it is possible to make the player aware that it is more likely to determine the maximum amount per jackpot (15 round jackpots) than the non-maximum amount jackpots (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 round jackpots), When it is determined to be the type of jackpot form, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration.

  By the way, even if any of the display effect patterns among the A pattern, the B pattern and the C pattern is determined based on the passage detection of the game ball to the left gate 2575L by the route detection sensor 2580L, the non-maximum amount The game ball's passage to the jackpot mode determination gate 3660 determines the jackpot mode as to which of per (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of jackpot) or maximum per shot (15 rounds of jackpot) is executed It is determined based on the detection by the gate detection sensor 3665. Therefore, the player looks at the display effect pattern displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670, and at the stage where the mode of the jackpot game to be executed has not yet been determined, any of the a pattern, b pattern and c pattern. It is possible to find out an interest to guess whether the lottery pattern has been determined (ie, the expected height at which the maximum amount is determined). Also, even if the player guesses that the b pattern is unlikely to determine the maximum amount of hits, there is still the possibility that the maximum amount of hits will be determined, so the degree of discouragement given to the player Too small.

  In addition, when passage of the game ball to the left gate 2575L is detected by the route detection sensor 2580L, only the display effect pattern displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 is determined, and the jackpot determination gate 3660 Only when the passage of the game ball is detected by the jackpot determination gate detection sensor 3665, either the non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds jackpot) or the maximum amount (15 rounds jackpot) is executed. It will be decided whether to Therefore, even if the display effect with the C pattern is performed on the mini-liquid crystal display 3670, it is not determined at this time per non-maximum amount, but the possibility of being determined for the maximum amount remains. It becomes.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the condition device is activated by winning the jackpot lottery, most of them are determined to be "reliable type jackpot form", "the pounding type of pounding type" is determined In this case, if it is determined to be a nine-round jackpot in which the provision of a fixed amount of award balls is secured, it may be determined to be "jackpot type of pounding type" by the player's intention. . In this way, when the condition device is activated by winning the jackpot lottery, the provision of a certain amount of prize balls is secured originally, but it is decided to be "jackpot type of pounding type" by daringly taking risks The mini LCD display 3670 has a maximum per capita (15 rounds), although it may be determined to be a jackpot on a non-maximal basis (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of jackpots). It is intended to perform a display effect that reminds the player that the jackpot is determined. This makes it possible to be aware of the player as though it is determined to be the maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpots), although it may be determined to be the non-maximum amount per unit, and thus, it will It becomes possible to suppress that a display effect such as waking up is performed despite being determined to be the "big hit form of".

  Also, even if it is determined in step S6078 that the b pattern (lottery pattern in which the non-maximum amount per shot is more likely to be determined than the maximum amount per shot), as shown in FIG. It is highly likely that the A pattern or B pattern that can make the player conscious as if it is likely or likely to be determined is a display effect pattern. On the other hand, despite being determined to be the b pattern, the player is conscious as if it is likely to be determined to non-maximum per unit (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of jackpots) rather than maximum per unit The probability of being determined as a C pattern that can be assigned is only as low as 10%. As described above, when it is determined that "the jackpot type of pounding type" is selected, even if it is determined to be the b pattern, it is a display effect that reminds the player that it is determined to be the maximum amount rather than the non maximum amount. I want to do it.

  Also, when the pattern b is determined in step S6078, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), the non-maximum amount per unit (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds) is determined rather than the maximum amount per 15 rounds. Although it is likely to be played, as shown in FIG. 206, the player has a 40% probability as if the player is likely to be determined per maximum (15 rounds of jackpots) rather than per non-maximum amount. It is decided to be an A pattern that can be made to be conscious.

  It should be noted that the uplifting bliss effect is displayed on the mini-liquid crystal display 3670 only when a specific condition such as being determined as the c pattern (lottery pattern in which the maximum amount is determined more easily than the non maximum amount) is established in step S6078. It may be done. This uplifting and blissful effect is, for example, a Premier pattern (not shown) which is displayed only when the c pattern is determined, or a b pattern (a lottery pattern in which a non-maximum amount is more likely to be determined than a maximum amount) When it is determined to be), it corresponds to a subpremier pattern (not shown) which is not displayed. The premier pattern is, for example, a display effect pattern in which only one large dragon 5000 is displayed against 15 small dragons 5100. For example, the small sub-premacy pattern is a large dragon 5000 corresponding to 15 small dragons 5100. It is a display effect pattern in which only two heads are displayed. Although the premier pattern is a confirmed effect pattern that the c pattern is determined, it is not a confirmed effect pattern in which the maximum amount per hit (15 rounds of big hit) is determined. Similarly, although the sub-premier pattern is a confirmed effect pattern that is not determined to be the b pattern, it is not a confirmed effect pattern for which the maximum amount of hits is determined. If the Premier Pattern or Sub Premier Pattern is displayed on the Mini LCD Display 3670, is it still a jackpot game with a non-maximum amount of jackpot game mode (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of jackpots)? It is because it has not been determined whether the jackpot game of the maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpots) is to be executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, which of the three rounds, six rounds, twelve rounds, and fifteen rounds of jackpots is executed is determined when it is determined to be "the jackpot form of pounding type". From the undetermined stage, the player guesses the degree of expectation that the jackpot game of the maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpot) will be executed by visually recognizing the display effect displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670. Can. In other words, the mini LCD display 3670 performs either the non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds jackpot) jackpot game and the maximum amount (15 round jackpot) jackpot game It can be said that the display effect of the lottery process for determining whether or not to be displayed is displayed in a mode that can be visually recognized by the player. Then, the display effect displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 is that the non-maximum amount is determined with a higher probability than the actual probability that the maximum amount is determined rather than the non-maximum amount. It is possible to give discouragement to the player by performing the jackpot game of the non-maximum amount even though the display effect which gives the player expectation is performed by performing the display effect reminding the player. It becomes possible to avoid.

  Here, whether or not the game mode is shifted to the gaming state in which the probability change function is activated after the jackpot game is performed is determined by the processing of steps S316 and S317 shown in FIG. 197, but the notification The timing can be broadly divided into two timings. That is, a game using two gates 2575L and 2575R is provided, one of which is to proceed with the game under "reliable type jackpot form" or "shocked type jackpot form". The other timing is two gates on whether to proceed with the game under the "relief type jackpot form" or "the pounding type jackpot form". It is the timing after the game using 2575L and 2575R is provided.

  That is, in the case where notification is made at a timing before the game utilizing the two gates 2575L and 2575R is provided, for example, if transition to the gaming state in which the probability change function is activated, "reliable type In the jackpot form of the "3" round (a game mode in which only the least amount of balls can be obtained) in which even a payout of a certain amount of balls guaranteed is not carried out, even at risk of gaming risk determined as a jackpot game mode , It becomes possible to aim that a game under "the jackpot form of pounding type" is started. Alternatively, if it is shifted to the gaming state in which the probability change function is activated, it is possible that the jackpot of the specific type has been won, and in this case, even if the gaming ball passes through any gate 2575, 15 Since the jackpot game of the round comes to be played, with the expectation, the game under the “reliable type jackpot form” without gaming risk may be started. In addition, if it is not shifted to the game state in which the probability change function is activated, although the expected value of the amount of prize balls that can be acquired is low, it does not take a game risk and a certain amount or more It is possible to expand the range of gaming strategies, such as playing a game to be started under the “reliable type jackpot form” in which the payout is guaranteed. In particular, in this embodiment, the time during which the game ball is guided to the right gate 2575R by the movable valve 2551 is 17 seconds, and the time lag between the firing of the game ball and the arrival of the movable valve 2551 occurs. The player can select such a game strategy because it is possible to play the game so that the right gate 2575R can reliably roll the game ball even if the range of time is taken into consideration. It will be possible to do so.

  In addition, as timing before a game using two gates 2575L and 2575R is provided, it is possible to adopt notification etc. by a symbol combination appearing at the time of symbol stop. On the other hand, as a timing after the game using two gates 2575L and 2575R is provided, the notification by the effect image in the period when the big hit start interval effect is performed, the effect image in the big hit game It is possible to adopt notification by means of

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the front end of the third stage 2513 in the stage 2510 of the center combination 2500 where the gaming balls roll is in front of the front surface of the gaming panel 1200 (panel board 1210) Compared with a conventional pachinko machine which extends to substantially the same position as the front end of the front component 1110A and has the front end substantially at the same position as the front of the game panel 1200, the depth in the front-back direction of the stage 2510 is increased. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled in various states by the wide stage 2510, and the movement of the game ball is prevented from being monotonous by causing the game ball to perform various movements on the stage 2510. It can make it hard to get bored and can entertain the player with the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510, Interest in the player skills who can be suppressed.

  In addition, the front end of the third stage 2513 in the stage 2510 on which the game ball can roll is extended forward of the front surface of the game panel 1200 to substantially the same position as the front end of the front component 1110A partitioning the outer periphery of the game area 1100 Since the front end of the third stage 2513 is almost at the same position as the front end of the game area 1100, the game ball rolls around the front end of the third stage 2513, which is a stage in a conventional pachinko machine The game ball can be rolled at a position as close as possible to the player side than the game ball rolling on the top, and it is easy to see the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 and the movement of the game ball is made more It can be entertaining.

  Furthermore, the rear end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is positioned behind the rear surface of the gaming panel 1200, and on the stage 2510, the gaming ball is positioned forward of the front surface of the gaming panel 1200. Since it is possible to roll between a position behind the rear surface of the panel 1200 and the depth in the front-rear direction of the stage 2510 as wide as possible, the wide stage 2510 allows various gaming balls to be made. The game balls can be rolled in various states, and by making the game balls move in various ways on the stage 2510, it is possible to prevent the movement of the game balls from becoming monotonous and make it difficult to get bored, and A pachinko machine 1 capable of enjoying the movement of the game ball rolling on 2510 and capable of suppressing the decrease in interest for the game It is possible to truly embody.

  Further, since the center character 2500 is provided with the peripheral wall 2503 projecting forward, a stage 2510, which is arranged in a frame by forming a border by the peripheral wall 2503 of the center character 2500, and each effect unit 3200, 3400, A pachinko machine 1 can be provided which can stand up the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like and can strongly attract the player's attention.

  In addition, when the game ball enters the first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 opened on the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510, the chance exit 2518 opens immediately above the first starting opening 2101. The game balls are released, and the game balls can be received by the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 with high probability, so the game balls rolling on the stage 2510 are the first chance entrance 2516 Alternatively, the player can be excited and excited by entering the second chance entrance 2517 or not, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 to reduce the interest in the game. It can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player is driven into the game area 1100 so as to aim at the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 disposed below the center character 2500. Even if the game ball comes in contact with the obstacle nail at the lower side of the center character 2500 and bounces upward, the game ball bounced by the third stage 2513 bounces downward and enters the window 2501 of the center character 2500. This prevents the game ball from intruding into the liquid crystal display device 1900 and causing a problem, and can prevent the game from being interrupted due to the occurrence of the problem. In addition, the third stage 2513 for preventing entry of gaming balls is located from the position between the second stage 2512 and the fourth stage 2514 formed on the lower side of the center character 2500 rather than the front face of the gaming panel 1200 (panel board 1210). Since it is made to extend forward, the third stage 2513 can be made relatively inconspicuous relatively by moving away from the inner circumference of the center character 2500, and the third stage extended forward. Since it is possible to avoid inhibiting the decoration of other decorations etc. by 2513 and the positional relationship between the third stage 2513 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the vertical direction is longer than that of the conventional pachinko machine, the liquid crystal display The light emitted from the device 1900 and reflected by the upper surface of the third stage 2513 can be made difficult to reach the player's eyes Thereby avoiding the appearance of a pachinko machine 1 is deteriorated by preventing the visible glowing top surface of the third stage 2513.

  In addition, the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are disposed above the third stage 2513 which prevents the game ball from entering and abuts against the obstacle nail implanted under the center character 2500. The game ball does not pass through the warp entrance 2504 (the regular route) because it can be avoided that the game ball bouncing upward gets on the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 and the third stage 2513 It is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by preventing the game ball from being supplied onto the stage 2510 without passing through the regular route. The game with the pachinko machine 1 can be continued.

  In addition, since the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510 are disposed above the third stage 2513 that prevents the game ball from entering, the first stage 2511 is not blocked by the third stage 2513. The game ball rolling on the second stage 2512 can be shown from the player side to make it easy to see the game ball, and the game ball rolling on the first stage 2511, the second stage 2512, and the third stage 2513 It is possible to enjoy the movement and suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  Furthermore, a stage 2510 capable of releasing the gaming ball into the gaming area 1100 at a position immediately above the first starting opening 2101 is provided, and the gaming ball is at the gaming area from a position immediately above the first starting opening 2101 in the stage 2510 When released into 1100, the gaming balls are received to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 with high probability, so the gaming balls supplied on the stage 2510 are released from directly above the first starting opening 2101 The player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the player is excited, and the expectation for the acceptance of the game balls to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 can be enhanced, and the player rolls on the stage 2510 The player can enjoy the movement of the game ball and can suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game. In addition, since the game ball can be released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 immediately above the first starting opening 2101, the game ball aimed at the warp entrance 2504 so that the game ball is supplied onto the stage 2510 The player can be made to perform the hitting operation positively and can enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball, and the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are arranged above the third stage 2513. Since the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 can be favorably seen, it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

  Also, when the game ball enters the warp entrance 2504 of the center character 2500, the game ball is supplied from the warp exit 2505 to the first stage 2511 and then released to the second stage 2512, and the game ball intrusion from the second stage 2512 Because it is supplied to the fourth stage 2514 and the fifth stage 2515 via the third stage 2513 to be prevented, and is released from the fifth stage 2515 into the gaming area 1100, the first stage 2511 to the fifth stage 2515 By the stage 2510 having up to, the player can enjoy rolling of more various game balls, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. Further, as described above, since the stage 2510 is multi-staged and the rolling time of the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2510 is long, some players may have a driving time interval for striking the gaming ball into the gaming area 1100. It is possible to make the game longer, and it is possible to prevent the game ball being thrown away from being consumed early, and to make the player feel that it is obtained by enjoying the game for a long time, and the interest for the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the third stage 2513 extended forward of the front surface of the game panel 1200 as a part of the stage 2510 is provided, the warp entrance 2504 is entered and the stage 2510 from the warp exit 2505 (first stage 2511 The game balls supplied to the) roll on the third stage 2513 in the left-right direction, and can roll the game balls in front of the front face of the game panel 1200 (game panel 1200), and the conventional pachinko machine The game ball can be rolled in the lateral direction on the side closer to the player than the machine. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make the stage 2510 of an impression different from the stage of the conventional pachinko machine, and to make the pachinko machine 1 strongly attracted to the player's interest. It is possible to make it easy for the player to see the game ball rolling on the game side, and to enjoy the movement of the game ball and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

  In addition, the first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 where game balls can enter are formed on the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510, and the first start below the fifth stage 2515 Just above the mouth 2101 is formed a chance exit 2518 for releasing the gaming ball which has entered the first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 into the gaming area 1100, and it rotates on the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512. Whether the moving game ball enters the first chance entrance 2516 or the second chance entrance 2517, the player can be excited and excited, and the player's expectation for the game is enhanced and the interest for the game decreases. The game ball is the first chance entrance 2516 and the second The time until the gaming ball is released into the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2518 by entering the slot entrance 2517, from the first stage 2511 to the fifth stage 2515 until it is released into the game area 1100 The game ball can be released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 in a shorter time than the time of the game, so by setting the stage 2510 in multiple stages, the time for the game ball to stay on the stage 2510 becomes longer and some players It is possible to avoid slowing down the pace of the game and lowering the interest, and to suppress the decrease in the interest by entertaining the game.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back unit 3000 disposed below the front view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 between the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and the liquid crystal display device 1900. The back-down unit base 3402 of the back-down rendering unit 3400 supports the back-back and back-back decoration 3450 and a pair of back-back side decoration 3420 respectively having a predetermined decoration so as to be vertically and rotatably supported and back It supports up and down front and back decoration 3506 via back and front front base 3502 attached to the lower back and back inside decoration 3450 and a pair of back and back side decoration 3420, and it is normal condition In this case, the back and back back decoration 3450, the pair of back and back back side decorations 3420, and the back and back front and back decoration 3506 are the front view opening 12 of the panel plate 1210. Because it is located outside 5 (including the lower side), it is difficult for the player to see from the player side the back and back back decoration 3450, a pair of back and back side decorations 3420, and the back and front back decoration 3506. It is in the state. Then, when the player knocks the gaming ball into the gaming area 1100 to change the gaming state, the back lower back middle decoration 3450 is raised to the inside of the front view opening 1215 according to the changed gaming state. The pair of back lower back side decorations 3420 rotate to the inside of the front view opening 1215 so that the tips come in contact with each other, or the back lower front middle decoration 3506 is lifted to the inside of the front view opening 1215, The back movable back decoration 3450, a pair of back back back side decoration 3420, and back back front inside decoration 3506 move to the inside of the front view opening 1215 in an appropriate combination, so a variety of movable effects can be realized. It is possible to do so, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored by various effects, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, the back lower back inner decorative body 3450 and the back lower front inner inner decorative body 3506 are raised to the inside of the front view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 at the approximate center in the left and right direction. Since the body 3420 is turned to the inside of the front view opening 1215 so as to surround the outer periphery of the back decoration 3450, for example, the back decoration 3450 is raised into the opening 1215 When the pair of back and rear side decorations 3420 are rotated into the opening 1215 afterward, the player can be surprised by raising and appearing the back and back decoration 3450 first. At the same time, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the back decoration 3450 and turn the pair of back decoration 3420 while making the player pay attention to the back decoration 3450. Let By enclosing the outer periphery of the back and back middle decoration 3450 with a pair of back and back side decoration 3420, the back and back middle decoration 3450 can be made to look like a large deformation, which further surprises the player and enjoys It is possible to make the player think that something is good for the player by seeing (appearing) the large back-to-back and back-to-back decoration 3450 and back-to-back side decoration 3420. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation of the player for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the pair of back lower rear side decorations 3420 are rotated from the outside to the inside of the front view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210, and compared with the case where they are linearly slid, Since the direction of the back and back side decoration 3420 is changed by the movement, the way of seeing the back and back side decoration 3420 changes during the rotation, and the turning against the back and back side decoration 3420 is made. Thus, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the movement of the back side decoration 3420 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, a pair of back lower back side decorative bodies 3420 are positioned such that the front face is behind the front back of the back back lower back decorative body 3450, and the back under back middle decorative body 3450 and a pair of back lower back When the side decoration 3420 is moved to the inside of the front opening 1215 to appear, the front of the pair of back and rear side decoration 3420 surrounding the outer periphery of the back and back middle decoration 3450 is back and back. Since it is located behind the front of the inner decoration 3450, it gives a sense of depth to the decoration composed of the back lower back middle decoration 3450 and a pair of back lower back side decoration 3420 to make it more three-dimensional The pachinko machine 1 can be made to look like, and the decorativeness (design) can be enhanced to attract the player's attention strongly. In addition, the front of the pair of back lower side decoration 3420 that encloses the outer periphery of the back lower back middle decoration 3450 is positioned behind the front of the back lower back middle decoration 3450, and the back lower back middle When the decorative body 3450 and the pair of back and rear side decorative bodies 3420 are made to appear, the outer side becomes farther from the player than the center, so that it is possible to have a wide decoration with a sense of perspective. The player may be surprised that the appearance of the inside of the front view opening 1215 may be blocked by the appearing back-to-back rear decoration 3450 and a pair of back-to-back rear side decorations 3420. To give a feeling of oppression, and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game by entertaining the decoration of the back decoration 3450 and the pair of back it can.

  In addition, as described above, since the front of the pair of back lower back side decorations 3420 can be placed on the back side compared to the front of the back down back middle decoration, a three-dimensional effect can be given to the decoration, so Even if the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction in the lower back middle and lower back decoration 3450 and the pair of back lower back and side decoration 3420 is reduced, three-dimensional decoration can be sufficiently exhibited, and the back lower back and inner decoration Since the thickness of the 3450 and the pair of back and rear side decorations 3420 can be reduced, a space in the front and rear direction for installation of the back and back middle decoration 3450 and the pair of back and rear side decorations 3420 can be made It is possible to make the space relatively small, and to secure the space of other decorations relatively, or to make the back and back inside decoration 3450, the back and back side decoration 3420, and the back and front inside decoration 3506 etc. Enlarge It can be, can be a difficult pachinko machine 1 tired Te strongly attracted the attention of more players.

  In addition, back to back decoration 3450, a pair of back to back side decoration 3420, and back to front inside decoration 3506 etc, back to back side decoration substrate 3426, back to back decoration substrate 3456, back to back Since the front side decoration substrate 3536 and the back side front inside decoration substrate 3546 are provided, the back side back side decoration substrate 3426 provided for each, the back side back inside decoration substrate 3456, the back side front side decoration substrate 3536 are provided. By making the back-and-back back-and-back decoration 3450 etc. emit light and decorate appropriately by the back-and-front front / back decoration substrate 3546, it becomes possible to variously change the appearance of the back-back back-and-back decoration 3450 etc. The combination of the light emitting decorations of the decorative body 3450, the pair of back and rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the back and front back middle and back decorative body 3506 can present various effects to the player, making it hard to get bored and playing Can be interest in the user of the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, it has a hook-shaped pointer member 3458 that rotates on the front of the back decoration 3450 (the decoration main body 3454) which is raised and lowered between the inner side and the lower side of the front view opening 1215 in the panel plate 1210. Therefore, it is possible to entertain not only the appearance of the decoration main body 3454 but also the rotation of the pointer member 3458 by rotating the pointer member 3458 after raising it to the inside of the front view opening 1215, making the player versatile. The presentation can be presented to make it hard to get tired, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game and to make the pointer-like pointer member 3458 look like a clock hand, By rotating the pointer member 3458, the player can be made to think that time is imminent and it is possible to make it harahara and pounding, and to entertain the player and play a game. Against interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the pointer 3458 in the back-and-back rear decoration 3450 can be illusive as a clock needle, the pointer 3458 is in a predetermined rotational position (for example, the position at which the rotation started, Position, the position of a specific decoration provided on the decoration body 3454 on the rear side of the pointer 3458, etc.), and so on. The player's interest can be drawn to the pointer member 3458 (back and bottom back decoration 3450) until the player reaches the turning position of the player, thereby making it difficult for the player to get bored and reducing the interest in gaming Can.

  Furthermore, the back bottom front unit 3500 has a back bottom front center decoration 3506 which is three-dimensionally formed in a predetermined shape, and a back bottom front center decoration extending outward from the left and right sides of the top back decoration 3506. Is supported by the back lower front middle decoration 3506, and the front end side is provided with a pair of back lower front side decoration 3530 that rotates between a position lower than the base end and an upper position. When the back lower front inner decoration 3506 is raised from the lower side of the front view opening 1215, the back lower front inner decoration 3506 appears and is disposed on the left and right sides of the back lower front inner decoration 3506 at the same time Since the pair of back lower front side decorations 3530 rotates to a position where the tip side is higher than the base end, a pair of back lower front sides extending diagonally upward from the back lower front middle decoration 3506 The entire decoration is large by the decoration 3530 It can look like it's not like it, and it can draw the player's attention to the unit in front of the back and bottom, and gives the impression that it will spread to the player due to the movable state of the unit in back and bottom back 3500 It is possible to enhance the player's sense of excitement and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, the back-down back middle decoration 3450, a pair of back-back back side decoration 3420, and the back-back front middle decoration 3506 etc. are disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 respectively. When the back, back, back, inside decoration 3450, the pair of back, back side decoration 3420, and the back, back, front, inside decoration 3506 are moved from the outside to the inside of the front view opening 1215, respectively, Since it will be positioned (appears) on the front, the back and back inside decoration 3450, the pair of back and back side decorations 3420, and the back and front inward decoration that appear on the liquid crystal display device 1900 appear. By blocking by 3506, etc., it is possible to change the appearance of the displayed effect image and the appearance of the appearance of the appearance of the appearance of the appearance of the appearance to be presented to the player more colorful effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored Flavor can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the respective decoration bodies such as the back-to-back and back-to-back decoration 3450, the pair of back-to-back side decorations 3420, and the back-to-front and front decoration 3506 etc. move (appear) to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal display As the effect image displayed on the device 1900 is blocked by the appearance of the appearance of the decoration image, the player can easily notice that the decoration is movable, and the decoration moves to the inside of the front view opening 1215. While being able to attract attention and entertain the movement, the appearance of the decorative body makes it possible for the player to think that there is something good to be done, and increases the sense of expectation for the game and the interest is reduced Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since it is possible to move each decoration body such as back-to-back and back-to-back decoration 3450, a pair of back-to-back side decorations 3420, and back-to-front and front decoration 3506 to the front of liquid crystal display device 1900, liquid crystal display The effect image displayed on the device 1900 can be associated with the motion of each decoration, and a collaboration effect combining the image effect by the effect image and the movable effect by the movement of the decoration can be performed, A variety of effects can be made to entertain the player and prevent the interest in the game from being reduced.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second slide base 3248 of the back-up effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 moves up and down according to the game state which changes by hitting the game ball into the game area 1100. Since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second raising and lowering decorative body 3250) attached to the front surface of the second slide base 3248 also moves and the entire effect image can be moved, the effect image is displayed. A strong impact can be given to a player or the like who has a preconception that the display device is fixed and does not move, and the player's interest in the presentation image (second liquid crystal display device 3252) While being able to attract and entertain a stage image, it is various by displaying a stage image according to the movement of the second raising and lowering decoration 3250 It can be presented an effect on the player, interest in the game of the player to hardly tired effect can be suppressed.

  In addition, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is moved to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100, and the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is the second liquid crystal display device 3252 Because it is blocked by (the second raising and lowering decorative body 3250), it is possible to surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest to the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the blocked effect image and the second liquid crystal display device Since the player can be entertained by the effect image displayed on 3252 and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game and the effect image is displayed on the moving second liquid crystal display device 3252, the second The second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the liquid crystal display device 19 do not shift the movement of the elevating decoration 3250 (the second liquid crystal display device 3252) and the effect image. Each of the 0 effect images can be displayed in a good state, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by entertaining the movement of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (the second lifting and lowering decoration 3250) and the respective effect images. Can.

  Furthermore, with the second slide base 3248 and the second lifting and lowering decoration 3250 separated, the second fixing base 3248 a of the second slide base 3248 is inserted into the fixing groove 3250 a of the second lifting and lowering decoration 3250. The slide base 3248 and the second lifting and lowering decoration 3250 are relatively moved to one side in the vertical direction to insert the fixing piece 3248a into the fixing groove 3250a and the second lifting and lowering decoration in the locking hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248 By elastically locking the locking claw 3250c of the body 3250, the fixing piece 3248a is prevented from being removed from the inside of the fixing groove 3250a, and the second slide elevating body 3250 (with respect to the second slide base 3248) The second liquid crystal display 3252) is attached. On the other hand, in a state in which the second lifting and lowering decoration 3250 is attached to the second slide base 3248, the locking claw 3250c of the second lifting and lowering decoration 3250 is elastically deformed to engage with the locking hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248. After releasing the stop, the second slide base 3248 and the second lifting and lowering decoration 3250 are relatively moved to the other side in the vertical direction to fix the fixing piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 to the fixing groove for the second lifting and lowering decoration 3250 By removing it from inside the 3250a, the second lifting and lowering decorative body 3250 (second liquid crystal display device 3252) is removed from the second slide base 3248, and the second lifting and lowering decoration 3250 is secured to the second slide base 3248. It can be removably attached to the In addition, the locking claw 3250c of the second lifting and lowering decorative body 3250 is elastically locked to the locking hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248 so that the fixing piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 is the second lifting and lowering decoration The second slide base 3248 and the second lifting and lowering decorative body 3250 can be easily detached from each other by the elastic deformation of the locking claw 3250 c. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252 of the second lifting and lowering decorative body 3250, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be easily removed, so maintenance such as replacement of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 It is possible to easily carry out the maintenance and the time during which the game is interrupted by maintenance can be shortened as much as possible, and the interruption is resumed before the player feels frustrated by the interruption, and the player's interest in the game is entertained. While being able to suppress the decrease, various effects using the effect image by the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be performed without problems, and the movement of the second raising and lowering decorative body 3250 (second liquid crystal display device 3252) By entertaining the player with the effect image or the effect image, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing the decrease in the player's interest.

  In addition, since the second lifting and lowering decorative body 3250 is detachably attached to the second slide base 3248, the assembly operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified, and the cost for manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 increases. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be easily removed when the pachinko machine 1 is discarded, so waste separation work can be performed easily, and the environmentally friendly pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. It can be done.

  In addition, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the second liquid crystal display device can be positioned from the second slide base 3248 positioned outside the liquid crystal display device 1900 in front view. Since the 3252 is attached so as to extend to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, moving the second slide base 3248 makes it easy to vibrate the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 There is a possibility that a problem may easily occur, but as described above, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is detachably attached to the moving base, even if a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252 Therefore, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be maintained in a good state. Therefore, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be moved to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 without any problem, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is a display device separate from the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect image can be displayed even if the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is moved to the outside of the liquid crystal display device 1900, The effect pattern by the moving second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be made more colorful, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 hard to get tired, and there is no need to have a large liquid crystal display device 1900. , It can suppress that the cost concerning pachinko machine 1 increases.

  In addition, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is separately moved to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the positions of the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the effect image of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 differ in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to perform effects with a depth by two effect images, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by alarming the player, and attract the interest of the player to display each effect image Also, it is possible to enjoy the movement of the image display means, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second raising and lowering decorative body 3250) is disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210) partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 Can prevent the flow of gaming balls circulating in the game area 1100 from being blocked, and the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the movement of the gaming balls, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be used as the gaming panel 1200 ( As it is made visible through the opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210), if a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252, it can be removed from the second slide base 3248 through the opening 1215 of the gaming panel 1200, The time and effort required for the maintenance of the two liquid crystal display device 3252 can be facilitated to achieve the same function and effect as described above. Rukoto can.

  Furthermore, since the first elevation decoration 3218 is provided which can cover a part of the front face of the second elevation decoration 3250 and is movable independently of the second elevation decoration 3250, the first elevation By appropriately moving the decorative body 3218, it is possible to change the range in which the effect image of the second liquid crystal display 3252 can be seen from the player side, and it is possible to entertain the player with more various effects. To make it difficult to get rid of the interest in the game.

  In addition, since the first raising and lowering decorative body 3218 moving on the front side of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is provided with a predetermined decoration, the player is made the first raising and lowering decorative body 3218 by the decoration of the first raising and lowering decorative body 3218 The second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second raising and lowering decorative body 3250) also enters the field of view by the player paying attention to the first raising and lowering decorative body 3218, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 displays it. It is possible to make sure that the effect image is displayed, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball hit into the game area 1100 is accepted to the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102, a predetermined lottery result is drawn, and The large winning opening 2103 can be accepted according to the drawing result of the drawing, and a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by causing the large winning opening 2103 to receive the gaming ball. It is possible to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball aiming at 2101, the second start opening 2102, and the big winning opening 2103 and the payout of the game ball. In this pachinko machine 1, when the game ball is hit, the hit game ball is hit so as to circulate along the inner circumference of the game area 1100, that is, the game ball is hit with a predetermined strength or more. When it is filled in (so-called right-handed), the game ball thrown into the upper part of the game area 1100 along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 from the left distributes along the inner circumference to the opposite right side Since the game ball enters into the receiving space 2530 through the passage 2545, the gaming ball can be driven into the receiving space 2530 with a simple hitting operation, and the gaming ball which has entered the receiving space 2530 Since the game is discharged from the inside of the receiving space 2530 through the guiding passage 2540 to the upper side of the big winning opening 2103, the gaming ball released from the guiding passage 2540 through the receiving space 2530 is accepted when the big winning opening 2103 is acceptable. It is possible to make acceptance to the winning opening 2103 with a high probability. As a result, when the special winning opening 2103 becomes acceptable, it is possible to make a hitting operation aiming at the receiving space 2530 such that the gaming ball is released from the guide passage 2540. A movable valve 2551 is disposed in the receiving space 2530. When the gaming ball rolls in either direction left or right by the movable valve 2551 and is detected by the route detection sensor 2580, the movable valve 2551 rolls. The jackpot form according to the direction is given.

  Furthermore, since the movable lower decorative body 2567 and the movable upper decorative body 2565 are disposed behind the receiving space 2530, the movable lower decorative body 2567 and the movable upper decorative body 2565 press the inside of the game area 1100 including the receiving space 2530. It is possible to prevent the game area from becoming narrow by avoiding the game, and it becomes possible to distribute the game ball within a wide range as much as possible, and the motion of the pachinko machine 1 inherent game ball is enjoyed The movable lower decorative body 2567 and the movable upper decorative body 2565 can be enlarged or the movable range can be enlarged without compressing the inside of the game area 1100, and the movable lower decorative body 2567 and the movable upper The decorative body 2565 can be made to stand out, and the player can surely recognize the rolling direction of the gaming ball by the movable valve 2551. .

  Further, the slide of the slider 2555, which slides back and forth by the receiving drive motor 2558, is transmitted to the movable valve 2551 via the connection spring 2556 and the like, and the movable lower decorative body 2567 and the movable via the rack gear 2555f and the first transmission gear 2562 and the like. Since the power is transmitted to the upper decorative body 2565, the movable valve 2551, the movable lower decorative body 2567 and the movable upper decorative body 2565 can be driven by one receiving drive motor 2558, and the configuration relating to each drive is simplified. And the overall space for driving can be reduced. That is, the space for the movable lower decoration 2567, the movable upper decoration 2565, etc. can be relatively enlarged by reducing the space for driving the movable valve 2551, the lower movable decoration 2567 and the movable upper decoration 2565. It becomes.

  Further, when the game ball is hit with a predetermined strength or more, the game ball hit at the top of the game area 1100 along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 from the left side is left along the inner circumference as it is on the opposite right side Thus, the game ball can be driven into (into) the receiving space 2530 with a simple hitting operation.

  Furthermore, the periodic operation by the movable valve 2551 is performed at a constant cycle regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, the probability that a desired route in the receiving space 2530 has a high probability can be achieved by striking the gaming ball into the receiving unit 2550 which is always open using a period in which the detection of the gaming ball by the route detection sensor 2580 is not activated. In order to roll the gaming ball in the game ball, the gaming ball is taken into consideration at any timing in consideration of the operation with periodicity by the movable valve 2551 and the range of time lag occurring before reaching the movable valve 2551. It is designed to be able to appropriately seek out (practice) as to whether it should be launched. According to such a configuration, the consumption of a predetermined amount of gaming balls which can not be accepted by the starting opening is also promoted, and no value can be generated and no gaming conditions can be advanced. Even though the game is played under the game, the playability of the player can be maintained by the playability with a focus on future profits only.

  However, in the game (practice) under such game conditions, a search is made as to whether the game ball can be rolled to the desired route in the receiving space 2530 without any sense of tension Since it is only the case, it is also assumed that the firing timing of the gaming ball will fail due to the tension feeling in the production (period in which the detection of the gaming ball by the route detection sensor 2580 is not activated). Therefore, when a big hit is not won as a lottery result of the big hit, a small hit may be won with a predetermined probability. That is, in this case, although the condition device does not operate, it is a period during which the detection of the gaming ball by the route detection sensor 2580 is not activated, while the production (a period when the detection of the gaming ball by the route detection sensor 2580 is not activated) Since the rendition of the rendition (representation where it can not be recognized whether it is a production or not) is performed, it becomes possible to practice under a good sense of tension.

  In addition, the game ball is prevented from entering the receiving space 2530 while the movable valve 2551 is rotating, and the game ball that has attempted to enter the receiving space 2530 during the rotation is Since it can be stopped at the entrance (upper side of the movable valve 2551), by hitting the gaming ball so as to reach the rotating movable valve 2551 as a hitting operation of the gaming ball, in front of the movable valve 2551 A plurality of game balls can be parked. Therefore, when the movable valve 2551 performs a turning operation so as to roll the gaming ball in a predetermined direction, the plurality of game balls are hit and the gaming ball is held in front of the movable valve 2551 so that the turning operation is performed. While the game ball stopped can be reliably rolled in a predetermined direction, a plurality of game balls can be rolled in a predetermined direction substantially simultaneously.

  In addition, as described above, since the game ball can be parked on the front side of the movable valve 2551 during rotation, the game ball is parked by striking in more game balls while the game ball is parked. An interval (time interval, distance interval) in which the game ball and the game ball driven thereafter roll can be narrowed as much as possible. That is, since the rolling intervals of the plurality of gaming balls can be shortened by the time when they are stopped by the movable valve 2551 and brought close to each other, the turning operation is completed and the gaming balls are inserted into the receiving space 2530 When it becomes possible to enter, it becomes possible to continuously discharge at least two game balls to the big winning opening 2103 side at intervals shorter than normal, and usually for the time when the big winning opening 2103 can be accepted. More game balls can be received, and it is possible to make the player more entertaining and to suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, in order to receive more gaming balls into the big winning opening 2103, the timing when the gaming ball is stopped by the movable valve 2551 and the big winning opening 2103 through the receiving space 2530. Since it is necessary to hit the game ball in consideration of the timing at which the game can be accepted, the difficulty level of the hitting operation is surely increased, making it hard for the player who is used to the hitting operation to get bored. At the same time, it is possible to improve the motivation for the typing operation, and it is possible to enjoy the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  For example, in the above embodiment, when a jackpot of a specific type is prepared and a jackpot of this specific type is won, step S6073, even if a game is played under any jackpot form, Although 15 rounds of jackpot games are performed through the process of S6077, such a specific type of jackpot may not necessarily be prepared. That is, in this case, in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S607) shown in FIG. 201, the processes of steps S6072, S6073, S6076, and S6077 and the table shown in FIG. 202 will be omitted. In the jackpot form when the gaming ball passes, the jackpot game mode is determined with reference to the table of FIG. 203 regardless of the value of the jackpot symbol random number. On the other hand, in the jackpot form when the game ball passes the left gate 2575L, regardless of the value of the jackpot symbol random number, the jackpot game mode is determined with reference to the tables of FIGS. 204 (a) and (b) The Rukoto.

  The pachinko machine 1 described in the mode for carrying out the invention can be expressed as the following technical idea. In the following, the term described in the form for carrying out the invention described above is described in a broader sense, and the term “the term made in the generic concept” and the term described in the “form for carrying out the invention” In order to make correspondence with "," the above-mentioned "term described in the form for carrying out the invention" equivalent to "the term in the broader concept" is described in a parenthesis. However, once the above-mentioned "terms described in the form for carrying out the invention" corresponding to the "hyperconcepted terms" are described in parentheses once, they are omitted in the subsequent description in order to avoid duplicate descriptions. Have

  The technical concept of this gaming machine is as follows: A game area in which game media are thrown by the operation of a player, a receiver provided in the game area, and a lottery means for making a drop determination based on the reception of game media to the receiver. And the jackpot game execution means for executing any jackpot game among a plurality of jackpot games having different degrees of advantage for the player based on the result of the win determination being a hit, and the plurality of jackpot games Of the plurality of jackpot games, a maximum profit expectation display effect capable of giving a sense of expectation that the game is executed with the greatest profit with the highest degree of advantage for the player among the plurality of jackpot games is executed. Although the jackpot game has not been decided yet, it comprises The game determination means determines one of a plurality of lottery modes (a pattern to c pattern) different in the probability that the maximum profit per game is determined, and the determined lottery mode (a pattern to c pattern) Any one) is used to determine the jackpot game (round number) to be executed, and the maximum profit expectation presentation means is a stage where the jackpot game to be executed (round number) is not yet determined. Among the plurality of lottery modes, the maximum profit expectation display effect to be executed is determined based on the lottery mode determined among the plurality of lottery modes, and the jackpot game executed by the jackpot game determination means is determined A profit determination stage display effect means for performing display effect indicating whether or not the maximum profit per game is executed based on the It is.

  According to the above technical concept, the game ball as a game medium which is driven toward the game area 1100 by the operation of the player has a socket (first start port 2101, a second start port) provided in the game area 1100. It is acceptable in 2102). Then, based on the reception of gaming media to the receiving port, a predetermined winning determination is performed by the lottery means (step S315).

  If the result of the above-mentioned win determination is a hit (special hit), one of the jackpot games among the plurality of jackpot games having different degrees of advantage for the player is executed. The jackpot game executed here is determined to be any of a plurality of jackpot games. In addition, at the stage where the jackpot game to be executed has not yet been determined, the maximum profit expectation display effect that can give a sense of expectation that the maximum profit game with the greatest degree of advantage for the player is executed among the plurality of jackpot games It is executed despite being there.

  Here, the jackpot game to be executed is determined as follows. First, it is determined to be one of a plurality of lottery modes (a pattern to c pattern) in which the probability that the greatest profit per game is determined to be the highest in the degree of advantage for the player is different. The plurality of lottery modes are a normal lottery mode (a pattern) determined to be the maximum amount (15 rounds of big wins) with a predetermined probability, and a low amount for which the maximum amount is determined only with a probability lower than the predetermined probability. A mode (b pattern) and a high lottery mode (c pattern) determined to be the maximum per lot with a probability higher than a predetermined probability are prepared. However, the number of lottery modes is not limited to this. And among such a plurality of lottery modes, it is determined based on which lottery mode the jackpot game to be executed is to be performed. Then, the jackpot game to be executed is determined based on the lottery mode determined in this manner.

  By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, as described above, the maximum profit expectation display effect is executed even though the jackpot game (the number of rounds) to be executed is not yet determined. In addition, when the jackpot game to be executed is determined, a display effect indicating whether the game is executed per maximum profit is performed.

  Thus, unlike the conventional gaming machine in which the player simply looks at the display effect performed based on the lottery result, in this gaming machine, the jackpot game (the number of rounds) to be executed is still determined. The maximum profit game (15 rounds of jackpot games) is executed by performing both of the display effects performed despite the absence of the stage and the display effects performed at the stage when the jackpot game to be executed is determined. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the above technical concept, it is not always essential that "the jackpot form of the relief type" and the "jackpot form of the pounding type" be prepared, and the new display effect technique causes a decrease in interest It can be suppressed. However, the configuration described below may be provided.

  That is, if the result of the above-mentioned hit determination is a hit (special hit), it can be determined to be any of a plurality of hit modes by the multiple hit state creating means (corresponding to the process of step S604 operating the condition device). State. Specifically, this condition is a condition in which the jackpot mode to be executed has not yet been determined although the condition device has been activated. And, as the above-mentioned plural hitting modes, “the jackpot form of relief type” as the general hitting mode and the “big hitting form of the pounding type” as the special hitting mode which is the hitting mode different from the general hitting mode Is prepared.

  The “reliable type jackpot form” is a hitting mode in which it is possible to give a fixed amount of prize balls, as long as the game ball is fired toward the big winning opening 2103 where the opening and closing operation is performed during the jackpot game. It is guaranteed that a certain amount of winning balls will be paid out. In the present embodiment, nine rounds of jackpot games correspond. However, the present invention is not limited to a mode in which the provision of a certain amount of prize balls is always made possible when it is determined to be the “reliable type big hit form”. For example, basically, a certain amount of prize balls Although awarding is possible, it is possible to pay out more than a certain amount of prize balls or less than a certain amount with very low probability. Also, although the "relief type jackpot form" is determined to be any of a plurality of jackpots, such as being determined to be any of eight rounds, nine rounds and ten rounds, " It may be an aspect in which the degree of risk is lower than that of the “hit type of pounding type”. In this case, even if it is "relief type jackpot form", it is determined to be any of a plurality of jackpots, but the risk degree is low, and it is possible to stably give a prize ball. There is no change in

  In addition, “the jackpot type of pounding type” is a hitting aspect in which the winning balls of an amount far from the above-mentioned fixed amount are provided in a mode in which a difference is made. Specifically, it is possible to apply an amount of balls exceeding the predetermined amount per small amount (corresponding to the jackpot game of 3 rounds or 6 rounds of the embodiment) to which only the amount of balls falling below the predetermined amount is provided It is a hit mode in which any hit game is executed among the large amount of hits (corresponding to the 12 round or 15 round jackpot game of the present embodiment). The term "meaning that there is a difference" means that the amount of prize balls to be provided differs depending on which of the hitting modes is executed, such as a small amount per shot and a large amount per shot. Do.

  In addition, when “quantity below fixed amount” and “quantity above fixed amount” are determined to “jackpot type of pounding type”, it is risk compared to when it is determined to “jacket type of relief type” It is preferable that there is a difference in the amount of award balls to be given to the extent that the player feels that the value of is high. For example, "an amount below a certain amount" is greatly lower to about half or less than a certain amount, and "an amount exceeding a certain amount" is about 1.5 times or more as a certain amount The player is likely to feel that the risk is high when it is determined that “the jackpot form of throbbing type” is greater than when it is determined to be the jackpot form of peace of mind type ”. I think that the.

  In the present embodiment, the number of rounds is changed depending on whether it is determined to be “relief type jackpot form” or “small jackpot type” of “the pounding type jackpot form”. This is based on the premise that the amount of winnings awarded per round is the same. That is, by varying the number of rounds according to the mode of the jackpot game, the amount of prize balls to be provided is made different, but it is not limited to this. For example, although the number of rounds is the same, by varying the amount of award balls provided per round, the amount of award balls provided may be varied according to the mode of the jackpot game. Also, for example, the concept of the round may be eliminated, and the amount of award balls to be awarded may be made different by changing the open time of the big winning opening 2103 and the maximum number of winnings according to the mode of the big hit game.

  When it is determined that the hit mode of any of the plurality of hit modes, that is, the jackpot mode to be executed has not yet been determined although the condition device has been activated, Using the gaming ball as the gaming medium driven into the gaming area 1100 by the operation, the hitting manner to be provided is determined by the hitting manner determining means (corresponding to the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550). The hit mode determination means operates to be able to be given any of the general hit mode and the special hit mode, but operates to be determined as the general hit mode. That is, the player does not aim at a specific hit mode (general hit mode or special hit mode) to be determined and does not shoot the game ball, but merely just shoots the game ball toward the game area 1100. (For example, as long as the game ball is continuously fired toward the game area 1100 continuously), the hit mode determination means operates so that the general hit mode is determined more frequently than the special hit mode. .

  In this embodiment, after preparing the left side route determined in the special hitting mode and the right route determined in the general hitting mode, it is easier for the launched game ball to be led to the right route than the left route. In addition, although the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550 as the hitting mode determining means is operated, the mode in which the general hitting mode is easier to be determined than the special hitting mode is not limited to this. For example, although the destination to which the launched game ball is led is, for example, one, according to the timing when the game ball is led to the one lead destination, it is determined in the special hit mode or the general hit mode, Control may be performed so that the general hit aspect is more easily determined than the special hit aspect.

  When the hit mode is determined by the hit mode determination means, the jackpot game (jackpot game in the mode set in step S6084) in this determined execution mode is executed by the jackpot game execution means (step S210). Ru. Specifically, when a general hit game (9 rounds of jackpot games) is executed when the general hit mode is determined, the special hit mode is determined (YES in step S6075 and NO in step S6076). An internal special winning lottery is performed by the special winning determination means (step S 6080), and in this special winning lottery, the non-maximum amount per jackpot (3 rounds, 6 rounds or 12 rounds of jackpot) or the maximum amount per jackpot (15 rounds of jackpots) Is determined. And, in this internal lottery, when it is decided not to be the maximum amount per jackpot game of any of 3 rounds, 6 rounds and 12 rounds is executed, it is decided to be the maximum amount per jackpot (15 round jackpots) In the case where the player wins, the maximum amount of games (15 rounds of jackpot games) is executed.

  By the way, as described above, the hit mode determining means (the movable valve 2551 of the receiving unit 2550) takes a longer time than the mode (the mode illustrated in FIG. 136) in which the gaming ball is guided to the left route in the receiving space 2530. The game ball is maintained in the mode (the mode illustrated in FIG. 137) in which the gaming ball is guided to the right route in the receiving space 2530. Thus, when the jackpot game mode is determined, the general hit mode is determined rather than the special hit mode.

  In addition, in the case where the game ball is merely shot toward the game area 1100 instead of aiming at the timing at which the game ball is led to the specific route, the game ball is received in the receiving space 2530. It is more likely to be led to the right route than the left route inside. As a result, for the stability-oriented player, whenever the condition device operates to enable the general hit mode (relief type big hit mode) and the special hit mode (the pounding type big hit mode) to be made available, It is possible to reduce the burden of having to select one of the above. In particular, in the case of a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is temporarily interrupted, for example, the game is interrupted so that the player's intention is not selected in spite of the jackpot being won. It also makes me feel bothered by In this regard, according to the gaming machine of the present technical concept, it is possible to provide a gaming machine adopting new game characteristics without giving such a bother to the player.

  By the way, if the special hitting mode is decided despite the general hitting mode being generally decided instead of the special hitting mode unless the game ball is fired aiming at the timing when the gaming ball is led to a specific route, the left side There is a high possibility that the game ball was launched aiming at the timing when the game ball is led to the route.

  Thus, for example, when it is determined to be a special hit mode as a result of the game ball being fired aiming at the timing when the game ball is led to the left route while the general hit game is generally executed, for example, three rounds Although there is a risk that a small amount per shot is executed, from the player's point of view, it is naturally expected that a maximum amount per game (15 rounds of jackpot game) will be executed. In addition, it is not necessarily aimed at the timing when the game ball is led to the left route, but when it is just fired the game ball, it is lower than that determined by the general hit mode because most of them are determined by the general hit mode. It is decided on the special per aspect only at the frequency. Therefore, it seems that the expectation for the maximum amount of games (15 rounds of jackpot games) to be executed is very low despite the fact that the special hit mode is determined while the general hit game is executed. When the display effect is performed, it may wake up and the interest may decrease. Then, when the condition device is activated, although it is in a state that both the general hit aspect and the special hit aspect can be given, the timing determined to be the general hit (the timing when the special hit aspect is not determined) There is a possibility that only the game in which the game ball is aimed at and the game ball is released may not be played, and the fun of the game machine in which both the general hit mode and the special hit mode can be provided will be withdrawn.

  Therefore, in this gaming machine, if it is determined to be a special hitting mode while being generally determined to be a general hitting mode as long as the game balls are not shot aiming at the timing when the gaming ball is led to a specific route, Even though the decision is made, the probability determined per maximum amount (15 rounds of big wins) is lower than the probability determined per non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of big hits), As the effect mode displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670, the display effect (pattern A) recalling the maximum amount of hits is displayed with a relatively high probability than the display effect (pattern C) recalling the non maximum amounts of hits I am trying to As a result, although the probability determined per maximum amount is lower than the probability determined per non-maximum amount, the player who sees the presentation mode displayed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 is the largest number. The degree of expectation that jackpot game is given per volume (15 rounds) is as high as possible compared to the possibility that jackpot games will be executed per non-maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds) It becomes possible to make the player aware. As a result, when the special hit mode is generally determined while the general hit game is executed when the condition device is activated, the probability that the maximum hit game (15 round jackpot games) is executed is not Although the probability that the maximum amount of games (3 rounds, 6 rounds, 12 rounds of jackpots) is lower than the probability of being executed, the player's expectation for the maximum amount of games can be increased, and the interest is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress.

  Moreover, the display effect performed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670 has passed the jackpot determination gate 3660 after the route detection sensor 2580L detects that the game ball launched by the player has passed the left gate 2575L. Since it is a display effect performed until the effect is detected by the jackpot mode determination gate detection sensor 3665, the special touch mode is determined when the display effect is performed on the mini liquid crystal display 3670. However, the determination of maximum per unit or non maximum per unit has not yet been made. Therefore, unlike a conventional gaming machine in which the player merely looks at the display effect, the player can be greatly interested in the display effect performed by the mini liquid crystal display 3670.

  Furthermore, the internal special winning lottery is determined as the normal lottery mode (a pattern) determined to be the maximum amount (15 rounds of big wins) with a predetermined probability and the maximum amount only with a probability lower than the predetermined probability Which lottery mode is to be performed among a plurality of lottery modes including a low lottery mode (b pattern) which is not performed and a high lottery mode (c pattern) determined to be the maximum amount with a probability higher than a predetermined probability You may make it provide the special hit random selection | lottery determination means which is determined. In this case, a display effect may be recalled that it is determined to be non-maximum amount per shot (3R, 6R, 12R) although it is not necessarily determined to be maximum amount per round (15R round) by the special hit lottery means. When a specific condition is satisfied in a display region (pattern A) which can give an expectation that it is determined to be the maximum amount with a probability higher than the probability (c pattern) (in c pattern In the case where it is determined, display effect (display effect that the small dragon 5100 of c pattern determination is stopped) indicating that at least the low lottery mode is not determined by the special hit lottery mode determining means is executed. As a result, the player's expectation for the maximum amount per game can be further enhanced, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  It should be noted that, when the specific condition is satisfied, the special hit lottery mode determining means is substituted for the display effect indicating that at least the low lottery mode (b pattern) is not determined by the special hit lottery mode determining means. A display effect may be executed to confirm that the high lottery mode (c pattern) has been determined.

  In addition, with display effects that can give the player a sense of anticipation that the player is determined to be determined to be the maximum amount (15 rounds of jackpots), the probability of being determined to be the maximum amount per game is actually higher than the non-maximum amount game. The present invention is not limited to display effects, and includes display effects capable of making the player aware of how much a maximum amount of games are executed regardless of the internal probability. For example, the display effect of the C pattern in this embodiment is a probability determined per maximum amount (15 rounds jackpot) than a probability determined per non maximum amount (3 rounds, 6 rounds or 12 rounds jackpots) Is a display effect that is not determined in the c pattern (see FIG. 204 (b)), which is higher (see FIG. 206), the non-maximum amount per game than the maximum amount per game (3 rounds, 6 rounds It can be said that the probability determined to be a jackpot game of 12 rounds is actually a high display effect. However, regardless of the internal probability, the character also includes a display effect in which the character (Oryu 5000) reminding of the non-maximal hit is larger than the character (Oryu 5100) recalling the maximum mass hit is there.

  In addition, the normal jackpot game (9 round jackpot game) is a hit game that is executed when determined in the general hit mode (relief type jackpot form). In addition, the maximum amount per shot and the non-maximum amount per shot are types of hits that are further determined when determined in the special hitting mode (the jackpot type of pounding type). And the maximum amount per game (15 rounds of jackpot games) is a per game to be executed when determined to be the maximum amount per game, the general percussion game (3 rounds of jackpot, 6 rounds of jackpots, 12 round The jackpot significance of) is a winning game that is performed when determined to be the non-maximum amount.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204, it is not determined to be either the maximum game or the non-maximum game, but three rounds, six rounds, twelve rounds and fifteen rounds. The number of rounds may be determined first, and then the number of rounds may be determined.

  Further, in the above embodiment, three rounds, excluding the nine rounds of jackpot games to be executed when determined as the general hit aspect (reliable type jackpot form) when determined as the special hit aspect It is determined to be one of 6 rounds, 12 rounds and 15 rounds, but may be determined including 9 rounds of jackpot games.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the game machine to which the pachinko machine 1 is applied is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 main frame 4 game board 5 door frame 1100 game area 1200 game panel 1900 liquid crystal display 2000 front unit 3000 back unit 3010 back box 3040 panel relay board 3041 lamp drive board 3045 motor drive board 3600 back lower right Production unit 3600
4010 Peripheral control board (effect control means)
4140 Peripheral control unit (effect control means)

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area in which game media are inserted by the operation of a player;
A main unit frame that detachably supports the game board,
A door frame having a game window in which at least the game area of the game board supported by the main frame is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the front of the main frame and is closed;
Dish light emitting decoration means having a dish portion formed below the gaming window and capable of expanding forward and storing the game medium, and a light emitting decoration portion capable of emitting light;
A first light emitting decoration means provided close to the dish light emitting decoration means, which decorates a predetermined area on the outer periphery of the gaming window, and which can emit light toward the player;
A second light emitting decoration means for decorating an area different from the predetermined area on the outer periphery of the game window, and having a bulging portion capable of bulging in front of the first light emitting decoration means;
Equipped with
The three-dimensional shape of the decoration provided to the light emitting decorative portion of the dish light emitting decoration means and the decoration by the three-dimensional shape of the decoration provided to the second light emitting decoration means are integrally decorated,
Performing a light emission effect in which the light emission decoration portion of the dish light emission decoration means and the bulging portion of the second light emission decoration means cooperate to emit light;
The bulging portion is located on the open side of the door frame supported to be openable and closable with respect to the front surface of the main body frame,
The light emitting bulging portion is configured not only to be able to emit light to the inside of the gaming machine which is the gaming window side in front view, but also to be able to emit light to the outside of the gaming machine. On the other hand, it is possible to emit light by a specific light emitting unit capable of emitting notification light to be notified.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific light emitting unit is also used as a light emitting unit that emits effect light.